BS4_I_for non $ pdf.qxd
Physiology
• Force Transducers........................................................see pages I2 – I8
• Introduction to Stimulators ..............................................see page I19
HSE-HA Stimulator I, see page I12
• Stimulating Electrodes ..........................................see pages I10 – I11
• HSE-HA Stimulators
and Stimulator Modules .......................................see pages I12 – I21
• Other Stimulators...................................................see pages I22 – I27
• HSE-HA PLUGSYS
Modular System and Cases..................................see pages I28 – I30
• HSE-HA PLUGSYS Case Modification Modules.............see page I31
• HSE-HA PLUGSYS Transducer Amplifiers ........see pages I33 – I34
• HSE-HA PLUGSYS Flowmeters..........................................see page I34
HSE-HA PLUGSYS Modular Measuring
and Control System, see page I28
NEW• HSE-HA PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers ......see pages I35 – I45
• HSE-HA PLUGSYS Amperometric
and Electrometer Amplifiers ...............................see pages I46 – I47
• HSE-HA PLUGSYS Calculating Modules ............see pages I48 – I49
• HSE-HA PLUGSYS Input/Output Modules ........see pages I50 – I52
NEW• HSE-HA PLUGSYS Controlling Modules............see pages I53 – I58
NEW• Laser Doppler Flowmeter ..................................................see page I59
• Amplifiers and Preamplifiers..............................see pages I60 – I64
NEW
Laser Doppler Flowmeter, see page I59
• Chart Recorders ......................................................see pages I65 – I70
NEW• Electrodes and Cables ...........................................see pages I71 – I79
NEW• HSE-HA Data Acquisition
Hardware and Software .....................................see pages I80 – I100
NEW• RatPaak Data Acquisition System ................................see page I101
NEW• Biopac MP Systems for
Data Acquisition & Analysis ...........................see pages I102 – I103
• Biopac Interface Modules................................see pages I104 – I105
NEW
RatPaak Biotelemetry System, see page I101
• Biopac General-Purpose
Transducer Amplifier ........................................see pages I106 – I107
• Biopac Biopotential &
Transducer Amplifiers ......................................see pages I108 – I111
NEW• Biopac Specialty Amplifiers
and Stimulators..................................................see pages I112 – I120
NEW• Biopac Transducers ...........................................see pages I121 – I133
NEW• Biopac Electrodes, Leads & Accessories .....see pages I134 – I143
NEW• Biopac Platform Changes
& Transformers ..................................................see pages I144 – I146
NEW
Biopac MP150 Starter System, see page I102
• Kymographs and
Kymograph Accessories...................................see pages I147 – I154
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I1
Transducers
Research Grade Isometric and Isotonic Transducers
These Research Grade Isometric and Isotonic Transducers supply
excitation voltage to a self-contained transducer and convert the
pico-farad changes of capacitance into high level DC voltages using
a patented electronic circuit (U.S. Patent #4,142,144). This circuit
is extremely sensitive and stable, producing up to 5 VDC for direct
connection to Standard Signal Conditioners, Data Acquisition
Systems, Modular Universal Oscillographs, Student Oscillographs,
Flatbed Strip Chart Servo Recorders, and X-Y Plotters.
All transducers have a small external transducer element
hard-wired to a small amplifier. This amplifier is hard-wired to a
BS4 72-4480 to BS4 72-4485 Research
Grade Isometric Transducer
wall type transformer. The transformer reduces line voltage to 12
VDC and is both UL- and CSA-listed. For 230 VAC, 50 Hz operation
the transformer is VDE-listed. These Transducers are factory-calibrated to deliver 5 VDC for full rated load and are still linear for
100% overload (4 VDC). They have offset (tare) controls.
The Transducer amplifier has a 3-digit backlit LCD display that
shows the output voltage. A standard BNC output connector is located at the rear of the amplifier. These amplifiers can be stacked for
multiple use.
Specifications
Output Impedance
10,000 Ω
Sensitivity
< 1 part in 1,000
Accuracy Output Voltage
±1%
Output Connector
Standard BNC
Linearity
±1%
Drift
Negligible after 5 min. warm-up
Amplifier Adjustments
Range selector and offset
Display
LCD, 7.6 mm (0.3 in) numbers
Weight
908 g (2 lb)
Transducer, H x W x D
32 x 45 x 32 mm (1-1/4 x 1-3/4 x 1-1/4 in)
Amplifier, H x W x D
51 x 95 x 86 mm (2 x 3-3/4 x 3-3/8 in)
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Mounting Handle, OD x L:
Model 1
12.7 x 51 mm (0.5 x 2 in)
Model 2
9.5 x 91.4 mm (0.375 x 3.6 in)
I2
Research Grade Isometric Transducer
•
Self-powered transducer
and amplifier in one
•
Transducers are available
with three different
sensitivities
•
Each Transducer has two
selectable ranges
This Isometric Transducer
approaches the ideal of
measuring isometric contraction
force without motion. It is
available with three different
force ranges. Each Transducer
has an X10 range selector switch
providing two ranges.
This Transducer measures force by measuring the change in
capacitance of a stiff beam between two plates. Beam deflection is
measured in microns.
Two models are now available. The only difference between the
models is the length and diameter of the mounting rod. Model 1 has a
12.7mm OD by 51mm long mounting rod. Model 2 has a 9.5 mm OD
by 91.4mm long mounting rod.
Research Grade Isometric Force Transducer
Power
115 VAC,
60 Hz
230 VAC,
50 Hz
Sensitivity
Deflection Selectable
Per Gram Force
Load
Ranges
Offset
2 VDC
Control Output
Max. Tare Voltage Per
Model 1 with 12.7 x 51mm (0.5 x 2in) Mounting Rod (OD x L)
BS4 72-4490 BS4 72-4493 10.0 µm
$ 1,188.00
1,188.00
0 to 0.5 g
0 to 5.0 g
0.2 g
2.5 g
0.5 g
5.0 g
BS4 72-4491 BS4 72-4494 1.0 µm
$
0 to 5.0 g
0 to 50 g
2.5 g
25 g
5g
50 g
BS4 72-4492 BS4 72-4495 0.1 µm
$ 1,113.00
1,112.00
0 to 50 g
0 to 500 g
25 g
250 g
50 g
500 g
Model 2 with 9.5 x 91.4mm (0.375 x 3.6in) Mounting Rod (OD x L)
BS4 72-4480 BS4 72-4483 10.0 µm
$ 1,188.00
1,188.00
0 to 0.5 g
0 to 5.0 g
0.2 g
2.5 g
0.5 g
5.0 g
BS4 72-4481 BS4 72-4484 1.0 µm
$
0 to 5.0 g
0 to 50 g
2.5 g
25 g
5g
50 g
BS4 72-4482 BS4 72-4485 0.1 µm
$ 1,113.00
1,112.00
0 to 50 g
0 to 500 g
25 g
250 g
50 g
500 g
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Transducers
Research Grade Isometric and Isotonic Transducers
These Research Grade Isometric and Isotonic Transducers
are for direct use with:
— BS4 72-7258 Data Acquisition System for the IBM-PC
with Windows and BS4 72-7259 Data Acquisition
System for the Macintosh, see page I103
— Harvard Apparatus TR2 Chart Recorder, see page I70
— Flatbed Recorder, see page I65
— Modular Universal Oscillographs, see page I66
— Student Oscillographs, see page I68
Specifications
Research Grade Isotonic Transducer
•
•
•
±1% linearity and
accuracy
High level output signal,
no additional amplifier
needed for most strip
chart recorders and
acquisition systems
Remote sensor head can
be mounted close to
experimental setup
This Transducer converts rotary
motion into an electrical signal.
It features precision bearing for
low torque requirements for
recording from delicate smooth
muscle preparations.
The Transducer is supplied with a wooden and aluminum lever for
smooth muscle work, a calibrated lever, after loading screw, scale
pan and weights for skeletal muscle (gastrocnemius) studies and a
storage box with complete instructions for experimental setups.
±15° about center
+5 VDC for +15° rotation, 0 at center, -5 VDC for
-15° rotation, BNC connector
Breakaway Torque
0.05 g/cm
Accuracy
±1%
Linearity
±1%
Dimensions:
Transducer, H x W x D
Handle, OD x L
Amplifier, H x W x D
32 x 45 x 32 mm (1.25 x 1.75 x 1.25 in)
9.7 x 127 mm (3/8 x 5 in)
51 x 95 x 86 mm (2 x 3.75 x 3-3/8 in)
Display
LCD, 7.6 mm (0.3 in) numbers
Weight
908 g (2 lb)
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 72-4486
1,164.00 Research Grade Isotonic Transducer, 115 VAC,
60 Hz
BS4 72-4487
1,156.00 Research Grade Isotonic Transducer, 230 VAC, 50 Hz
BS4 52-0083
32.00 BNC to BNC Cable, pkg. of 1
BS4 60-3822
16.00 BNC to Phone Plug, Cable, pkg. of 1
BS4 60-1156
33.00 BNC to Phone Plug, Cable, pkg. of 2
BS4 52-9974
87.00 4 mm Double Banana-to-Double Banana Cable,
pkg. of 2, for use with other flatbed recorders
BS4 52-9975
44.00 Double Banana to Double Banana, pkg. of 1
BS4 60-4676
17.00 Double Banana to Female BNC Adapter, pkg. of 1
BS4 60-4675
31.00 Double Banana to Female BNC Adapter, pkg. of 2
BS4 52-9983
41.00 Double Banana to BNC Cable, pkg. of 1
BS4 52-9982
75.00 Double Banana to BNC Cable, pkg. of 2
Physiology
This Transducer converts picofarad changes of capacitance
into high level DC voltages using
a patented electronic circuit
(U.S. Patent #4,142,144).
Rotation
Output
Harvard Apparatus manufactures the
Medical Systems picoliter injector,
iontophoretic injectors, and
micro-incubators. See the Cell Biology
Section M in this Bioscience Catalog
for complete details.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I3
Transducers
HSE-HA Isometric Force Transducers F30 and F10
•
Resolution of ±2 mg
•
•
Ultra low vertical
displacement (1 µm/g)
Ultra-high resolution
of ±0.5 mg
•
Low vertical
displacement (6 µm/g)
•
Suitable for small tissue
samples like papillary
muscle, Purkinje fibers
and vessel rings
•
Force range of ±10 grams
(±0.1 N)
•
•
Suitable for small tissue
samples like papillary
muscle, Purkinje fibers
and vessel rings
Force Range of ±30
grams (±0.3 N)
HSE-HA Isometric Force Transducer F30
HSE-HA Isometric Force Transducer F10
The HSE-HA F30 is a sensitive, reliable and rugged isometric force
transducer suitable for use with very small muscle/tissue specimens.
The ultra-low vertical displacement of the transducer means that true
isometric measurements can be made. The low seismic sensitivity of the
HSE F30 minimizes the influence of environmental vibrations on the
force recordings which result in very stable baselines. The design of the
unit (no internal wires suspending the transducer head) means that this
transducer will stand up to years of use. This is a full resistance bridge
transducer which can be connected to the HSE-HA TAM-A and TAM-D
strain gauge amplifiers, see page I33. Connectors are also available for
Harvard Apparatus Ltd., Grass and Gould strain gauge amplifiers.
The HSE-HA F10 isometric force transducer is a lower force range, higher resolution version of the F30 isometric force transducer on the left.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specifications
I4
* Note: This transducer is produced under licence from DLR: Deutsche Forschungsanstalt
für Luft- und Raumfahrt e.V., D-51140 Köln.
Specifications
Force Range
±10 g (±0.1 N)
Linear Range
±20 cN
Maximum Load
±0.5 N
Displacement Range
±60 µm
Sensitivity
3.0 mV/V g
Isometric Quotient IQ
6 µm/g
Excitation AC or DC
5 V (max. 10 V)
Force Range
±30 g (±0.3 N)
Full-Scale Output
±20 mV/V, nominal
Linear Range
±50 cN
Natural Frequency
180 Hz, nominal
Maximum Load
±3 N
Bridge Resistance
1 KΩ, nominal, full ohmic bridge
Displacement Range
±0.03 mm
Hysteresis
< 0.1%
Sensitivity
0.5 mV/V g
Zero Drift
< 10 mg/°C at 20 to 40°C < 0.03 % FS/°C
Isometric Quotient IQ
1 µm/g
Resolution (Noise)
0.5 mg
Excitation AC or DC
5 V (max. 10 V)
Maximum Load
100%
Full-Scale Output
±10 mV/V, nominal
Breaking Load
300%
Natural Frequency
440 Hz, nominal
Connection Cable
1.5 m L with 6-pin Binder Plug (HSE System)
Bridge Resistance
1 KΩ, nominal, full resistance bridge
Peak to Peak
< 0.5 mg
Hysteresis
< 0.1%
Weight
200 g (7 oz)
Zero Drift
< 10 mg/°C at 20 to 40°C < 0.03 % FS/°C
Dimensions
22 x 22 x 70 mm (0.9 x 0.9 x 2.8 in)
Resolution (Noise)
2 mg
Mounting Rod, OD x L
6 x 130 mm (0.25 x 5.1 in)
Maximum Load
300%
Breaking Load
1000%
Sensitivity to Transverse Load
< 0.1%
Maximum Allowed Transverse Load
< 300%
Connection Cable
1.5 m L
Weight
200 g (7 oz)
Dimensions
22 x 22 x 70 mm (0.9 x 0.9 x 2.8 in)
Mounting Rod, OD x L
6 x 130 mm (0.25 x 5.1 in)
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0831
1,487.00 Isometric Transducer F30 for PLUGSYS Amplifier
BS4 73-2657
1,557.00 Isometric Transducer F30 for Harvard Apparatus
Transducer Amplifier
BS4 73-2658
1,626.00 Isometric Transducer F30 for Grass Amplifier
BS4 73-2659
1,601.00 Isometric Transducer F30 for Gould Series 6600
Amplifier
BS4 73-2660
1,690.00 Isometric Transducer F30 for Gould Series 4600
Amplifier
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0841
1,487.00 Isometric Transducer F10 for PLUGSYS Amplifier
BS4 73-2661
1,557.00 Isometric Transducer F10 for Harvard Apparatus
Transducer Amplifier
BS4 73-2662
1,626.00 Isometric Transducer F10 for Grass Amplifier,
6-Pin Cannon Connector
BS4 73-2663
1,601.00 Isometric Transducer F10 for Gould Series 6600
Amplifier
BS4 73-2664
1,690.00 Isometric Transducer F10 for Gould Series 4600
Amplifier
References:
Gollasch, M. et al.: Pinacidil Relaxes Porcine and Human Coronary Arteries by Activating
ATP-Dependent Potassium Channels in Smooth Muscle Cells. J. Pharmacol. Exp.Ther., 275.
681-691 (1995)
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Transducers
Force Displacement and Vernier Control Transducers
BS4 73-0822 Force Displacement
Transducer K30
850 N
HSE-HA Force-Displacement Transducers
•
Four ranges available
•
Oil damping system
•
Robust construction
•
Application in teaching
Series K force transducers are universally applicable for
the measurement of force. There are 4 models, for 4 different force ranges: K30 (±30 g-force), K100 (100 gforce), K300 (300 g-forces), and K1000 (1000 g-force).
The maximum displacement at the tip of the flat spring is
4 mm. The K30 includes a damping system with oil.
Specifications
Transducer
K30
K100
K300
K1000
Force Range
±30 g-force,
±0.3 N
±100 g-force,
±1N
±300 g-force,
±3 N
±1000 g-force,
±10 N
Displacement
±2.5 mm
±2 mm
±3 mm
±1 mm
Sensitivity (Force)
100 µV/g-force/V
30 µV/g-force/V
10 µV/g-force/V
3 µV/g-force/V
Sensitivity (Displacement)
1200 µV/mm/V
0.8 mV/mm/V
1.2 mV/mm/V
170 Hz
200 Hz
400 Hz
Resolution
5 mg
15 mg
50 mg
150 mg
Input Impedance (Pins 1–5)
350 Ohm
Output Impedance (Pins 2–4)
350 Ohm
Supply Voltage
10 V max.
Dimensions Without Pulley
20 x 20 x 84 mm (0.8 x 0.8 x 3.3 in)
Height With Pulley
60 mm (2.4 in)
Mounting Rod
6 x 130 mm (0.25 x 5.1 in), OD x L
Weight
200 g (7 oz)
Vernier Control Transducers
•
3 versions available
•
Robust mechanical construction
with less friction
•
Allows fine adjustment
The vernier control allows an exact pre-stretch
of the tissue preparation in order to ensure
optimum contractile force of the musculature.
The S-Version is specific for the transducer
with 14 mm mounting rod. The E-Version is a
motorized type that is compatible with the
flushing unit and microdrive controller.
Specifications
Weight:
850 N and 850 S
850 E
0.35 kg (0.8 lb)
0.47 kg (1 lb)
Max. Dimensions:
850 N and 850 S
115 x 50 x 20 mm
(4.5 x 2 x 0.8 in)
160 x 55 x 20 mm
(6.3 x 2.2 x 0.8 in)
850 E
HSE-HA Force Transducer
Displacement Per Turn
0.5 mm
For Use
With
Transducer Model
K30
K100
Max. Displacement
22 mm
K300
K1000
HSE
BS4 73-0822
BS4 73-0824
BS4 73-0825
BS4 73-0826
Rod Mounting Hole Ø:
850 N and 850 E
850 S
13 mm (0.5 in)
14 mm (0.55 in)*
1,221.00
1,221.00
1,221.00
BS4 73-2676
BS4 73-2677
BS4 73-2678
BS4 73-2680
BS4 73-2681
1,360.00
1,360.00
BS4 73-2684
BS4 73-2685
$
Harvard Apparatus
1,335.00
BS4 73-2679
Hole for Transducer Holder:
850 N and 850 E
2 x Ø 10.5 mm/90°
850 S
2 x Ø 14.5 mm/90°*
BS4 73-2683
Power Supply 850 E Only 12 V DC for connection to
flushing unit
1,481.00
*Note: Extra large hole for GRASS force-displacement
transducers
$
Grass
$
Gould 6600
–
BS4 73-2686
BS4 73-2687
$
Gould 4600
$
BS4 73-2688
BS4 73-2689
BS4 73-2690
1,424.00
1,424.00
1,425.00
850 E
BS4 73-2691
1,545.00
Catalog No.
$
Physiology
0.7 mV/mm/V
Natural Frequency Without Load 110 Hz
850 S
Product
BS4 73-0786
323.00 Vernier Control,
Standard, Type 850 N
BS4 73-0787
836.00 Vernier Control,
Motorized Version,
Type 850 E
BS4 73-0788
277.00 Vernier Control,
Special, Type 850 S
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I5
Transducers
NEW
The HSE-HA “Diamond-Cell” is a
sensitive, reliable and rugged
isometric force transducer suit• Low vertical
displacement
able for use with very small muscle/tissue specimens. The low
• Suitable for small tissue
samples like papillary
vertical displacement of the
muscle, Purkinje fibers
transducer means that true isoand vessel rings
metric measurements can be
• 3 Force range of 0-50 cN,
made. The low seismic sensitivi0-150 cN, 0-250 cN
ty of the “Diamond-Cell” minimizes the influence of environmental vibrations on the force recordings which result in very stable
baselines. The design of the unit (no internal wires suspending the
transducer head) means that this transducer will stand up to years of
use. This is a full resistance bridge transducer which can be connected to the HSE-HA TAM-A and TAM-D strain gauge amplifiers, see
page I33. Connectors are also available for HA-Ltd, Grass and Gould
strain gauge amplifiers.
•
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
HSE-HA Isometric Force
Force Calibration Weights
Transducers “Diamond-Cell”
High resolution
These NEWTON style calibration
weights are precision weights
use to calibrate force transducers. The weights are made from
polished brass and have an integral hook. They are supplied in a
wooden storage case. They are
calibrated in Newtons at the standard acceleration of gravity gn =
9.80665 m/s2. Nine weights are
supplied. Class of accuracy M1.
Specifications
Newtons
Gram-Force
Newtons
Gram-Force
0.01 N
1
0.2 N
20
0.02 N (2 supplied)
2
0.5 N
50
0.05 N
5
1.0 N
100
0.1 N (2 supplied)
10
Catalog No.
BS4 73-2634
$
Product
412.00 Force Calibration Weights
Gram Calibration Weights
These gram calibration weights
are precision weights use to calibrate preload on force transducers. The weights are made
from polished brass. They are
supplied in a wooden storage
case with a pair of handling forceps and a cleaning brush. Nine
weights are supplied. The 0.1,
0.2 and 0.5 gram size weights
are flat metal pieces. The larger
size weights have an integral
hook. Class of accuracy M1 after
OIML*.
Specifications
Force Range
0-50 cN, 0-150 cN, 0-250 cN
Linearity
<0.2 %FS
Maximum
1000 cN
Displacement Range
60 µm at 10 cN.
Excitation
DC 5 V
Full-Scale Output
10 mV/V, nominal ± 30%
Natural Frequency
300 Hz
Bridge Resistance
> 500 kOhm, full resistance bridge
Zero Drift
< ± 0.04 % FS/K
Weight
200 g (7 oz)
Specifications
Dimensions
20 x 26 x 75 mm (0.8 x 1.0 x 3.0 in)
Weight
Tolerance ± mg
Weight
Tolerance ± mg
Mounting Rod, OD x L
6 x 120 mm (0.25 x 4.7 in)
0.1 g
0.5 mg
2 g (2 supplied)
1.2 mg
0.2 g (2 supplied)
0.6 mg
5g
1.5 mg
0.5 g
0.8 mg
10 g
2.0 mg
1g
1.0 mg
HSE-HA Isometric Force Transducers “Diamond-Cell”
For use
Transducer Range
with
0-50 cN
0-150 cN
0-250 cN
HSE
BS4 73-3538
BS4 73-3539
BS4 73-3540
Harvard Apparat.
BS4 73-3541
BS4 73-3542
BS4 73-3543
Grass
BS4 73-3544
BS4 73-3545
BS4 73-3546
Gould 6600
BS4 73-3547
BS4 73-3548
BS4 73-3549
Gould 4400
BS4 73-3550
BS4 73-3551
BS4 73-3552
Catalog No.
BS4 73-2635
$
Product
231.00 Gram Calibration Weights
*Note: Organisation Internationale Metrologie Légale
Please call for pricing
I6
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Transducers
UF1 Series Isometric
Transducer
HSE-HA Isotonic Lever Transducer
•
Very low friction, ideal
isotonic measurement
conditions
•
Easy calibrating
conditions
•
Large linear measuring
range 40 mm
•
Ideal for smooth
muscle preparations
BS4 73-0857, 73-2692 to
2695 HSE Isotonic Lever
Transducer Model B40
•
±1% accuracy
•
Temperature range from -40° to
+80°C (-104° to +176°F)
•
Available in six force ranges
The instrument is calibrated by locking the end of the lever into the calibration stops on the
frame. These stops represent full deflections of ±10 and ±20 mm. If the organ preparation is
attached to hole no. 10, this is equivalent to a movement of ±20 mm (= 40 mm total), reducing
for each lower hole used. The unit can be interfaced with almost any type of AC or DC bridge.
There are 3 calibration steps on the frame: ±22 mm, 0 and –22 mm at a distance of 100 mm from the
pivot measured at the arch. The calibration amplitude is reduced at the various holes as shown below.
Hole No.
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
cm from Pivot
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Displacement (mm)
±20
±18
±16
±14
±12
±10
±8
±6
±4
Specifications
Dimensions:
Transducer, H x W x D
Mounting Rod, OD x L
70 x 35 x 25 mm
(2.75 x 1-3/8 x 1 in)
6.5 x 40 mm
(0.25 x 1.5 in)
UF1 Series Isometric Transducers
Catalog No.
BS4 50-7293
BS4 50-8036
BS4 50-8044
$
Force Range
0 to 55 g
BS4 50-8051
0 to 220 g
BS4 50-8069
939.00 0 to 450 g
BS4 50-8077
Specifications
Range/Linearity
±20 mm (0 to 40 mm) / ±2% full scale
Zero Drift
< 0.03% / oC FS
Frequency Range
0 to 10 Hz
Full Bridge
4 x 300Ω
Frictional Torque of Lever
0.1 mN cm
Output Voltage
±10 mV, adjustable up to max. ±40 mV, internal resistance of 300 Ω, max.
output voltage represents full lever deflection and full measuring range
Power Supply
5 V DC or AC (max. 8 V)
Lever
180 x 85 x 40 mm, 3 positions to screw in support rod
Support Rod
6 mm OD x 130 mm L
1,016.00 0 to 25 g
939.00 0 to 110 g
0 to 1000 g
Physiology
The popular UF1 Series of load cells has
been adapted to be used with the above listed amplifiers and interfaces. These
Transducers have an integral cable that is
compatible with the following amplifiers:
BS4 53-6132, BS4 50-7970, BS4 50-7996
and BS4 50-8861. They are available in six
force ranges.
This system is designed to transduce displacements during contractions and movements into
proportional electric currents. The amount of force required to operate the system is exceedingly small, providing ideal isotonic measurement conditions for physiological and pharmacological research. This arrangement of a lever transducer with any bridge system (DC measuring bridge or TAM plug-in module of our PLUGSYS, see page I33) is particularly well suited to
isotonic measurements in smooth muscle preparations in isolated organ and tissue baths.
Values are transmitted as a result of movements of a permanent magnet within field plates.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0857
1,227.00 HSE-HA Isotonic Lever Transducer Model B40 for PLUGSYS System
BS4 73-2692
1,297.00 HSE-HA Isotonic Lever Transducer Model B40 for Harvard Apparatus Amplifier
BS4 73-2693
1,368.00 HSE-HA Isotonic Lever Transducer Model B40 for Grass Amplifier
BS4 73-2694
1,349.00 HSE-HA Isotonic Lever Transducer Model B40 for Gould 6600 Series
BS4 73-2695
1,429.00 HSE-HA Isotonic Lever Transducer Model B40 for Gould 4600 Series
BS4 73-0572
22.00 Thread Clip, Clamp for Fixing Thread
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I7
Transducers
Harvard Apparatus Isometric and Isotonic Transducers
Harvard Apparatus Isometric
Transducers
•
Strain gauge type
•
Available in five force ranges
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Isometric muscle contraction is defined as force with
zero motion. Harvard Apparatus Isometric Transducers
achieve this condition by means of thinfilmed, bonded
strain gauges and substantial beams. The strain gauge
has four-wire closed Wheatstone bridges for long term
stability and sensitivity. The stiffness of the transducer
and stem prevents unwanted displacement.
To operate, these Isometric Transducers require
power from the amplifier/signal conditioner to which
they are connected. They are available in five force
ranges and are supplied with an amplifier/signal conditioner specific, 1.8 m (6 ft) Cable. These Cables are
also available separately allowing the Transducer to
connected to a different amplifier/signal conditioner
simply by switching the Cable.
Transducer, H x W x D
Mounting Rod, OD x L
19 x 150 x 19 mm
(3/4 x 6 x 3/4 in)
12.5 x 75 mm
(1/2 x 3 in)
Harvard Isometric Transducer for Use With
Force
Range
Harvard
Apparatus
Amplifiers
Gould
Signal
Conditioners
0 to 50 g
BS4 50-7905
BS4 50-7911
690.00
This Harvard Apparatus Isotonic Transducer is exceptionally sensitive and stable, requiring a minimum of
force to produce a substantial electrical signal. It uses
precision ball bearings and a graduated optical density vane that moves between an infrared source and a
sensor.
A graduated optical density vane (a light wedge), is
also mounted on this shaft and moves between a
miniature lamp and a silicon phototransistor which
are housed in the light-proof casing.
The output of the photo transistor is linear over
approximately 50° of movement of the lever. A balance control is provided on the front of the instrument
to zero the output at a convenient level. A long lasting
mercury battery is supplied. Output is from a pair of 4
mm sockets on the front panel.
Specifications
BS4 50-7913
BS4 50-7912
0 to 200 g
$
BS4 50-7921
690.00
BS4 50-7914
690.00
0 to 500 g
$
BS4 50-7939
BS4 50-7915
0 to 1000 g
$
BS4 50-7947
690.00
BS4 50-7916
690.00
BS4 50-7988
55.00
BS4 50-7990
136.00
The notched, pierced input lever is 90 mm (3-1/2 in)
long for easy connection to muscle tissue. A spring
and anchor post are supplied for converting the unit
into a Transducer capable of recording frog/heart
muscle tension for auxotonic applications.
This Transducer has a 2 m (6.6 ft) shielded integral
cable which terminates in a specific connector for use
with one of the amplifiers/signal conditioners below.
Specifications
Output
50 mV/angular degree
rotation
Angle of Rotation
±25° above and below
horizontal axis
Excitation Voltage
-12, 0, +12 VDC
Breakaway Torque
Dimensions:
Housing, H x W x D
0.05 g/cm
Dimensions:
Catalog No.
BS4 50-6378
BS4 50-9257
690.00
0 to 100 g
$
Replacement Cable
I8
This Battery-Powered Isotonic Transducer has an
output shaft located in precision bearings, which carries a lever 90 mm (3.5 in) long. This lever is
notched on its top surface and pierced with eight
holes on either side of the lever point on a 5 mm
pitch from the fulcrum. These piercings are for
attachment of the preparation.
Mounting Rod, OD x L
Dimensions:
$
Harvard Apparatus Isotonic
Transducers
Case, H x W x D
Specifications
$
Harvard Apparatus BatteryPowered Isotonic Transducer
BS4 50-6364
$
50 x 100 x 25 mm
(2 x 4 x 1 in)
6.5 x 60 mm
(1/4 x 2-1/4 in)
Product
723.00 Battery-Powered
IsotonicTransducer
71.00 4 mm plugs to BNC
Cable; for use with
Modular Universal
Oscillograph, see page
I66, and Student
Oscillograph, see page
I68
Mounting Rod, OD x L
Catalog No.
BS4 50-6360
153.00 Adapter Cable, 4 mm
plugs to 14-Pin DIN
connector; for use with
Gould 6600 Series
Amplifiers
$
45 x 35 x 45 mm
(1.75 x 1.5 x 1.75 in)
6.5 x 60 mm
(0.25 x 2.5 in)
Product
473.00 Harvard Apparatus
Isotonic Transducer for
use with BS4 53-6132
Harvard Apparatus
Amplifier, BS4 50-7970
and BS4 50-7996
Freestanding
Transducer Interfaces,
and BS4 50-8861
Modular Transducer
Interface
Harvard Apparatus now owns Hugo Sachs Elektronik.
The HSE isolated organ baths set the industry
standard. They can be found in the Isolated Organ and
Tissue Section K in this Bioscience Catalog.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
Introduction to Stimulators
HSE-HA Stimulator I Series, see page I12
MP150 & Biopac Data Acquisition System, see page II02
Digitimer D330 MultiStim System, see page I22
Harvard Apparatus Dual Impedance Research Stimulator, see page I27
ety would adjust the amount of current measured in units typically from mA to Amps. In constant voltage systems this intensity would
be measured in units from mV to hundreds of Volts. Normally the
stimulation pulses are mono-polar going from 0 to either a positive
or negative potential.
When minimal electrophoretic ion transfer is required to reduce the
double layer of gas bubbles that form on polarized electrode, a system that generates bipolar/bi-phasic pulses is needed.
Delivery is any of the various methods used to electrically connect
the stimuli to the tissue. Simplistically, the electric current travels along
the cable from the stimulator into the muscle or nerve through some
form of electrodes. These electrodes are made from various materials
that are both conducting and tissue-compatible. Some of the preferred
electrode materials are platinum, platinum/iridium, silver and
stainless steel although other material such as carbon fiber are sometimes used.
Harvard Apparatus, Inc. offers a wide variety of stimulator systems
including modular systems for research use, such as the Stimulator
I Series and the Neurolog systems that can be configured from variety of plug in function modules or stand-alone stimulators and
stimulus isolations units for dedicated benchtop use. Several models of stimulator teaching systems are also available. Stimulator
functions are also available in computer controlled multipurpose
physiological measurement systems such as the PLUGSYS or BIOPAC
systems. There are also a range of stimulation electrodes for a wide
range of applications.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
Physiology
Biological experiments that involve the functional study of isolated or
in-situ organs or tissues such as nerves and muscles can only be
examined if they are artificial induced to perform some reproducible
activity. Apart from chemical stimuli, this artificial stimulation used
in these experiments is mainly achieved through the use of electrical
stimuli. All types of instrumentation that are used to accurately generate these electric stimuli with precise timing and repeatability can
be classified as stimulators.
There are 3 basic components (functions) that are common to all
stimulator systems, Timing, Signal Amplitude/Quality, and Delivery.
Timing is the basic spacing between each stimulation event
(Frequency/ Rhythm) and the duration of the stimulation pulses themselves (pulse Width). Stimulation timing can be as simple as the generation of a single stimulation pulse or complex, consisting of repetitive pulses or pulse trains of varying frequency and pulse widths. Timing functions are either built into a stimulator system or are supplied from
another type of instrument such as a timing generator or computer. The
pulses produced by the stimulator’s timing generators are usually made
up of mono-polar or bipolar/bi-phasic square waves, although in some
applications such as shock applications where a sinusoidal waveform is
used. Other types of waveforms such as triangular and trapezoidal pulses are also employed for other specialized physiological investigations.
Amplitude of the output stimulation is the measure of stimulation
energy intensity that can be provided by the Quality of the stimulus output. This is usually in the form of either a constant current or
constant voltage but can be other type of stimuli such as magnetic
stimulation. The intensity of stimulators of the constant current vari-
I9
Stimulators
Heart Stimulating Electrodes
BS4 73-0160
Small Stimulation
Electrode Set
BS4 73-0181
Mini Coaxial
Stimulation Electrode
BS4 73-0220
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 73-0219
I10
•
For electrical
stimulation of
the isolated
perfused heart
•
Reduced stray
fields for more
accurate
recordings
Small Stimulation
Electrode Set (Mice)
This stimulation electrode set is
used for electrical stimulation of
small heart or tissues. Through
the coaxial construction the
other electrode at zero potential
acts as a screen so that stray
fields are reduced and interference to recordings is limited
(ECG, MAP). In combination
with the mini ball joint holders a
precise fixation on the myocard
is possible.
Specifications
Coaxial Stimulation Electrode for the
Isolated Heart (Rat, Guinea-pig, Rabbit...)
OD
1.3 mm
Tip Length
20 mm
Electrical stimulation of the isolated heart ensures constant heart rate.
The tissue is being stimulated between the inner wire and the outer cylinder. Through the coaxial construction, the outer electrode at zero potential acts as a screen so that stray fields are reduced and interference to
ECG (EG) recordings is limited. A special holder for easy positioning of
the electrode on the heart surface is available as an accessory.
Cable Length
35 cm
Connector
Modified Lemo
Catalog No.
584.00 Small Stimulation Electrode Set, Includes
BS4 73-0181 & BS4 73-0182
BS4 73-0181
416.00 Mini Coaxial Stimulation Electrode with
modified Lemosa connector
BS4 73-0182
4.3 mm
Length of Cylinder
75 mm
Cable Length
120 mm (4.7 in) ending on 4 mm MC Banana Plugs,
2-core screened cable
Weight
40 g, without holder
Catalog No.
$
Model
BS4 73-0160
Specifications
Outside Diameter
$
71.00 Adapter Cable - modified Lemosa connector to
4 mm Banana Plugs, 2 mm Cable Length
Product
BS4 73-0219
294.00 Coaxial Stimulation Electrode
BS4 73-0220
175.00 Holder with Maxi-Ball Joints for Large Stimulation
Electrode. Includes 9 mm Ball with 130 mm length
and 8 mm diameter Rod (BS4 73-3323), Maxi-Ball
High Load Link (BS4 73-3322), and special bar with
ball and thumbscrew
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
Stimulating Electrodes
BS4 73-0337 1.0 mm
Plexiglas Platinum
Electrode
5m
m
BS4 73-0337 1.0 mm
Plexiglas Platinum
Electrode – closeup
Sliding Jaw
4m
m
3m
m
15 mm
Bipolar Stimulating Electrodes for Nerves
Catalog No.
$
Product
The Plexiglas-platinum electrodes are used for direct stimu• For in situ applications
lation of the exposed nerve in
• For stimulating or
situ. The sliding jaw is opened
recording
for inserting the nerve. The diameter should fit smoothly without clamping the nerve. The surgery
recess is filled with warmed liquid paraffin to prevent the nerve drying
out. This offers the additional advantage of keeping blood and saline
solution away from the nerve and preventing damage to it. It also prevents the bipolar electrode from short-circuiting. The electrode weighs
15 grams (0.5 oz). Those electrodes can also be used for recording
(e.g., Vagus Nerve).
BS4 73-0336
call
Plexiglas Platinum Electrode, ID of closed jaw
0.5 mm
BS4 73-0337
call
Plexiglas Platinum Electrode, ID of closed jaw
1.0 mm
BS4 73-0338
call
Plexiglas Platinum Electrode, ID of closed jaw
1.5 mm
BS4 73-0339
call
Plexiglas Platinum Electrode, ID of closed jaw
2.0 mm
BS4 73-0340
call
Plexiglas Platinum Electrode, ID of closed jaw
3.0 mm
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
Physiology
Sliding Jaw
I11
Stimulators
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
HSE-HA Stimulator I
I12
•
Modular rack-mountable
construction
•
Plug in modules for timing
and control, stimulation
output and specialty
functions
•
Configurations for up to 8
output (stimulation) channels
•
Select from either constant
current/constant voltage,
constant voltage only and
constant current only
output modules
HSE-HA modular, rack mountable
stimulator is designed to meet the
needs of almost every application
that requires a controlled electrical voltage/current stimulus. This
system provides a flexible platform
that can be easily configured from
a number of basic and specialized
plug-in modules or selected from
several pre-configured systems.
The Stimulator I system has a
single row of modules consisting
of 8 module slots. The first 4 of
these slots are used for the basic
timing/control modules and the other 4 positions are used for output,
additional timing/control and/or other types of specialty function
modules. The single rack configuration of the STIMULATOR I will
provide one channel of basic timing controls (4 module slots) and up
to 2 stimulus output modules.
There are a number of plug-in modules that will fit into the slots of
the Stimulator I chassis. The two basic types of stimulator modules,
one for controlling the timing (Timing and control modules) of the
stimulus and the other to produce the stimulation energy as either
constant current or constant voltage (output modules). Some of these
modules such as the Multiple Current Output Modules and High
Current Monitor require the use of 2 slots per module.
In addition to the basic timing and output modules (base Rhythm, Delay,
Width and Timer) there are a number of modules for special applications:
• High Current Output Module BS4 73-0086 with alternating polarity (Bi-Phasic) prevents the formation of gas bubbles
and polarization of the stimulation electrodes, see page I15.
• R-Wave Trigger Module BS4 73-0079 provides electrical
stimuli that can be generated in synchronism with the cardiac
rhythm, see page I18.
• Double Stimulus Preset DP Module BS4 73-0080 permits
the production of double stimuli after a pre-selected number
(0 to 99) of single stimuli, see page I18.
• Stimulus Preset SP Module BS4 73-0081 controls the
number of stimulus pulses produced by an adjustable number
(1 to 9999 pulses) rather then by time, see page I18.
For applications that require an isolated (ungrounded) stimulus
(e.g. when applying a stimulation while simultaneously recording
biological potentials), a Universal Isolated Stimulation benchtop unit
(BS4 73-0082) can be used to convert the ungrounded stimuli into
low-capacity isolated stimuli. Although stimulators are mains (AC)
operated, use of the isolation unit produces the same conditions as a
battery-operated instrument providing the stimuli. If you have any
questions on how to configure a system for your specific applications,
call our Technical Sales department for assistance.
The STIMULATOR I model can be equipped with up to 2 single slot output modules or 2 dual-slot current output modules per channel.
Output modules are available in one and four stimulation outputs so
that up to eight (8) individual outputs of stimulus can be achieved for
applications such the simultaneous stimulation of isolated tissues.
With the available output modules, systems with 1,2,3,4, or 8 outputs
can be configured.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
HSE-HA Stimulator I Series
To the left is an illustration of the
BS4 73-0050 Stimulator I Single
Channel Chassis. It includes the
following timing modules:
•
•
•
•
BS4 73-0066
Module
BS4 73-0068
Module
BS4 73-0070
BS4 73-0069
Start Mode
Basic Rhythm R
Delay D Module
Width W Module
Harvard Apparatus offers five preconfigured Stimulator I systems.
Each offers a selection of different
modules for different stimulation
applications. By combining the
Stimulator I basic timing system
with the various stimulator output
and pulse train timing modules, multiple types of stimulator systems
can be configured for a variety of
applications. Additional modules are
also available on pages I14 to I18.
Physiology
BS4 73-0084
BS4 73-0075
BS4 73-0073
BS4 73-0072
Specifications: Stimulator I Rack
Supply
220 V (15%), 50 Hz; 90 VA; can be switched to 110 V
Dimensions, H x W x D
150 x 440 x 355 mm (5.9 x 17.3 x 14 in)
Weight
9 kg (19.8 lb)
Stimulator I Preconfigured Systems
System Catalog No.
System Components
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0051 BS4 73-0052 BS4 73-0053 BS4 73-0054 BS4 73-0055
Basic Stimulator I Chassis
BS4 73-0050
1
1
1
1
Single Channel Output OVA
BS4 73-0084
1
1
–
–
1
–
Train Rhythm TR
BS4 73-0072
–
1
–
–
1
Train Width TW
BS4 73-0073
–
1
–
–
1
4-Channel Voltage Output O4V
BS4 73-0075
–
–
1
2
1
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I13
Stimulators
HSE-HA Modules for Stimulator I
Start Mode S1 Module
For single-channel stimulators. This module is used in Stimulator I to start the
stimulation in one of the following modes:
Start Mode S1
• With local switch or remote contact:
— Single stimulus immediate
— Single stimulus delayed
— Twin stimulus immediate
— Repeated stimulus while switch is pushed repeated
stimulus as train
• With trigger pulse
• Free-running
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0066
$
Product
356.00 Start Mode S1 Module
Basic Rhythm R Module
This module controls the time spacing of the repeated square-wave pulses.
Specifications
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
0.5 msec to 1000 sec, this corresponds to frequency range of 2000 Hz to
0.001 Hz
Trigger Output
Positive pulse of 10 V on Ri = 1 kΩ
Gate Input
Inactive +10 V, active 0 V at 10 kΩ input impedance
Catalog No.
R
I14
Adjustment Range
BS4 73-0068
$
Product
626.00 Basic Rhythm R Module
Basic Rhythm R
HSE-HA Timing Modules for Stimulator I
Stimulus Width W Module
Controls the duration during which the stimulus is present.
Specifications
5 µsec to 100 sec and ∞ = d.c. stimulus; if stimulator is fitted with
delay module, it is possible to select twin stimuli; stimulus duration indicated by red signal lamp
Adjustment Range
W
Width W
Trigger Output
Inactive +12 V, active 0 V on 1 kΩ
Trigger Input
Positive rise to +2V on 10 kΩ input impedance
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0069
$
Product
568.00 Stimulus Width W Module
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
HSE-HA Timing Modules for Stimulator I
Delay D Module
Controls the time spacing from a repeating (first) square-wave pulse
to a subsequent (second) pulse.
Specifications
D
Delay D
Adjustment Range
5 µsec to 100 sec or 0 = no delay, delay time is indicated by red
signal lamp
Trigger Output
Inactive +12 V, active 0 V, Ri = 1 kΩ
Trigger Input
Positive rise +2 V on 10 kΩ internal impedance
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0070
$
Product
537.00 Delay D Module
HSE-HA Output Modules for Stimulator I
High-Current Output OLV Module
This module is used in stimulator I for field stimulation of a single isolated tissue, either at constant voltage or at constant current.
Specifications
Module OLV
Output Range:
Constant Voltage
Constant Current
0 to 30 V in 2 ranges, 0.9 A (DC) or 5 A (pulse width 1 msec max.)
0 to 3 A in 2 ranges at max. voltage of 30 V
Monophasic or alternating to avoid polarization of stimulation
electrodes
Output Connector
Safety female banana jacks
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0086
$
Product
2,220.00 High-Current Output OLV Module
Physiology
Output Characteristic
Output OV Module
constant voltage
10 Ω
0 - 200 V
Output OV
This module is a simpler version of the OVA module, which provides
only a constant voltage stimulus
Specifications
Output Range
Constant voltage 0 to 200 V in 3 ranges at source resistance of
less than 10 Ω, current output can be up to 100 mA (DC operation) or up to 200 mA (pulse width 1 msec max.)
Output Characteristic
Monophasic, polarity can be reversed
Output Connector
Safety female banana jacks
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0085
$
Product
1,121.00 Output OV Module
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I15
Stimulators
HSE-HA Output Modules for Stimulator I
Output OVA Module
constant voltage
constant cureent
10 Ω
2 kΩ
This module is used in Stimulator I and controls the amplitude of the
stimulus as constant voltage or constant current.
Specifications
Output Range:
Constant Voltage
0 - 200 V
0 to 200 V in 3 ranges at internal resistance of 10 Ω currents up to
100 mA (DC) or 200 mA (pulse width 1 msec max.) are produced
0 to 100 mA in 3 ranges at source resistance of 100, 1000 or
10,000 kΩ depending on range, max. voltage produced is 200 V
0 - 100 mA
Constant Current
Output OVA
Rise Time
Rise speed of stimulus is 10 V per µsec
Output Characteristic
Floating, capacity of 1 nF, monophasic, polarity can be reversed
Noise
50/60 Hz less than 1 µA
Current Monitor Output U = Io x 50 Ω
Voltage Monitor Output U = Uo/20
Output Connector
Safety female banana jacks
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0084
$
Product
1,309.00 Output OVA Module
4-Channel Voltage Output O4V Module
This module is used for simultaneous stimulation of 4 isolated tissues,
e.g. in the Schuler or Graz organ baths. Each of the channels provides
constant-voltage stimuli (0 to 100 Volt) adjustable on a 10-turn potentiometer for each channel. The channels are not isolated from each
other. The large output current permits field stimulation.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specifications
I16
No. of Outputs
4
Output Range
Constant Voltage 0 to 100 V, max. output current is 40 mA (DC
stimulation) or 200 mA (pulses 1 msec max.)
Output Characteristic
Monophasic, polarity can be reversed separately on each channel
Output Connector
Safety female banana jacks
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0075
$
Product
2,417.00 4-Channel Voltage Output O4V Module
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
HSE-HA Train Modules for Stimulator I
Automatic Timer Z
Consists of:
TR
A.
Train Rhythm TR
Train Rhythm TR Module
This module controls the time spacing of the stimulus groups. This
module is used in Stimulator I.
Specifications
Adjustment Range
5 msec to 1000 sec in 5 switched ranges; single-digit display
indicates time countdown; ON-OFF switch is fitted
Trigger Output
Positive pulse +10 V on Ri = 1 kΩ
Gate Input
Inactive +10 V, active 0 V, Ri = 10 kΩ
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0072
B.
TW
$
Product
855.00 Train Rhythm TR Module
Train Width TW Module
This module controls the time during which the stimuli are switched
on. This module is used in stimulator I.
Specifications
Adjustment Range
0.5 msec to 100 sec; single-digit display indicates time countdown; single train can be triggered by pressing key
Trigger Output
Inactive +12 V, active 0 V, Ri = 1 kΩ
Trigger Input
Positive rise to +2 V at Ri = 10 kΩ
Train Width TW
Catalog No.
C.
TR
TW
$
Product
760.00 Train Width (TW) Module
Automatic Timer AT1 Module
This module permits the production of stimulus groups (trains), with
the times selected not continuously but in discrete steps. This module
is used in Stimulator I.
Physiology
BS4 73-0073
Specifications
Auto Time AT1
Train Rhythm (TR)
0.5/1/2/5/10/15/30 sec and 1/2/5/10/20 min
Train Width (TW)
0.1/0.2/0.5/1/2/5/10/30 sec and 1/2/5/10 min
Trigger Output
Inactive +12 V, active 0 V, Ri = 1 kΩ
Trigger Input
Positive rise to +2 V at Ri = 10 kΩ
Stimulus Trains
Single or repeated stimulus trains can be produced by
operating start key
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0074
$
Product
868.00 Automatic Time AT1 Module
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I17
Stimulators
HSE-HA Special Modules for Stimulator I
HSE
R-Wave Trigger RT Module
Stimulator
R-Wave Trigger RT
This module can be triggered directly from the 1 mV ECG
signal. Linking the trigger output of the RT module to the
trigger input of a delay module D permits e.g. synchronized stimulation of the heart; the stimulation pulses can
be set at any spacing from the R-wave of the ECG, and can
be placed e.g. into the vulnerable phase to produce ventricular fibrillation. This module has to be inserted in the
normal place of TR or TW. Requires adjustments in wiring
of the housing.
10V
1V
Trigger
Output
Blocking
time
TB (x 10ms)
∑D+W+TB
10
15
Off
5
20
2
TB only
4
Gain
6
2
8
0
Control Outp.
R-Wave
1 Volt
10
Polarity
Off
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0079
ECG–
Input
$
Product
1,481.00 R-Wave Trigger RT Module
1mV
(floating)
Type 215/22
R-Wave Trigger RT
Module
HSE
Double Stimulus Preset DP Module
Stimulator
C
This module permits the triggering a second pulse (twin
stimulus) after a certain number of normal single stimuli.
If the counter is set to 5, for example, then an additional
second and equal stimulus is produced after every fifth
stimulus. The preset number can be selected between 1
and 99. Use of this module in Stimulator I requires modification of the basic stimulator. This module has to be
inserted in the normal place of TR or TW. Requires
adjustments in wiring of the housing.
Double Stimulus Preset DP
Aus
Ein
jeder n-te Reiz wird als
Doppelreiz ausgelost
1 4
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
n=
einzeine Doppelreiz–Auslosung
gesteurt von G1 bzw. G2
BS4 73-0080
Vorbereitung
No
1
2
3
13
14
1
$
Product
1,014.00 Double Stimulus Present DP Module
2
3
Type 215/8
Double Stimulus
Present DP Module
HSE
double stimulus
Stimulus Preset SP Module
Stimulator
Stimulus Preset
Trigger
Output
This module can be used instead of the train width module
TW 215/16 and controls the train by the number of pulses
instead of by time (width). Pulse trains with pulse counts
between 1 and 9999 can be produced. This module can be
used in Stimulator I at the place of TW. It ensures that no
pulse is ‘cut’ at the end of the timed period.
10V
10V
SP
Preset = n+1
n=
0 0 3 2
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0081
$
Product
1,158.00 Stimulus Preset SP Module
Single Start
Trigger Input
10V
Pulse No
TW
TR
1
2
3
32
Type 215/24
Stimulus Preset
SP Module
I18
Catalog No.
10V
SP = TW
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
HSE-HA Programmable Stimulator
Module PSM for PLUGSYS System
HSE-HA Universal Isolated
Stimulator Output UISO
This programmable stimulator
module is intended for the stimulation of isolated tissue, with operation from PC computer. An
appropriate stimulation program
• Up to 8 channels in
is available. The adjustments are
one main frame
made from the PC and transferred
• For tissue baths
to the PSM. The PSM is ideally suitapplications
able for computer-controlled tissue bath setups, e.g. for automatic
refractory period determination. Up to 8 PSM modules can be
mounted inside a PLUGSYS housing see page I29. For more than 4
modules an extra-large power supply is required: Option 5.
•
Combination of stimulator and measurement system in one
main frame
•
Generates isolated stimuli
in the range of 0 to 100
Volt
•
Can be connected to any
stimulator delivering a
trigger signal
•
Can be used in combination with a trigger output
generated by a computer
software as a power
amplifier
•
Hardware Required:
PC, PLUGSYS housing with HSE-data acquisition hardware, PLUGSYS
version and DIM-D digital link.
Software Required:
AH 73-1575
B1 Bus
Interface
AH 73-1683
ROM-C
AH 73-1684
AH 73-0065
TAM-A
ROM-A
AH 73-0065
TAM-A
AH 73-0065
AH 73-0065
TAM-A
TAM-A
AH 73-0088
AH 73-0088
PSM
PSM
AH 73-0088
AH 73-0088
PSM
Force Transducer K30
Force Transducer K30
Force Transducer K30
4 PSM Modules
for the
Stimulation of
4 Isolated Tissues
4 TAM-A
Amplifiers
to Operate
4 Transducers
This unit is required to produce ungrounded (isolated
or floating) stimuli and prevent interference in any
biopotentials (ECG, EMG, EEG etc.) which are recorded
simultaneously. It can be connected to virtually any type
of stimulator delivering a trigger pulse with the same
width as the stimulus duration. The input for the trigger
impulse is a BNC socket on the back plane. It can also
be connected to a TTL trigger output generated by a software on a computer as a power amplifier. A switch
selects the output amplitude range (0 to 50, 0 to 100
Volt). Fine adjustment is provided by the fine control on
a 10-turn Potentiometer. Stimuli produced can be either
monopolar (positive or negative), or alternated.
Alternated stimulation avoids electrode polarization.
Specifications
Trigger Signal
3 to 15 V, Trigger level 1.5 V, active low or active
high (can be switched internally using jumper)
Force Transducer K30
Trigger Input Impedance 10 kΩ
Sample PLUGSYS Setup: PLUGSYS Equipment for Stimulated Isolated Tissues Module
Trigger Input Width
10µs to 10 msec defines Stimulus duration; if
Trigger Signal Width exceeds 10 msec, stimuli
duration is limited on 10 msec
Stimuli Output
Constant voltage, floating, isolated
Specifications
Trigger Modes
Continuous stimulus, trains, triggered from hardware or software; single or twin
stimuli; polarity at output can be set constant or alternating
Basic Rhythm
100 msec to 10 sec
Delay
1 msec to 1 sec or 0
Width
0.5 msec to 200 msec
Output
1 mA to 25 mA or
10 mA to 250 mA, max. 40 V
Dimensions, H x W x D
27.5 x 20.2 x 220 mm (101 x 0.8 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
1 slot unit
Operation:
+5 V, 700 mA and
+24 V, 500 mA
Weight
0.35 kg (0.8 lb)
*Note: For description of slot unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0221
BS4 73-3497
BS4 73-0224
$
Stimuli Output Voltage
Two ranges 0 to 50 V, 0 to 100 V
Stimuli Output Current
1.8 to 2 A for stimuli duration < 100 µsec, 0.5 A
at 10 msec stimuli duration
Stimuli Polarity
Positive, Negative, Alternating
Dimensions, H x W x D
160 x 55 x 250 mm (6.3 x 2.2 x 8.7 in)
Weight
1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)
Catalog No.
$
Physiology
PSM
HSE-HA Stimulator Control Program ‘Stimulus’ or
HSE-HA ACAD, ISOHEART, NEURODYN, EPES with the Software
module to control the PSM
Applications:
— Electrophysiology
— In case of simultaneous
biopotential recording
Product
BS4 73-2696
1,904.00 Universal Isolated Stimulation Unit,
110 VAC, 60 Hz
BS4 73-0504
1,904.00 Universal Isolated Stimulation Unit,
230 VAC, 50 Hz
Product
2,019.00 Programmable Stimulator Module PSM for PLUGSYS System
Call
Software “Stimulus” for PSM and PPG Control
1,102.00 Software Module to HSE-HA Software for PSM and PPG Control
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I19
Stimulators
HSE-HA Stimulator P
HSE-HA Rodent Shocker SineWave Shock Generator
BS4 73-0105 Rodent
Shocker Sine-Wave Shock
Generator with 73-0108
Eye Shock Electrode
for Mice and Rats
The Stimulator P is a simple single channel square-wave stimulator. Suitable for pacing via direct
contact (i.e. nerve or heart).
•
Trigger facilities
•
Single or repeated
stimuli
•
Mono-phasic and biphasic pulses available
•
For testing anticonvulsant drugs
•
For mice and rats
•
Two types of electrodes
are available: for eyes or
ears
•
Foot Switch operation
Cerebral seizures, preferably in
mice, are produced using constant sinusoidal alternating current to determine the effect of
anticonvulsant drugs. For the
reliable induction of seizures it is
necessary to achieve satisfactory
current flow. Eye electrodes and
(especially in mice) ear electrodes are used for this purpose.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
• Polarity can be reversed
I20
For complete details on the HSE-HA Rodent Shocker see page G9.
• Output is floating and
can be combined with
other stimulator outputs
Specifications
• DC stimulation is
available
Specifications
Stimulation Frequency
50 Hz or 60 Hz according to supply frequency
Stimulus Duration
0.1 sec to 9.9 sec in steps of 0.1 sec, selected after pressing a
button, the selected time is indicated
Stimulus Energy
Up to 75 W
Output
Constant current, fully floating
Output Current
0 to 300 mA, 0 to 150 mA, 0 to 100 mA depending on
maximum stimulation voltage selected, the setting is made on
a 10-turn potentiometer and the selected value is shown on
the digital display
Basic Rhythm R
Adjustable 5 msec to 10 sec, corresponding to 200 – 0.1 Hz
Width W
Adjustable 0.005 to 100 msec and infinity (=DC)
Output O
Adjustable 0.03 to 50 V in 3 coarse ranges with fine scale; output
is isolated and has 500 pF capacity to ground; 50 Hz interference is of order of 0.5 µA
Limitation of Maximum 250 V, 500 V, 750 V in 3 steps, selected by button
Stimulation Voltage
Digital Display
The selected stimulation current is indicated continuously in mA,
the actual current applied is shown during application and can
be called up later by pushing a button, the selected stimulation
time is shown on pressing the TIME button, bargraph indicates
the course of the stimulation time.
Internal Resistance
1 kΩ, short-circuit current 70 mA max.
Trigger Inputs
10 V on 10 kΩ
Trigger Output
10 V on 1 kΩ
Supply
220 V 50 Hz, 16 VA, stabilized between 180 and 250 V
Dimensions
220 x 235 x 280 mm (8.6 x 9.3 x 11 in)
Supply
110 V, 60 Hz or 220 V, 50 Hz
Weight
3.5 kg (7.7 lbs)
Dimensions, H x W x D
150 x 260 x 360 mm (5.91 x 10.2 x 14.2 in)
Weight
5 kg (11 lb)
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0087
2,473.00 Stimulator P, 115 VAC
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0159
2,473.00 Stimulator P, 230 VAC
BS4 73-0105
5,228.00 Rodent Shocker Sine-Wave Shock Generator with
Foot Switch, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
$
Product
BS4 73-0106
5,228.00 Rodent Shocker Sine-Wave Shock Generator with
Foot Switch, 230 VAC, 50 Hz
BS4 73-0107
168.00 Ear Shock Electrodes for Mice and Rats, pair
BS4 73-0108
305.00 Eye Shock Electrode for Mice and Rats
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
HSE-HA Stimulator CS for Isolated Cells
The stimulator CS Type 223 is a new development of an electronic
stimulator for the electrical stimulation of isolated cells, e.g.
myocytes. Stimulating isolated cells needs a high impulse current to
trigger a maximum of cells independent of the size, shape specially in
cell culture medium having a low resistance. This is of importance in
experiment where the threshold voltage of cell reaction has to be
determined. To reduce electrochemistry effects such as polarization
of the electrodes and double layer of gas bubbles biphasic stimulation with perfect symmetry is requested. To be able to
activate an action potential by depolarizing the membrane and to
avoid further influence of the stimuli on the cell reaction, short and
powerful impulses are required.
Max. Output Current [A]
5
3
Stimulation Mode
•
High output impulse
current
•
Backup memory for
timing setting
•
Specially adapted for
isolated cells stimulation
SINGLE/STRT single stimulus triggered by START switch or
by remote contact
REPEAT/STRT repeating stimulus triggered by START switch
or by remote contact
TRIGGER pulse (TTL, negative-going edge) starts delay circuit;
START switch must be in OFF position
Timing
Stimulation
Frequency
0.05 to 100 Hz (in 29 steps) 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6,
0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70,
80, 90, 100 Hz
(leading the stimuli): 2 to 50 msec (in 7 steps) 2, 5, 10, 20, 30,
40, 50 msec
10 µsec to 10 msec (in 28 steps) 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80,
90, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 µsec
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 msec
Delay Time
Stimulus Width
Stimulus Output
1. Output voltage 0 to 50 V; Pulse Current up to 1 A at max.
pulse width (10 msec)
2. Monophasic, Biphasic, Alternated
3. Output circuit floating, not connected to earth (ungrounded)
Indication
1. LCD module (4 lines of 16 characters each) to indicate
stimulus parameter settings (except amplitude);
2. Digital voltmeter (DVM) to indicate output voltage setting
range selectable: 0 - 19.99 V <—> 0 - 50.0 V
3. LED for stimulus pulse
4. Beep (with each stimulus pulse), can be switched off
5. 2 LEDs for polarity of next stimulus: + or -
Trigger Input/Output:
Input
BNC socket, input signal starts time delay, TTL level, negative
active edge
BNC socket, signal: delay time, open collector output (2 kΩ to +5V)
Weight
3.5 kg (7.7 lb)
Dimensions, H x W x D
110 x 300 x 250 mm (4.3 x 11.8 x 9.8 in)
Catalog No.
2
Constant voltage monophasic, biphasic or alternating stimulation (> 1A)
Specifications
Output
4
Easy to use
•
Physiology
Stimulation Mode and Timing are displayed on a LCD display and can
easily be set in a step through mode using the ‘Menu’ button and the
adjust knob. The last setting of the timing is stored in a backup memory and recalled automatically after switching on the instrument. The
Stimulus Output Voltage is indicated on the built-in digital voltmeter
and can be Adjusted on two potentiometers: “coarse” and “fine” with
adjustment in the range of 0 to 45 V. The output is floating, not connected to earth (ungrounded). The output has a very low impedance
(less than 1 Ohm). To avoid overheating of the output circuit a
dynamic current limiter is built in. It limits the maximum output current relative to the Stimulation Width.
•
$
Product
BS4 73-0485
2,778.00 HSE-HA Stimulator CS, 220 VAC, 50 Hz
BS4 73-2667
2,778.00 HSE-HA Stimulator CS, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
1
0
0,01
0,1
1
Stimulation Width [ms]
10
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I21
Stimulators
D330 MultiStim System for Tissue Bath Stimulation
Typical System
Configurations
The D330 MultiStim System is a modular and highly versatile multi-channel stimulator designed to be used by biomedical scientists who wish to
accurately stimulate a number of low impedance tissue preparations with
different stimulating voltages or currents. The output channels are fully
protected and galvanically isolated from ground so that a single earthing
point can be chosen and loops avoided.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
The system provides a choice of modules for either constant voltage
stimulation (up to 100 V or 1 A) or constant current stimulation (up
to 500mA from a 100 V source). The D335 - Meter can be fitted into
the system to allow precise voltage or current monitoring.
I22
A selection of timing modules are available to generate pulses, variable
in frequency and width, which can be controlled as bursts using a gating waveform, variable in repetition rate and duration or pulse count.
For ease of use, most modules have an error indicator to warn of
incompatible settings or an overload condition. Sockets are fitted to
allow full external control and synchronization if required.
The D330 MultiStim System rack/case is available in two sizes. A 19 inch
rack-mountable unit that can house up to ten stimulation channels and
a ‘half-width’ bench-top unit capable of taking up to four stimulation
channels along with the Pulse Train Generator and Gating modules.
The D345 PowerStim is an extension of the D330 MultiStim System
range, and provides the controlled high power stimuli from a low
impedance source needed for Field Stimulation of preparations in
extra low impedance baths. It provides up to 80 V at 2.5 A from each
of its four overload protected channels and these outputs can be externally combined to give two 5A channels or a single 10A.
•
Versatile tissue bath stimulator
•
Multiple independent channels
•
Constant current or constant
voltage operation
•
Modular design
Rack and Power Supply
The Rack and Power Supply unit contains a motherboard that distributes the power, automatically connects the timing signals between the
generators and the stimulators as well as routing the signals of the
stimulating channels to one or more of the D335-Meter modules. They
are fully enclosed to meet laboratory safety standards so that they can
be used on the bench top.
NOTE:As the normal stimulating procedure is short pulses with a longer ‘gap’ the power supplies are rated for a duty cycle that will give at least 500mA continuous ‘rack’
stimulation current.That is 1 A at 50% duty cycle or 5A at 10% duty cycle for short pulses.
D337 19-inch Case
This unit can hold up to ten independently adjustable stimulation
channels along with the required timing, gating and monitoring units
from the range of available modules.
Catalog No.
BS4 65-0352
$
Product
2,310.00 Model D337 19 in. Rack and PSU
Safety Information
To comply with laboratory safety standards, the complete D330MultiStim System must be completely enclosed. Therefore we offer
matching D330-1 and D330-2 Single and Double Blank Front Panels
to complete the front panel aperture. We cannot sell a system with less
than a completely filled front panel.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 65-0360
39.00 Model D330-1 One-Wide Blank
Product
BS4 65-0361
55.00 Model D330-2 Two-Wide Blank
The modularity of the system allows a system to be extended or split
between smaller units for two sites.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
D330 MultiStim System for Tissue Bath Stimulation
quicker than the mechanics. Therefore, the
circuit will detect and warn the user if the
‘time-between’ stimuli pulses is less than
5 ms. The user must ensure that this
never happens.
The module connects to the outputs of a
D333H or D343 via 2 mm - 2 mm leads
(supplied). The D333H/343 has the functions and specifications as defined in its
specification part of this manual. Each module is preset for specific channels whose outputs are to be switched. Normally, the unit
will be supplied preset for channels 1 and 2
or as required when a full system is purchased. That is, the timing signals of the
D333H/343 and the D342 will automatically
be the same. The channels set is shown at the
top of the module front panel.
Current and Voltage Monitoring
This 2-Channel Bi-Phasic switcher is for use
with a D333H or D343 module. The unit provides the switching function required to alternate the polarity of the stimuli to each of two
preparations. It provides control of stimulus
polarity (Normal, Alternating or Reverse)
independently for each channel as well as
warning of a stimulus timing rate that is toofast. The control and timing for the pulses is
generated by selecting other modules from
the D330 - MultiStim™ range.
It should be noted that the unit works with
mechanical relays that require a certain time
to switch their polarity. The circuitry is
designed so that the changeover command is
taken (independently for each channel) from
the end of each stimulus timing pulse so that
the relay ‘moves’ when no stimulus is being
applied.
As with all mechanical devices, relays have a
finite life. This is quoted as a minimum of
100,000,000 mechanical operations. If the
relay was to ‘move’ whilst a stimulus was presented the contacts would wear-out much
Alt
Reverse
Left hand blue socket will go positive
with respect to associated right hand
blue socket
Polarity of sockets with respect to
each other reverse with each stimuli
Right hand blue socket will go
positive with respect to associated
left hand blue socket
As set on associated D333H/D343
channel, optional D335 METER
module will display current and voltage
Current
1 A max. (depends on D333H/D343)
Output
Pair of 2 mm sockets (with compliance)
Mechanical Life
100,000,000 (100 Million) operations
at 10 Hz
Electrical Life
5,000,000 operations at 200 mA,
200,000 operations at 1 A Note: only
applies if stimulus rate is NOT too
high (< 5 ms ISI)
Too-Fast
Catalog No.
BS4 65-0356
D333H Dual Stimulator
A double-width unit with two totally independent constant voltage stimulation channels. The
D333H has an output capability allowing a
maximum output of up to 1 A per channel.
D343 Dual Stimulator
Similar to the D333H but with constant current stimulation control.
D335 Meter
This module allows selection of the channel
for monitoring of current or voltage. This is
displayed on a 3-digit display which is ‘held’
until the next pulse, for ease of reading.
Specifications
D333H:
0 to 10V or 0 to 100V at 1A max
per channel
< 5/20 µsec
D343 Dual Stimulator 0 to 50mA or 0 to 500mA from
100 V supply
Amplitude
Indicators:
Reverse
The Meter module is a precise method of
monitoring voltage or current without the
need of an oscilloscope and more than one
can be fitted per rack.
Rise/Fail Time
Specifications
Polarity Selector:
Normal
The D330-MultiStim System provides a choice
of two different stimulators. Each has output
channels with independent, automatically reset
output protection and indication of error conditions but they differ in their capabilities.
D335 Meter
Catalog No.
00.0 to 99.9 V, 0.00 to 9.99 A,
000 to 999 mA
$
Product
BS4 65-0349
1,073.00 Model D333H Dual
Stimulator (0 to 100 V,
1 A Max.)
BS4 65-0357
1,073.00 Model D343 Dual
Stimulator (0 to 500
mA, 100 V Max.)
BS4 65-0351
710.00 Model D335 Meter
Module
Physiology
D342 2-Channel
Bi-Phasic Switcher
The current and output voltage of each channel can be monitored independently with the
D335 METER as taken from the output of the
D333H/343 stimulation module. This can
show either the voltage or current of the
selected channel immediately before the end
of the stimulation pulse. The meter will
always read a positive value irrespective of
the polarity of the stimulus.
Stimulators and Monitoring
Amber LED indicates output pulse is
‘REVERSE’
Red LED illuminates if ‘off’ time
between stimuli is < 5 msec
$
Product
710.00 Model D342 Dual BiStim module (for use
with a D333H/343)
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I23
Stimulators
D330 MultiStim System for Tissue Bath Stimulation
D332T Pulse Timing
D340 Count & Delay
The D330-MultiStim System provides a
common timing pulse to all the stimulating
channels in the system unless the D344 is
used for external control of each channel.
These modules provide that timing. This provides the pulse frequency and pulse width for
the system. Incorporates 10-turn controls for
greater accuracy.
Provides the method of introducing an ‘extra’
stimulation pulse (or just a single stimulation
pulse timing to occur) at a delay after a particular pulse within a train. This can be used
for Refractory Period measurements. The
D340T (not shown) is the same module but
incorporates a 10-turn control for greater
delay accuracy.
Specifications
Specifications
Frequency
0.01 to 1100 Hz
Count
01 to 99
Pulse Width
0.01 to 110 msec
Delay
0.1 to l0 sec
Catalog No.
$
BS4 65-0348
Product
905.00 Model D332T Pulse, 10Turn
Catalog No.
BS4 65-0354
$
Product
848.00 Model D340 Count and
Delay Module
Control and Gate
D344 Remote
Each system must have one of these modules
as they provide the routing for the timing signals and the connectors for external control
and synchronization. They also contain the
power switch rod and supply health indicator.
This module allows complete and independent control of the timing of each channel
using an external timing generator.
Catalog No.
BS4 65-0358
D334B Sync
This basic module is not shown but is the
same as the left-hand side of the D341.
$
Product
710.00 Model D344 Remote
Interface Module
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
D331AT Sync & Gate
I24
This double-width module adds the control of
Gating the duration of a burst of pulses to the
basic functions.
D341A Sync & Train
This module is similar to the D331AT but controls the Gating as number of pulses in a burst.
Specifications
D331AT:
Gate Repetition
Gate Duration
0.1 to 110 sec
0.01 to 11 sec
D341A:
Gate Repetition
Number-of-Pulse
in Burst
Catalog No.
0.1 to 990 sec
01 to 99 sec
$
Product
BS4 65-0350
683.00 Model D334B Sync
Module
BS4 65-0347
1,254.00 Model D331AT Sync
and Gate, 10-Turn
BS4 65-0355
1,268.00 Model D341A Sync and
Train module
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
Biphasic Isolated Stimulators
Biphasic Stimulus Isolator (BSI-1)
•
Two independent
constant current
sources: use separately
or biphasically
•
Accepts TTL or biphasic
gates
•
Multi-range 70-turn
amplitude controls
•
± 90 volts compliance
•
Battery operated
photically isolated
Biphasic Stimulus Isolator (BSI-2)
The Model BSI-2 Biphasic Stimulus Isolator has been optimized for applications
requiring precise control of rectangular waveform stimuli. It is designed for use with
external timing circuits which are biphasic single channel or dual channel TTL. The
external timing input(s) gates each of the two photically isolated, independently battery powered, constant current sources. Because they have completely independent
isolators, range controls, and output circuits, the ‘A’ and ‘B’ outputs can be used as
independent monophasic stimuli which are completely isolated from each other as
well as from the control input. Each output has an inversion switch and an extra binding post to facilitate installation of coupling capacitors or current monitoring resistors.
The two sets of output binding posts are strategically placed so that the addition of two
jumpers (provided) converts the unit instantly to biphasic or pulse pair operation.
Specifications
Constant Current
100 nA to 10 mA each channel with polarity inversion switch
Current Control Ranges 1,10, l00 and 1000 µA per turn via 5 position rotary switches each channel
Output waveform
follows input (linear)
Specifications
Constant Current
±100 nA to ±10 mA
Constant Voltage
Zero to ±125 V
Linearity
1%
Noise
0.5% of full output range
Compliance Voltage In
Constant Current Mode ±125 V
Isolation
1000 V (photically isolated)
Input Voltage Range
0 to ±10 V (accepts any waveform)
Range Adjust
4 position switch & calibrated input attenuator
knob (0 to 1.0)
Output Controls
10 turn potentiometer with indicating dial each channel
Output Linearity
1% all ranges
Rise Time
2 µsec w/ 1 MΩ source impedance
Compliance Voltage
90 volts each channel, independent battery sources
Slew Rate
5 V/µsec
Isolation
1000 VDC (photically isolated), < 30 pF between any two jacks
Current Monitor Output
1 mV/µA
Output Connections
3-way banana binding posts, 3 each channel
Power Supply
Input Connections
Floating BNC jacks
4 x 9 V lithium batteries
4 x 67.5 V batteries
Input Signal:
A/B Biphasic
B Only
Weight
5 lbs
±2.8 V mm, TTL compatible, protected to ±15 V
±2.8 V mm, TTL compatible, protected to ±15 V
Power Supply
2 x 9 V lithium batteries & 4 x 45 V batteries
Battery Life
100 hrs min.
Package
Bench mount with supporting handle
Size, H x W x D
Weight
Catalog No.
BS4 72-3755
$
Physiology
The Model BSI-2 features high compliance, high isolation, and the same conveniently portable plastic case as the BSI-1. The main difference is that its output circuitry has
been optimized for gated on-off operation rather than proportional input following.
This mode of operation is inherently very low noise and eliminates the danger of
applying DC currents as a result of low level offsets in the control signal between output pulses. It also permits manual fine tuning of the output level from the unit itself
which can be placed near the preparation. If you need non-rectangular waveforms
(e.g. sinusoids, ramps or computer D/A driving), we recommend the BSI-1, a linear
biphasic stimulus isolator with a complete range of both constant current and constant voltage output levels.
The Model BSI-1
Biphasic Stimulus
Isolator is totally
battery-powered uti• Constant current and
constant voltage
lizing
optimum
• ±125 volts compliance
packaging design to
provide maximum
• Battery operated
photically isolated
isolation of stimulus
signals. This instrument is a truly linear
device which converts any waveform from 0 to ±10 volts
into a constant current or voltage stimulus. It has a constant current range from ±100 nA to ±10 mA with a compliance voltage of up to ±125 VDC and a constant voltage
range between 0 and ±125 VDC. A 4-position front panel
range switch allows optimum resolution for selecting
precise stimulus amplitudes. A calibrated front panel
control knob allows the investigator to apply input signal
levels which can be attenuated to give continuously
adjustable output levels. A separate output jack is provided for monitoring current levels through the electrode so
that no connection need be made across the electrode
which could interrupt the stimulus’ current path. The
Model BSI-1 is completely self-contained and portable
with an adjustable handle for convenient placement near
the preparation. It is the logical companion to the BPG1,2 Biphasic Pulse Generators.
•
Product
2,861.00 BSI-1 Single-Channel Biphasic
Stimulus Isolator
BS4 72-3756
18.00 Replacement Battery*, 9 V Li Ion
3.5 x 26 x 7.5 in (less handle)
BS4 72-3757
53.00 Replacement Batteries*, 45 V
5 lbs (shipped with batteries installed)
BS4 72-3758
75.00 Replacement Battery*, 67.5 V
* Note: Supplied in package of 2.
Catalog No.
BS4 72-3759
$
Product
2,402.00 BSI-2 Dual Channel Biphasic Stimulus Isolator
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I25
Stimulators
6000 Series Stimulators
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
The 6000 Series of stimulators are ideal units for conducting teaching and research experiments. The range, which consists of the 6002
Basic Stimulator, 6012 Dual Pulse Stimulator and the 6020 Dual Impedance Stimulator, have been designed specifically to allow complete compatibility between all 6000 series stimulators. This allows two or more systems to be connected together to make a sophisticated
multi channel system.
All systems feature variable pulse frequency, 3 operating modes, variable pulse width, variable pulse amplitude, an output on or off selector, pulse indicator, gate in and gate out terminals. The 6012 and 6020 Stimulators also feature a sync output terminal. The 6020 stimulator featurers a delay circuit that allows the output pulse to be delayed in relation to the sync output for oscilloscope timebase to be
pre-triggering.
In continuous mode, systems generate a continuous stream of pulses, at the selected frequency, amplitude and pulse width.
In single shot mode, a single pulse is generated at the selected amplitude and pulse width, whenever the single shot key is activated or when
the gate in condition is met.
In gate in mode, whenever the gate in condition is met or the single shot key is activated, pulses are produced at the selected frequency,
amplitude and pulse width, for as long as the condition remains met.
6002 Basic Stimulator
•
Single Pulse, Single
Channel
•
50 Volt Pulse Amplitude
•
6 Pulse Widths
6012 Dual Pulse Stimulator
The 6002 stimulator features a
highly stable pulse generator that
is continuously adjustable
between 0.1Hz to 100Hz, with a
variable pulse width that can be
set to one of six positions and a
maximum output amplitude of
50 Volts.
Specifications
Frequency Range
0.1 to 100 Hz in 3 ranges
Pulse Width Range
0.1 to 5 mS
Output Amplitude
0 to 0.5 Volts, 0 to 5 Volts or 0 to 50 Volts
Rise and Fall Time
> 5 µsec
Gate In
Short Circuit or 12 Volt (Max) Logic Pulse (triggers on falling
edge)
Connections
2 x insulated 4 mm sockets (Output)
2 x BNC Socket (Gate Connections)
Power
Catalog No.
BS4 50-6002
110-115 Volts 60 Hz or 220-230 Volts 50 Hz
$
The 6012 stimulator is similar to
the 6002, however this unit has
a wider frequency range of 0.1
• Sync Output
to 1000Hz and a dual pulse
function. When dual pulse mode
• 50 Volt Output Amplitude
is selected a secondary pulse is
• 6 Pulse Widths
generated behind the initial
• Produces Tetanic Train
pulse; a delay circuit controls
Pulses
the time difference between the
two pulses. The 6012 is also
capable of producing Tetanic Train Pulses internally without the need
to utilise any other external triggering.
•
Dual Pulse Single
Channel
Specifications
Frequency Range
0.1 to 1000 Hz in 4 ranges
Pulse Width Range
0.1 to 5mS in 6 preset steps
Dual Pulse Delay
0 to 1000 mS
Output Amplitude
0 to 0.5 Volts, 0 to 5 Volts or 0 to 50 Volts
Rise and Fall Time
> 5 µsec
Gate In
Short Circuit or 12 Volt (Max) Logic Pulse
(triggers on falling edge)
Connections
2 x insulated 4 mm sockets (Output)
3 x BNC Socket (Gate & Sync Connections)
Power
110-115 Volts 60Hz or 220-230 Volts 50Hz
Product
1,954.00 6002 Basic Stimulator
Catalog No.
BS4 50-6012
I26
$
Product
1,995.00 6012 Dual Pulse Stimulator
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stimulators
6000 Series Stimulators
6020 Dual Impedance Stimulator
Harvard Apparatus Stimulus Isolation Unit
The 6020 Stimulator is similar
to the 6012 stimulator, however
there is no dual pulse function.
• Sync Output
Instead this unit has a fully earth
• 150 Volt Output
isolated output amplitude of 150
Amplitude
Volts, which can be set at 100
• 9 Pulse Widths
ohms or 100 K Ohms impedance. The delay circuit allows
the output pulse to be delayed in relation to the sync output.
This Isolation Unit makes true
biphasic stimulation available to
the researcher at a low cost
when used in conjunction with
the BS4 50-6002 Harvard
• Effectively isolates any
Apparatus
Single
Pulse
stimulator having a
minimum output of
Stimulator and BS4 50-6012
12 volts
Harvard Apparatus Single/Dual
• Available with positive
Pulse Stimulator, see page I26.
or negative output
This self-contained, battery-powpulses
ered Isolation Unit is constructed of plastic for additional isolation. The Unit’s output faithfully reproduces the pulse shape characteristics of the driving stimulator, but is optically isolated from it. The
output voltage is controlled by a 3 decade digital potentiometer providing a range from zero volts to approximately 96% battery supply
voltage in steps of 0.1%.
•
Dual Output Impedance
Specifications
0.1 to 1000 Hz in 4 ranges
Pulse Width Range
0.1 to 50 mS in 9 preset steps
Dual Pulse Delay
0 to 1000 mS
Output Amplitude
0 to 0.15 Volts, 0 to 5 Volts or 0 to 50 Volts
Rise and Fall Time
> 5 µsec
Gate In
Short Circuit or 12 Volt (Max) Logic Pulse (triggers on falling
edge)
Connections
2 x insulated 4 mm sockets (Output)
1 x uninsulated 4mm earth connection
3 x BNC socket (Gate & Sync Connections)
Power
110-115 Volts 60 Hz or 220-230 Volts 50 Hz
Catalog No.
BS4 50-6020
$
Product
Essential safety
device for experiments
involving AC-powered
stimulators
In operation, the stimulator controls are set to the required pulse
width and frequency. These factors are maintained independently of
the stimulator voltage. The output of the stimulator is set to 12 volts.
It is then connected to the Stimulus Isolation Unit. The output of this
Isolation Unit is then set to the required voltage and connected to the
appropriate electrodes.
Physiology
Frequency Range
•
2,450.00 6020 Dual Impedance Stimulator
Specifications
External Power Source
12 to 100 VDC batteries
Input from Stimulator
12 V
Output Impedance
≤ 100 Ω
Dimensions, H x W x D
60 x 155 x 95 mm (25 x 6 x 35 in)
Weight
225 g (1/2 lb)
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-8275
317.00 Harvard Apparatus Stimulus Isolation Unit* with
Positive Output Pulses
BS4 50-0090
317.00 Harvard Apparatus Stimulus Isolation Unit* with
Negative Output Pulses
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I27
PLUGSYS Cases
HSE-HA PLUGSYS Modular Measuring and Control System
•
Universal modular measuring and
controlling system for recording and
data acquisition
•
Wide range of modules
- Transducer amplifiers (force,
pressure, flow)
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
- Biopotential amplifiers (ECG,
EEG, EMG, AP)
I28
- Amplifiers for biochemical
sensors (O2, pH, ion selective)
- Calculating modules (differentiator, integrator, heart rate)
- I/O modules (trigger output,
recorder output, trigger input,
signal input)
- Controlling and special function
modules (ventilator module,
liquid level controller,
programmable stimulator module)
- Interface to recording devices,
data acquisition and controlling
•
Modular structure permits multiapplication platform use:
- Hemodynamics
- Pulmonary
- Isolated organ
- Biopotentials
- Combinations (hemodynamics
and pulmonary)
•
Modules can be interconnected
internally. There is no need for
external cables which reduces clutter
and confusion. The same is true for
recorder and data acquisition
connections, simple, clutter free
connections reduce the chance
of error.
General System Description
PLUGSYS is a flexible measuring and control system developed for use in physiological and
pharmacological research. Its modular design accepts a wide pallet of different plug-in function modules such as bridge amplifier, differentiator, integrator, heart rate meter, ECG amplifier etc. All these modules fit directly into the PLUGSYS main frame, which is available in a 19
inch rack or as a desktop case.
The PLUGSYS main frame is the base of the measuring system. It consists of the case, the standard power supply, and the bus system. The system has 20 slots for PLUGSYS modules, but the
maximum number of installable modules in practice depends on the width of the module. The
PLUGSYS configuration for most applications will result in a maximum of 10 to 15 modules
per case.
One of the leading features of the PLUGSYS measuring system is the slot-independent design,
that means that all configuration settings are done on the plug-in modules and not on the system bus. The system can be modified or reconfigured by the using jumpers and dip switches
installed on the PLUGSYS modules.
The PLUGSYS is not only a conventional modular analog measuring system, it includes specific interface modules and application software for data acquisition and analysis.
HSE-HA PLUGSYS System Cases and Minicase
The basic system cases with internal system bus are supplied completely wired and ready for
use. The different models have either 6, 10 or 20 positions (slot units = SU) which accept the
PLUGSYS modules. A MiniCase is also available that has 4 slot units and with an optional Case
Extension that increases the number to 6 slot units.
The Type 601 cases provides a total space of 10 slot units. The Type 603 cases provides a total
space of 20 slot units. The width of the function PLUGSYS modules equals either one or a multiple of it slot units. For instance, the width of the CFBA Bridge Amplifier is equal to two slot
units, therefore it would occupy 2 slot spaces in the PLUGSYS case. The maximum number of
PLUGSYS modules — such as a Bridge Amplifier, Differentiator, Integrator, or Heart Rate
Module — which can be plugged into a unit system case depends on the number of slot units
required by each module.
The MiniCase housing is a low-cost and space-saving alternative for 1 or 2 modules and allows
PLUGSYS modules to be used as conventional stand-alone units. Unlike the PLUGSYS housings
Type 601 and 603, the MiniCase has no system bus for power supply or signal link between
the individual modules. For this reason, the MiniCase systems are supplied custom wired and
configured to suit your requirements. The MiniCase is only suitable for use with certain modules or module combinations. Please contact Harvard Apparatus for more information.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Cases
HSE-HA PLUGSYS Modular Measuring and Control System
BS4 73-0045 Model 603 PLUGSYS Main Frame Case
PLUGSYS Bus
Trigger Bus
Each of the PLUGSYS Mainframe cases has a series of multifunction
connectors into which PLUGSYS modules are inserted. The connector
pins interface with the PLUGSYS bus. The PLUGSYS bus provides the
power for the PLUGSYS modules and is further subdivided into:
The trigger bus is used by some PLUGSYS modules for outgoing and
incoming trigger signals (e.g. synchronization signals between master
and slave modules (see example below). Jumpers on the PLUGSYS
modules are used to assign trigger lines, similar to assigning analog
lines. External (user) access to the trigger bus is provided by the BS4
73-1633 ROM-T PLUGSYS , see page I52. The following are examples
of setups which use trigger signals:
• A 16-line analog bus (AV1 to AV16)
• A 4-line trigger bus (TR1 to TR4)
• An 8-bit digital bus
Analog Bus
• The PLUGSYS bridge amplifier module TAM-A is used to
amplify and condition a left ventricular pressure signal. The
TAM-A analog output is assigned by jumpers to line AV1.
• The PLUGSYS Differentiator module is used to derive dP/dt
from the LVP Signal. The input is linked to the LVP signal on
line AV1. The output is linked to line AV2.
• A PLUGSYS Heart Rate module is used to calculate heart rate
from the LVP signal on line AV1. The input for the LVP signal is
assigned to AV1 and the output for heart rate signal is
assigned to line AV3, using jumpers on the Heart Rate module.
Each analog signal produced by a PLUGSYS module can be picked up
from the BNC socket on the front of the module. There are two ways
to acquire signals which minimize the potential for cable clutter. The
first uses the BS4 73-0161 Data Acquisition Hardware, PLUGSYS
Version, see page I80, along with HSE-HA* data acquisition software.
The second method used to acquire data from any other data acquisition system or strip chart recorder, picks up the analog signals using
the BS4 73-1684 Recording Output Standard Set, see page I51.
• The BS4 73-0021 PLUGSYS Programmable Stimulator Module
PSM, see page I58, is used for electrical stimulation of isolated tissues. If a multiple channel Stimulator using several PSM
modules is used, these modules can be synchronized. One
module acts as a master module and the other module as the
slave. The master module Synchro-Output is assigned to TR-1
and the slave module Synchro-Input is assigned to TR-1.
• The BS4 73-1741 PLUGSYS Ventilation Control Module, see
page I55, is used to generate negative ventilation pressure
in the thoracal chamber. A sigh breath can be inserted in the
respiratory cycle using a BS4 73-1750 Timer Counter Module,
see page I55, to trigger the Ventilation Control module.
The output from the Timer Counter Module and the ‘DEEP
INSP.IN’ from the Ventilation Control module are both
assigned to line TR2. The Timer module is now set to trigger
a Ventilation Control module sigh breath.
Physiology
Each PLUGSYS module which produces an analog signal is assigned it’s
own analog channel (AV1- AV16) using jumpers on the module PC
board. Some modules use as their input analog signals from other
modules (e.g. Differentiator module, Heart Rate module, etc.). Using
jumpers on the PLUGSYS module, the input signals can be easily
assigned to an AV channel without the use of cables. The following is
an example of a setup which uses analog input and output signals:
Setup for Isolated Perfused Lung, see page K6.
Digital Bus
The digital bus consists of a proprietary 8 bit parallel data bus and several handshake lines. It is used to control modules such as the BS4 730221 Programmable Stimulator, see page I58, or the BS4 73-1748
Plethysmograph Control Unit, see page I56, which requires control
from HSE-HA* software. The BS4 73-0161 Data Acquisition Hardware,
PLUGSYS Version, see page I80 with the DIM-D option are used to
access the digital bus signals.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I29
PLUGSYS Cases
HSE-HA PLUGSYS System Cases and Minicase
MiniCase with Case Extension
and PLUGSYS Modules TAM-A
BS4 73-0045 Model 603 PLUGSYS Main Frame Case
BS4 73-1521 Model 601 with 5 PLUGSYS Modules
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specifications
PLUGSYS Case Type 603
PLUGSYS Case Type 601
PLUGSYS MiniCase Type 609
Housing Construction
Metallic housing, gray plastic coated,
Universal 19 inch case with pivoting feet,
prepared for rack mounting
Metallic housing, gray plastic coated
with pivoting feet
ABS plastics, flame-resistant to UL94VO, color RAL
7032 (stone gray), with ventilation slots at sides
Dimensions, H x W x D
132 x 483 x 435mm (5.2 x 19 x 17.1 in)
150 x 235 x 420mm (5.9 x 9.25 x 16.5 in)
160 x 160 x 250mm (6.3 x 6.3 x 9.8 in);
Option 01 = 206mm (8.1 in)
Weight
6.5 kg (14.3 lbs)
4.8 kg (10.6 lbs) without PLUGSYS modules
1.4 kg (3.1 lbs) approx. without PLUGSYS modules
Power
100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, built-in line filter,
100 W max. consumption
85 to 264 VAC (40 Watts), output voltage
+5 VDC (5 A) and ±12 VDC (0.5 A) for supplying
PLUGSYS modules
85 to 264 VAC (40 Watts), output voltage +5 VDC
(5 A) and ±12 VDC (0.5 A) for supplying
PLUGSYS modules
Accessories
Line Cable, Spare Fuses, Screw driver for fitting
Function Modules, Document Folder for
Operating Instructions of Function Modules
3 x BNC-BNC Output lines
Line Cable, Screw driver for fitting Function
Modules, Document Folder for Operating
Instructions of Function Modules
3 x BNC-BNC Output lines
Mains Supply Cable and Operating Instructions
2 x BNC-BNC Output lines (3 if with case
extension Option01)
Module Positions
20 slot units max.
10 slot units max.
4 slot units max. without extension case; possible to fit
6 slot units using internal straps, Option 1 case extension
Socket Combination
3-pin IEC mains with fuse and mains switch
on back of housing
3-pin IEC mains with fuse and mains switch
on back of housing
3-pin IEC mains with fuse and mains switch
on back of housing
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0045
BS4 73-1529
Product
BS4 73-1521
736.00 Additional Power Supply, Type A
1,768.00 PLUGSYS Case, Type 601
BS4 73-3103
284.00 Option for PLUGSYS Case Type 601, Additional
Power Supply +24 Volt (1.6A)
BS4 73-3082
146.00 PLUGSYS Bus Adapter to Mount Backside
Modules on the Front
PLUGSYS Minicase Type 609
BS4 73-1537
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-1538
290.00 Option 2, Additional Power Supply, additional +24 V
(1.6 A) output increases max. consumption to 80 W
BS4 73-1541
194.00 Option 4, 4 BNC Sockets on Rear, for signal inputs
or outputs
BS4 73-1542
419.00 Option 5, Housing without Power Supply, empty
MiniCase housing without power supply and mains
input, to take non-electrical PLUGSYS modules,
e.g. Pressure Regulator Module PRM Type 671/3;
reduces housing width to 105 mm
BS4 73-3346
210.00 Option 7, 6 BNC Sockets on Rear, for Signal Inputs
or Outputs
2,018.00 PLUGSYS Case, Type 603
PLUGSYS Case Type 601
BS4 73-1523
I30
$
PLUGSYS Case Type 603
629.00 PLUGSYS Minicase, Type 609
75.00 Option 1, Case Extension:
Case width extension through internal straps, extra
width 2 slot unit case can take front panels up to 6
slot units
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Modules
HSE-HA Bus Link Module (BLM)
HSE-HA PLUGSYS Bus Adapter
•
To mount backside modules on the front side of the
system case
The PLUGSYS Bus Adapter is used to mount modules that would
normally mount on the backside of the PLUGSYS system case, on the
frontside. This adapter is especially required for the Type 601 Case
(BS4 73-1521) to use the HSE Data Acquisition Hardware for PLUGSYS
cases (BS4 73-0161).
Two PLUGSYS
Basic System
Cases linked
together with BLM
Specifications
•
To link together 2 PLUGSYS main frame to increase
module spaces
PLUGSYS Width*
2 slot units
The Bus Link Module is used to increase the number of slot units available by linking two PLUGSYS mainframe together. This is necessary if
the maximum number of module or the maximum power consumption of one case is exceeded. The resulting combination of two cases
works as one unit. The BLM does not increase the maximum number
of 16 analog (AV) or digital (DV) connection lines of the PLUGSYS bus
system. The BLM itself does not need any slot space, it is installed on
the rear of each PLUGSYS case.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-3082
$
Product
146.00 PLUGSYS Bus Adapter
Physiology
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28
A complete BLM connection kit consists of the following:
•
•
•
•
2 BLM Type 680
1 Connection Cable
1 Mounting Kit
1 Operating Instructions
Note: The BLM module can only be installed in the PLUGSYS basic system case, Type 603.
Specifications
Dimensions, H x W
Rear Panel Installation Space: 128.7 x 40.5 mm
PLUGSYS Width*
2 slot units
Weight
800 g (set of 2 BLM and 1 connecting cable)
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0163
$
Product
1,121.00 BLM Bus Link Module
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I31
PLUGSYS Modules
HSE-HA PLUGSYS Modules
BS4 73-1602 Carrier Frequency
Bridge Amplifier Module CFBA
Cat. No.
$
BS4 73-0149 ECG
Amplifier Module ECGA
PLUGSYS Module Description
BS4 73-0146 Transit Time
Flowmeter Module TTFM
Page
Amplifier Case Modification Modules
PLUGSYS Module Description
Page
BS4 73-1587 2,132.00 DIF/S Differentiator Module without Max/Min Storage
I49
I31
BS4 73-1583 2,650.00 INT Integrator Module
I49
BS4 73-3082
I31
Input/Output Modules
BS4 73-0065
146.00 Bus Adapter Module
BS4 73-0222 1,159.00 EIM External Input Module (Analog Only)
I50
I50
946.00 TAM-A Analog Transducer Amplifier Module
I33
BS4 73-1601
660.00 EIM-S Suppression Module for EIM
BS4 73-1793 1,052.00 TAM-D Digital Transducer Amplifier Module
I33
BS4 73-2823
345.00 DIM Data Interface Module
I50
BS4 73-0907
I33
BS4 73-0223
511.00 DIM-D Digital Bus Link for DIM
I50
I34
BS4 73-1683
440.00 ROM-DL Recording Output Module - Direct Link
I50
BS4 73-1684
752.00 ROM-A Recording Output Module - Adjustable
I51
BS4 73-1639
406.00 ROM-C Recording Output Module - Connector
I51
724.00 CFAB Carrier Frequency Adapter Box
BS4 73-1602 2,064.00 CFBA Carrier Frequency Bridge Amplifier
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
$
BS4 73-0163 1,121.00 BLM Bus Link Module
Transducer Amplifiers
Flowmeters
BS4 73-0146 8,581.00 TTFM Transit Time Ultrasonic Flowmeter Module
I34
Biopotential Amplifiers
BS4 73-0166 2,240.00 ROM-SET Recording Output Standard Set
I51
BS4 73-0149 2,095.00 ECGA Electrocardiogram ECG Amplifier Module
I35
BS4 73-1633
242.00 ROM-T Trigger Input/Output Module
I52
BS4 73-1753
I35
BS4 73-1631
383.00 ROM-B 8-Fold BNC Output Module, Signals 1-8
I52
443.00 ROM-B 8-Fold BNC Output Module, Signals 9-16
I52
805.00 RWT R-Wave Trigger Module
BS4 73-1778 3,510.00 EGM Einthoven Golberger Module
I36
BS4 73-1632
BS4 73-1779 4,238.00 WLA Wilson Lead Amplifier
I36
BS4 73-1752 1,205.00 STOM Software Trigger Output Module STOM
BS4 73-0153 3,074.00 BPA Biopotential Amplifier Module
I37
Controlling Modules
I52
BS4 73-1780 5,595.00 MAPM 6 Channel Monophasic Action Potential Module I37
BS4 73-1597
BS4 73-3080 3,884.00 MAPM 3 Channel Monophasic Action Potential Module I37
BS4 73-2806 1,501.00 SCP Servo Controller for Perfusion
I53
BS4 73-1773 3,390.00 MEA Microelectrode Amplifier Module
I42
BS4 73-0195
734.00 PRM Pressure Regulator Module
I54
526.00 GSM Gas Select Module
I54
BS4 73-2665
907.00 Headstage PreAmplifier
760.00 ODM Output Driver Module
I53
I42
BS4 73-1647
BS4 73-1766 2,226.00 EMGA Electromyogram EMG Amplifier Module
I43
BS4 73-1741 4,090.00 VCM-P Ventilation Control Module using Integral Pump I55
BS4 73-1770 2,210.00 EEGA Electroencephalogram EEG Amplifier Module
I43
BS4 73-1743 3,227.00 PHDA Peak Height Detector Amplifier Module
I44
BS4 73-2795 4,084.00 VCM-R Ventilation Control Module using Pressure
Regulated Gas Source
I55
I45
BS4 73-1750 1,292.00 TCM Timer Counter Module
I55
BS4 73-1748 3,726.00 PCU-1 Plethysmograph Control Unit Module
I56
BS4 73-1792 1,683.00 TCAM Thermocouple Amplifier Module
Amperometric and Electrometer Amplifiers
BS4 73-0215 1,645.00 pHMM pH Measurement Module
I46
BS4 73-1749 1,589.00 PCU-2/4 Plethysmograph Control Unit Module
I56
BS4 73-1776 1,121.00 pHCM pH Control Module
I46
BS4 73-1754 1,678.00 PCU-3 Plethysmograph Control Unit Module
I56
BS4 73-0210 2,380.00 OPPM Oxygen Partial Pressure Module
I47
BS4 73-0046 3,155.00 VSM Ventilator Sequencer Module
I57
I47
BS4 73-0221 2,019.00 PSM Programmable Stimulator Module
I58
BS4 73-3097
I58
BS4 73-0212 1,645.00 EMM Electrometer Module
Calculating Modules
I32
Cat. No.
BS4 73-0210 Oxygen
Partial Pressure Module
599.00 PPG Programmable Pulse Generator Module
BS4 73-0165 2,593.00 HRM Heart Rate and ECG Amplifier Module
I48
Stand Alone Amplifiers
BS4 73-1747 2,727.00 RRM Respiration Rate Module
I48
BS4 73-0748 13,193.00 BRL-100 Laser Doppler Flowmeter
BS4 73-0164 2,871.00 DIF Differentiator Module
I49
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
I59
PLUGSYS Transducer Amplifiers
Transducer Amplifier Modules
(TAM-A and TAM-D)
The
Transducer
Amplifier Module is a
DC amplifier with
bridge. It is used to
amplify physiological
signals like blood
pressure, contraction force and contraction displacement using transducers based on a resistive
Wheatstone
bridge. Transducers
with a built-in preamplifier which have
a high level DC
output voltage can
also be connected.
Choose from two:
TAM-A (analog) &
TAM-D
(digital
display). The TAM-A is equipped with an analog LED bar graph signal
indicator and is best suited for applications which require the
monitoring of dynamic signals, e.g. blood pressure. The TAM-D has a
digital numeric display and is best suited for applications with slowly
changing signals, e.g. isometric or isotonic contractions, intracranial
pressure or venous blood pressure.
Bridge Supply Voltage
+5V / 50 mA max.
Transducer Input
6-pin socket with screw lock (binder, Amphenol Tuchel)
Differential input circuit, input impedance 1010 Ω
Gain
Selectable Ranges by Internal Jumper: 0.2 to 10, 0.4 to 20, 1 to
50, 2 to 100, 4 to 200, 10 to 500, 20 to 1000, 100 to 5000, 200
to 10000. Fine Adjustment Through 10-Turn Trimmer
Bridge Balance
Through 10-turn trimmer coarse adjustment and electronic
autozero by push button (LED for error if autozero is not possible)
Signal Output
a) On front panel through BNC socket ±10 V pulsatile filtered or
mean signal output internally selectable
b) Through bus connector to PLUGSYS measuring system
through links ±10 V pulsatile filtered and mean signal voltage
Output Low-Pass Filter a) Selectable by switch on front panel for pulsatile output
signal: 1, 100, 300 Hz
b) Selectable by internal jumper for mean output signal: 0.1,
0.3 Hz
Analog Indication
TAM-A LED bar graph 20 LEDs (+13/-7) for visual check on the
signal sensitivity approx. 1 V/LED TAM-D 3 1/2-digit LED display
BS4 73-0907
Carrier Frequency Adapter Box, Type 376
The Type 376 carrier frequency
adapter box (CFAB) allows the
interconnection of an inductive or
• Provides a carrier
capacitive transducer (half bridge
frequency excitation for
system) to a DC-bridge amplifier.
inductive or capacitive
This adapter box can be used with
transducers
most differential pressure trans• Interfaces differential
ducers, see page F42, and with the
pressure transducers to
various amplifiers
HSE-HA lung weight transducer. A
DC bridge amplifier supplies
power, through a 5 volt excitation
voltage to the adapter box which in turn supplies a 0.6 volt, 5 kHz sine
wave excitation signal to the transducer. The transducer signal voltage is
demodulated and passed through the adapter box to the DC bridge amp.
It is available with connectors for one of five different amplifiers including both PLUGSYS TAM modules, see left column.
•
Sine wave carrier demodulator for bridge amplifiers
Specifications
Power Supply
Transducer Excitation
Voltage
From Preamp Excitation, 5 V/ 30 mA
0.6 V, 5 kHz
Input Voltage From
Transducer
0 to 50 mV
Input Resistance
40 Ω
Gain
1-fold
Thermal Zero Shift
< 0.01 mV/°K
Thermal Gain Shift
< 0.01 %/°K
Output Resistance
300 Ω
Frequency Range
0 to 200 Hz, ±5%
Dimensions, H x W x D
40 x 120 x 65 mm (1.6 x 4.7 x 2.6 in)
Cable Length
1.8 m (5.9 ft)
Weight
0.2 kg (7 oz)
Electrical Calibration
Selectable by switch on front panel:
a) 0 V output signal with switch in position ‘0’
b) Positive or negative calibration output voltage adjustable
with 10-turn trimmer if switch is in position ‘CAL’
Catalog No.
Power Supply
+5 V through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
BS4 73-0907
724.00 CFAB for PLUGSYS Amplifier
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
BS4 73-2701
792.00 CFAB for Harvard Apparatus Transducer Amplifier
BS4 73-2702
862.00 CFAB for Grass Amplifier, 6 pin Cannon Connector
BS4 73-2703
843.00 CFAB for Gould Series 6600 Amplifier, 14 pin
Connector
BS4 73-2704
931.00 CFAB for Gould Series 4600 Amplifier, 12 pin
Deutsch Connector
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0065
946.00 Transducer Amplifier Module TAM-A
BS4 73-1793
1,052.00 Transducer Amplifier Module TAM-D
$
Physiology
Specifications
Carrier Frequency Adapter Box,
Type 376 (CFAB)
Product
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I33
PLUGSYS Transducer Amplifiers
Carrier Frequency Bridge
Amplifier Module (CFBA)
The HSE-HA Carrier Frequency Bridge
Amplifier (CFBA) (5 kHz) is a plug-in
module for the PLUGSYS system. Together
with a suitable transducer it is designed for
the electrical measurement of mechanical
variables such as force, pressure,
displacement, acceleration, etc. In multiple
transducer applications, it is important that
the carrier oscillators of the CFBA can be
synchronized to eliminate interference. The
CFBA is specially designed for transducers
with AC excitation voltage like differential
pressure transducers.
Specifications
Bridge Supply Voltage
AC excitation voltage (5 kHz sine wave) internal adj. from 3 - 5 V
Synchronization
Switch selectable master or slave (internal)
Input Voltage Range
140 mVrms (internal gain setting x10), 14 mVrms (internal gain
setting x100)
Gain:
0 to 100, 0 to 1000 or 0 to 10,000, depending on various internal
and external gain settings
Switch selectable x10 / x100
Switch selectable x1 / x10 and continuously adjustable through
10 turn trimmer from 0 to 100%
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Internal
External
Band Width
The
Transit
Time
Flowmeter (TTFM) is an
ultrasonic Transit Time
flowmeter for animal
research. It incorporates
a complete 1-channel
Transonic® ultrasonic
transit time flowmeter. It
can be used either with inline flow probes or
perivascular probes from
Transonic®, see page J7.
An extensive selection of
probes for vessel diameters from 0.25 to 36 mm
are available for chronic
and
acute
studies.
The extracorporal in-lineprobes, ideal for isolated
organ preparations, are
available in sizes from 0.5 to 22.2 mm. The module features a built-in
digital display for direct reading of mean flow and an analog instrument
to show flow, signal quality and scale factors. The TTFM has mean and
pulsatile outputs for recording, both can be used simultaneously.
Specifications
Digital Display
Shows average flow rate in ml/min or l/min
Analog Display
For monitoring analog flow, quality of ultrasound signal and scale
factors; analog display also shows flow signal in MEAS. mode,
signal quality in TEST mode and scale factors in CAL mode
Normal/Loflow
Loflow scale selection for increased sensitivity (x4) on low flows
Zero Flow
Automatic zero adjustment by pressing button
MEAS/CAL/TEST
Switch to select three modes: Measure/Calibration/Test
Zero/Scale
Delivers 0 flow and scale flow signal at output for calibrating connected recorder or data acquisition systems; scale factor
depends on connected probe
Flow Direction
Can be inverted by switch polarity in case flow probe mounted in
wrong direction
Low-Pass Filter
Three filter positions (100/30/10 Hz) for smoothing pulsatile output; 0.1 Hz fixed for mean output
1.
0 to 1 kHz
Output Low-Pass Filter 11 positions 0.01 Hz to 1 kHz selected by rotary switch
Signal Input
6-pin socket with screw lock (binder, Amphenol-Tuchel)
Signal Output
1.
2.
Analog Indication
front panel BNC socket ±10 V (filtered output signal)
Through bus connector to PLUGSYS measuring system
(jumper selectable) both filtered and unfiltered output signal
in range of ±10 V
Through LED bar graph + 20 LED’s / - 9 LED’s for visual check
on the measurement; sensitivity can be selected between 500
mV / LED and 50 mV / LED
Electrical Calibration 1
CAL 1 adjustable through 10-turn trimmer, negative and positive
calibration voltage; calibration signal is superimposed on measurement signal by pressing CAL 1 key
Electrical Calibration 2
CAL 2 selected internally through link plugs
1. Positive calibration voltage
2. Negative calibration voltage
3. External calibration voltage from PLUGSYS measuring syst
Signal Output
Amplitude of calibration voltage is adjustable with 10-turn trimmer; calibration voltage is applied on pressing CAL 2 key; during
this time measuring signal is switched off
Synchronization
For applications with two or more TTFM modules, synchronization output or input can be connected on PLUGSYS bus; selector
on unit selects master or slave mode
Adjustable with 10 turn trimmer, negative and positive values;
suppression can be switched on and off with switch
Power Supply
5 V 0.6 A through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
PLUGSYS Width
4 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Suppression SUP
2.
On front panel through BNC sockets ±10 Volt FS, pulsatile
and mean
Through bus connector to PLUGSYS measuring system
(jumper selectable) ±10 V FS, pulsatile and mean
Signal Output MUX
After pressing MUX (MULTIPLEX) key filtered signal output of amplifier is
switched for example to input of digital voltage meter module for accurate
zero adjustment and calibration setting; function is self-maintained and
module previously selected is switched off
Catalog No.
Power Supply
+5 V, 1.1 A through main connector from PLUGSYS bus system
BS4 73-0146
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
TTFM flowmeter cannot be purchased as a stand alone flowmeter. Please call for details.
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1602
I34
Transonic Transit Time Flowmeter
Module (TTFM)
$
$
Product
8,581.00 Transit Time Flowmeter Module TTFM
Product
2,064.00 Carrier Frequency Bridge Amplifier Module CFBA
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
Electrocardiogram (ECG)
Amplifier Module (ECGA)
HSE-HA R-Wave Trigger Module
(RWT) for ECG Amplifier
This module amplies ECG signals. A floating
input circuit is used to avoid hum and grounding problems. A bar graph display permits
visualization of the ECG signal. The filters are
for heart rates up to 1000 beats per minute.
Both outputs can be used for recording on a
chart recorder or for data acquisition. A
square-wave signal generator with amplitudes
of 0.3 mV and 1 mV is incorporated or calibration
This module is especially designed to
trigger (start) a
stimulator or any
other device with the
R-wave of an ECG
signal. The ECG signal has to be measured with the
PLUGSYS ECG Amplifier Type 689. The R-wave trigger
module is internally connected to the ECG Amplifier
and works only together with this amplifier.
•
Module to trigger an
external stimulator,
data acquisition,
oscilloscope on ECG
R-Wave
The R-wave trigger module can be used (e.g., for synchronized stimulation of the heart) by triggering a
delay module of a stimulator. It is possible to set the
stimulation pulses delayed from the R-wave into the
vulnerable phase to produce ventricular fibrillations.
The trigger output of this module must be connected to
the trigger input of a stimulator with a BNC cable.
Specifications
Input
Floating differential input, isolated barrier internally clamped
to 300 V, with protection against static discharges and 10
kHz input filter for h.f. suppression
Input Connector
5-pin binder socket with screw lock; pin connections correspond to those of standard 3-pin ECG input cable
1010 Ω
106 dB
Filters:
Low-Pass Filter
High-Pass Filter
(HIGH CUT OFF) 150 Hz, 120 Hz, 100 Hz, 50 Hz
(LOW CUT OFF) 5 Hz, 1 Hz, 0.5 Hz, 0.1 Hz
Filter Indication
By green LEDs on front panel
Gain Trimmer:
Switch In Position x0.5
Switch In Position x1
Switch In Position x2
1000 to 5000
2000 to 10000
4000 to 20000
Display
Bar graph 0.75 V/LED
Output
BNC connector on front panel (±10 V); output voltage also
available on PLUGSYS bus
Calibration
Square-wave signal generator with amplitudes of 0.3 mV
and 1 mV
Recorder Output
Internal output is connected to bus system via jumpers;
ECG signal is connected to recorder via Recorder Output
Module (ROM); also possible to connect recorder directly to
BNC connector ‘ECG OUT’ at front panel
Quick Start
For rapid discharge of coupling capacitors by pressing
QUICK START key
Specifications
Output
BNC connector TRIGGER OUT at front panel open collector
TTL signal,
pull-up resistor 2.2 kΩ; jumper on board defines whether
positive or negative pulses used as trigger pulses
R-Wave Indication
LED and beep to indicate R-wave; loudness of beep can be
set with potentiometer
Threshold
Threshold for triggering can be set with potentiometer
Adjustable Blocking Time
Blocking time for trigger signal can be adjusted so that circuit is inactive for fixed time; time can be set with potentiometer ‘BLOCKING TIME’ in range from 50 msec to 500
msec; LED indicates blocking time
Power Supply
Through ECG Amplifier Type 689
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 20.2 x 100 mm (5.1 x 0.8 x 3.9 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
1 slot unit
Weight
0.2 kg (0.4 lbs)
Accessories
BNC output cable, operating instructions
* For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Power Supply
5 V/600 mA, through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Catalog No.
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
BS4 73-1753
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0149
$
Physiology
Input Impedance
Common Mode Rejection
$
Product
805.00 RWT R-Wave Trigger Module for ECGA
Product
2,095.00 ECG Amplifier Module ECGA
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I35
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
Einthoven Goldberger Module
(EGM)
Wilson Lead Amplifier Module
(WLA)
The EGM module is used for capturing and
amplifying ECG signals after Einthoven and
Goldberger lead configuration in the PLUGSYS
system. It connects to 4 electrodes. This module has isolated input amplifiers in order to
avoid hum interference.
The WLA module Type 702 is used for
capturing and amplifying unipolar ECG chest
lead potentials after Wilson lead configuration
in the PLUGSYS system. Up to 6 chest
electrodes (V1 to V6) can be connected.
IMPORTANT: Correct recording of the Wilson
unipolar chest electrode potentials requires
the central reference signal (Central Terminal
Point, CTP) which is formed from the bipolar
extremity leads after Einthoven. Using the
WLA therefore requires the EGM module Type
701 which provides the CTP signal. The
necessary link between the two modules is
provided by the input box.
Inputs Leads:
RA
Right Arm
LA
Left Arm
LF
Left Foot
RF Right Foot (Reference)
Output Signals: Bipolar Einthoven Extremity Leads:
I
LA(+) - RA(-)
II
LF(+) - RA(-)
III
LF(+) - LA(-)
Unipolar Goldberger Extremity Leads:
aVR
RA(+) - (LA+LF)/2(-)
aVL
LA(+) - (RA+LF)/2(-)
aVF
LF(+) - (RA+LF)/2(-)
The 6 output voltages of the different leads can
be switched through jumpers to the PLUGSYS
system bus. From the system bus they can be picked off by a Recorder
Output Module (ROM)for direct recording or a DAQ Hardware
PLUGSYS for data acquisition by computer.
The WLA module has isolated input amplifiers
in order to avoid hum interference. In this
way the inputs are isolated electrically from
the output circuits and from the housing. The
6 output voltages of the different chest leads
can be switched through jumpers to the
PLUGSYS system bus. From the system bus
they can be picked off by a ROM module for direct recording or a DAQ
Hardware PLUGSYS for data acquisition by computer. A square-wave
calibration generator with a 1 mV amplitude is incorporated for
calibrating the amplitudes.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specifications
I36
ECG Leads
Bipolar extremity leads I, II and III after Einthoven as well as
unipolar extremity leads aVR, aVL and aVF after Goldberger
ECG Input
4-way inputs cable must be connected as follows: RA (right arm),
LA (left arm), LF (left foot), RF (right foot)
Input Circuit
Isolated input circuit (floating input), isolating volt. 200 V DC max.
Input Impedance
107 Ω
Filter:
Low-Pass Filter
High-Pass Filter
100 Hz, 200 Hz and 500 Hz
0.1 Hz, fixed
Gain
Setting x0.5 - 500; Setting x1 - 1000; Setting x2 - 2000
Calibration
Square-wave signal 1 mV 2 Hz (120/min); calibration signal is
activated with switch
Recorder Outputs
Outputs of 6 ECG leads are linked by jumpers to PLUGSYS bus system; link to recorder is provided by Recorder Output module (ROM)
installed in PLUGSYS System
Supply
5 V 1.2 mA from PLUGSYS system bus
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Connector
96-pin VG connector to DIN 41612, 8-pin RJ-45
Input Cable
(Order separately) 4-way ECG input cable with needles, or 4-way
ECG input cable with banana plugs, or input box with 4 + 6
inputs for simultaneous use of WLA module Type 702 for 6
unipolar Wilson chest leads (V1 to V6)
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1778
$
Specifications
Input Leads
V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 and CTP Note: CTP = Central Terminal
Point = Ref. Signal (add. output on EGM Module, Type 701)
ECG Leads
6 unipolar chest leads after Wilson; V1 to V6
Input Circuit
Isolated input circuit (floating input), isolating volt. 200 V DC max
Input Impedance
107 Ω
Filter:
Low-Pass Filter
High-Pass Filter
100 Hz, 200 Hz and 500 Hz
0.1 Hz, fixed
Gain
Setting x0.5 - 500; Setting x1 - 1000; Setting x2 - 2000
Calibration
Square-wave signal 1 mV 2 Hz (120/min); calibration signal is
activated with switch
Recording Outputs
Output signals of 6 ECG leads are linked by jumpers to
PLUGSYS bus system; link to recorder is provided by Recorder
Output Module (ROM) installed in PLUGSYS system
Supply
5 V 1.2 mA from PLUGSYS system bus
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Connector
96-pin VG connector to DIN 41612, 8-pin RJ-45
Input Box
(Order separately) Input box with 4 + 6 inputs for simultaneous
use of WLA module Type 702, and EGM module Type 701 for 4
bipolar Einthoven extremity leads (I, II, III) and Goldberger unipolar extremity leads (aVR, aVL, aVF) with necessary internal link
for CTP. See page I39 for more information.
Model
3,510.00 Einthoven Goldberger Module EGM
BS4 73-1785
262.00 4-lead ECG Input Cable with Needles
BS4 73-1786
262.00 4-lead ECG Input Cable with Banana Plugs
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1779
$
Model
4,238.00 Lead Amplifier Module WLA
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
Biopotential Amplifier Module
(BPA)
Monophasic Action Potential
Module (MAPM)
The Biopotential Amplifier module (BPA) is
used to amplify ECG, EMG, EEG, ENG
biopotentials in the PLUGSYS system. It can
also be used with strain gauge transducers.
The BPA amplifier module is a non-isolated
amplifier. It is designed specifically for
physiological and pharmacological animal
experiments.
The MAP module Type 703 is for
capturing and amplifying monophasic
action potentials (MAPs) in the
PLUGSYS system. It has to be
connected to special MAP electrodes.
This module incorporates isolated
input amplifiers in order to avoid hum
interference. In this way the inputs are
isolated electrically from the output
circuits and from the housing.
The output voltages of the amplified
MAP signals can be switched with
jumpers to the PLUGSYS system bus.
From the system bus they can be picked
off by a Recorder Output Module
(ROM) for direct recording or a DAQ
Hardware PLUGSYS for data acquisition
by computer. A square-wave calibration
generator with a 10 mV amplitude is incorporated for calibrating
the amplitudes.
Specifications
Input
Direct for biological signals (ECG, EMG, EEG, ENG) and for
strain gauge bridge transducers
Input Impedance
Higher than 100 MΩ
Input Bias Current
30 nA maximum
Input Capacity
1.5 nF
Signal Input
8-pin binder (Amphenol) socket with screw lock
Signal Output
1.
Specifications
Amplifier Type
DC amplifier with automatic zeroing, 6 channels
Input Circuit
Differential inputs, isolated (floating input), isolating voltage
200 V DC max.
Input Impedance
When switched on (INPUT ON): 1010 Ω
When switched off (INPUT OFF): 5000 Ω approx.
Analog Indication
Through LED bar graph +13/-7 LEDs for monitoring applied signal;
display sensitivity can be changed by key from +10/-5 V to +1/-0.5 V
Transducer Supply
5 V a bridge supply for transducers and supply for headstages
Gain
20x, 100x, 200x, 1000x, 2000x and 10 000x selected by switch,
can be varied by multi-turn trimmer within range of 10 to 100%
(based on current amplification setting)
Common Mode Rejection Better than 1 in 50,000 at 50 Hz
Zeroing
Voltage range ±200 mV referred to particular input resolution:
0.1mV
CAL automatic calibration steps operated by zero key, for transducer
calibration and evaluation of input signal; calibration voltage 0.3, 1, 3,
10, 30, 100 mV is changed automatically to suit amplification setting
Filter
Low-pass filter: 1 kHz, 2 kHz and 5 kHz
Gain
Setting x0.5 - 100; Setting x1 - 200; Setting x2 - 400
Calibration
Square-wave signal 10 mV 2 Hz
Outputs
Output signals of 6 MAP signals are linked by jumpers to
PLUGSYS bus system; link to display unit is provided by
Recorder Output Module (ROM) installed in PLUGSYS system
Electrical Calibration
Frequency Range
DC to 10 kHz (-3 dB)
High-Pass Filter
12 settings, range 0.03 Hz to 10 kHz (-3 dB)
Low-Pass Filter
10 settings, range DC to 100 Hz (-3 dB)
Filter Indication
Settings of high-pass and low-pass filters are indicated as frequency pass band using LED line on front panel
Supply
5 V 1.2 mA from PLUGSYS system bus
PLUGSYS Width
3 slot units
Notch Filter
(HUM-ELIMINATION) to suppress 50 (60) Hz interference
Connector
96-pin VG connector to DIN 41612 submin-D 15-HD
Quick Start
Rapid discharge of coupling capacitors by pressing key
Input Box
Auto Zero
Automatic zero adjustment by pressing key
(Order separately) input box with 6 differential inputs, sockets suitable for 2 mm dia. plug pins, including approx. 2 m connecting cable
Manual Zero
Manual zero adjustment for correcting high input offset voltages
which exceed automatic adjustment range of Auto Zero
Catalog No.
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
BS4 73-1780
Connector
DIN 41612 96-pin VG (PLUGSYS system bus)
5,595.00 Monophasic Action Potential Module MAPM
(6-Channel)
Power Supply
5 V 1.2 A from PLUGSYS system bus
BS4 73-3080
3,884.00 Monophasic Action Potential Module MAPM
(3-Channel)
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0153
BS4 73-1643
BS4 73-1691
$
Product
3,074.00 Biopotential Amplifier Module BPA
102.00 Input Cable for Electrophysiological Signals
97.00 Transducer Adapter Cable for BPA
$
Physiology
2.
Internally through system bus of PLUGSYS measuring
system; signal output is assigned to connecting lines AV-1
to AV-16 through jumper
On front panel through BNC socket ±10 V
Inputs: A special connection box is required for connecting the MAP
electrodes, with separate switch-off facility for the individual channels.
The connection box has to be placed close to the electrodes so that the
unscreened electrode leads can be kept as short as possible. The box
is not part of the module and has to be ordered separately.
Product
BS4 73-1787
805.00 Input Box for MAPM Module
BS4 73-1788
1,025.00 Input Box for 2 MAPM Modules
BS4 73-1790
1,139.00 Input Box for EGM, WLA and MAPM Module
BS4 73-1791
1,318.00 Input Box for EGM, WLA and 2 MAPM Modules
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I37
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
NEW
Single Lead ECG Measurements
Lead I, II, or III depending on Electrode Location (RA, LA, RL, LL)
To do a single lead ECG measurement such as Lead I, II, or III, the HSE PLUGSYS amplifier
ECGA (BS4 73-0149), BPA (BS4 73-0153) or HRM (BS4 73-0165) with a selection of
different types of ECG electrodes and the matching monitoring cables are used.
Single Lead ECG Measurements
Lead I, II, or III depending on Electrode Location (RA, LA, RL, LL)
Catalog No.
$
Product
Accessories for Reusable Needles
Reusable Electrodes
Disposable Electrodes*
BS4 72-1872
60.00 Needle Cleaning Kit
Type of Electrode
28 Gauge
Needle
Ag/AgCl Discs
Unshielded
Shielded
Foam Tabs
Snaps
BS4 72-1875
Catalog No.
Supplied as
Qty. Required
BS4 72-5740
Pkg. of 12
1 Pkg.
BS4 72-3749
Ea.
1
BS4 72-7090
Pkg. of 60
1 Pkg.
10.00 Cleaning Wires for 28
to 30G Needles,
Pkg. of 10
BS4 72-1880
33.00 Cleaning Concentrate,
500 ml
Required Adapter
N/A
Catalog No.
Supplied as
Qty. Required
–
–
–
BS4 72-3750 BS4 72-7092
Ea.
Pkg. of 100
2
1 Pkg.
N/A
–
–
–
Alligator Clip Pinch Clamp
BS4 60-2394
Pkg. of 10
1 Pkg.
BS4 73-3383
Ea.
3
N/A
N/A
Accessories for Reusable Ag/AgCl
Disc Electrodes
BS4 60-1060
Connection Cable
Small Animal
BS4 73-0148
BS4 73-3357
Large Animal
BS4 73-1643
N/A
BS4 73-1643
BS4 73-1643
Accessories for Disposable Electrodes
BS4 60-2395
17.00 Preparatory Pads
(70% Isopropanol),
Pkg. of 1000
BS4 50-8309
10.00 Electrode Gel
Applicator Syringe
with blunt needle
BS4 72-7365
25.00 Electrode Gel, 4 oz
Amplifier - Choose only one
ECGA, ECG
Amplifier
BS4 73-0149
BS4 73-0149
BS4 73-0149
BS4 73-0149
BPA, Biopotential
Amplifier
BS4 73-0153
BS4 73-0153
BS4 73-0153
BS4 73-0153
HRM, Heart Rate
Monitor
BS4 73-0165
BS4 73-0165
BS4 73-0165
10.00 Double-Sided Adhesive
Disk, 7.2 mm OD, 4
mm ID, Pkg. of 100
BS4 73-0165
Please call for pricing
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
*
Small animals cables for disposable electrodes are not available. This type of electrode is difficult or impossible to be placed on such species.
For Small Animals the total monitoring cable lengths is 2.00 m the ending leads have a length of 30 cm.
For Large Animals the total monitoring cable lengths is 2.50 m the ending leads have a length of 75 cm
BS4 50-8309 Syringe
with Blunt Needle,
see page I74
Reusable Ag-AgCl Disc Electrodes, see page I136
Electrode Accessories, see page I138
BS4 72-7093
Disposable Electrode,
see page I73
Standard Hypodermic Needles, see page B18
BS4 72-7094
Disposable Electrode,
see page I73
Needle Cleaning Kit, see Pumps Section A
I38
Disposable Tab Electrode, see page I73
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
NEW
Six Lead ECG Measurements
Einthoven Leads I, II, III, aVl, aVr, and aVf
To do all the Einthoven leads, the HSE PLUGSYS amplifier EGM (BS4 73-1778) with a selection
of different types of ECG electrodes and the matching monitoring cable is used. As an alternative
to the monitoring cable, an input box can be used. The advantage of the input box is that it can
be mounted close to the animal; this reduces cable movement and allows short connections.
Six Lead ECG Measurements – Einthoven Leads I, II, aVI, aVr, and aVf
Catalog No.
$
Product
Accessories for Reusable Needles
Reusable Electrodes
Disposable Electrodes*
BS4 72-1872
60.00 Needle Cleaning Kit
Type of Electrode
28 Gauge
Needle
Ag/AgCl Discs
Unshielded
Shielded
FoamTabs
Snaps
BS4 72-1875
Catalog No.
Supplied as
Qty. Required
BS4 72-5740
Pkg. of 12
1 Pkg.
BS4 72-3749
Ea.
1
BS4 72-7090
Pkg. of 60
1 Pkg.
10.00 Cleaning Wires for 28
to 30G Needles,
Pkg. of 10
BS4 72-1880
33.00 Cleaning Concentrate,
500 ml
Required Adapter
N/A
Catalog No.
Supplied as
Qty. Required
–
–
–
BS4 72-3750 BS4 72-7092
Ea.
Pkg. of 100
3
1 Pkg.
N/A
–
–
–
Alligator Clip Pinch Clamp
BS4 60-2394
Pkg. of 10
1 Pkg.
BS4 73-3383
Ea.
4
N/A
N/A
BS4 73-3381
BS4 73-3381
Accessories for Reusable Ag/AgCl
Disc Electrodes
BS4 60-1060
Direct Connection Cable to Amplifier
Small Animal
BS4 73-1786
BS4 73-3331
Large Animal
BS4 73-3381
N/A
Accessories for Disposable Electrodes
BS4 60-2395
17.00 Preparatory Pads
(70% Isopropanol),
Pkg. of 1000
BS4 50-8309
10.00 Electrode Gel
Applicator Syringe
with blunt needle
BS4 72-7365
25.00 Electrode Gel, 4 oz
Cable to Input Box-Alternative to Direct Connection Cable
6-Lead ECG Only
Input Box
BS4 73-1777
BS4 73-1777
BS4 73-1777
BS4 73-1777
Cable to Input Box
BS4 73-3334
BS4 73-3333
BS4 73-3334
BS4 73-3334
Amplifier
For Einthoven Leads
BS4 73-1778
BS4 73-1778
BS4 73-1778
10.00 Double-Sided Adhesive
Disk, 7.2 mm OD, 4
mm ID, Pkg. of 100
BS4 73-1778
Small animals cables for disposable electrodes are not available. This type of electrode is difficult or impossible to
be placed on such species.
For Small Animals the total monitoring cable lengths is 2.00 m the ending leads have a length of 30 cm.
For Large Animals the total monitoring cable lengths is 2.50 m the ending leads have a length of 75 cm
Multi-Lead ECG and MAP Using Input Box
Choose the Input Box that fits current and future maximum number of signals
(Leads) for ECG and Monophasic Action Potential (MAP).
Physiology
Please call for pricing
*
NOTE: Input Boxes are NOT upgradeable.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1790 Input Box Type 701/3 Signal Input for
12-Lead ECG and 6 Channels of MAP
$
Model
BS4 73-1777
861.00 Input Box Type 701/4 for up to 6-Lead (4-Wire) ECG only.
Includes connection cable to EGM module
BS4 73-1789
919.00 Input Box Type 701/2 for up to 12-Lead (10-Wire) ECG only.
Includes connection cables to EGM and WLA modules
BS4 73-1787
805.00 Input Box Type 703/1 for up to 6 Channels of MAP only. Includes
connection cable to MAPM module
BS4 73-1788
1,025.00 Input Box Type 703/1 for up to 12 Channels of MAP only. Includes
connection cables to MAPM modules
BS4 73-1790
1,139.00 Input Box Type 701/3 for up to 12-Lead ECG and up to 6
Channels of MAP. Includes connection cables to EGM, WLA, and
MAPM modules
BS4 73-1791
1,318.00 Input Box Type 701/1 for up to 12-Lead ECG and up to 12
Channels of MAP. Includes connection cables to EGM, WLA, and
MAPM modules
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I39
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
NEW
Twelve Lead ECG Measurements
Einthoven Leads I, II, III, aVl, aVr, aVf and Wilson Chest Leads V1-V6
To do the Einthoven and the Wilson leads, the HSE PLUGSYS amplifier EGM (BS4 73-1778)
and WLA (BS4 73-1779) with a selection of different types of ECG electrodes are used. The
electrodes are connected to the amplifier via an input box. Different input boxes are available depending on the overall configuration (i.e., including MAP measurements or not).
Twelve Lead ECG Measurements
Einthoven Leads I, II, III, aVI, aVr, aVF and Wilson Leads V1-V6
Catalog No.
Accessories for Reusable Needles
Disposable Electrodes*
BS4 72-1872
60.00 Needle Cleaning Kit
Type of Electrode
28 Gauge
Needle
Ag/AgCl Discs
Unshielded
Shielded
FoamTabs
Snaps
BS4 72-1875
Catalog No.
Supplied as
Qty. Required
BS4 72-5740
Pkg. of 12
1 Pkg.
BS4 72-3749
Ea.
1
BS4 72-7090
Pkg. of 60
1 Pkg.
10.00 Cleaning Wires for 28
to 30G Needles,
Pkg. of 10
BS4 72-1880
33.00 Cleaning Concentrate,
500 ml
Required Adapter
N/A
Catalog No.
Supplied as
Qty. Required
–
–
–
BS4 72-3750 BS4 72-7292
Ea.
Pkg. of 100
9
1 Pkg.
N/A
Alligator Clip Pinch Clamp
–
–
–
BS4 60-2394
Pkg. of 10
1 Pkg.
BS4 73-3383
Ea.
10
Accessories for Reusable Ag/AgCl
Disc Electrodes
BS4 60-1060
For Einthoven Leads
BS4 73-3334
BS4 73-3333
BS4 73-3334
BS4 73-3334
For Wilson Leads
BS4 73-3359
BS4 73-3360
BS4 73-3359
BS4 73-3359
For Einthoven Leads
BS4 73-1778
BS4 73-1778
BS4 73-1778
BS4 73-1778
For Wilson Leads
BS4 73-1779
BS4 73-1779
BS4 73-1779
BS4 73-1779
Input Box - Choose only one
12-Lead ECG Only
BS4 73-1789
BS4 73-1789
BS4 73-1789
BS4 73-1789
12-Lead ECG &
6 MAP
BS4 73-1790
BS4 73-1790
BS4 73-1790
BS4 73-1790
12-Lead ECG
& 12 MAP
BS4 73-1791
BS4 73-1791
BS4 73-1791
BS4 73-1791
10.00 Double-Sided Adhesive
Disk, 7.2 mm OD, 4
mm ID, Pkg. of 100
Accessories for Disposable Electrodes
BS4 60-2395
17.00 Preparatory Pads
(70% Isopropanol),
Pkg. of 1000
BS4 50-8309
10.00 Electrode Gel
Applicator Syringe
with blunt needle
BS4 72-7365
25.00 Electrode Gel, 4 oz
Amplifier
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Product
Reusable Electrodes
Connection Cable
I40
$
Please call for pricing
*
Small animals cables for disposable electrodes are not available. This type of electrode is difficult or impossible to
be placed on such species.
For Small Animals the total monitoring cable lengths is 2.00 m the ending leads have a length of 30 cm.
For Large Animals the total monitoring cable lengths is 2.50 m the ending leads have a length of 75 cm
NEW
Multi-Lead ECG Recording for Isolated Heart
Mini ECG electrodes are mounted on an insert. The insert has been
designed for multi-lead ECG recording on large hearts like Rabbit, it
has all the features to be mounted on the IH-5, see page K4. The electrodes can individualy be adjusted to be as near as possible to the
heart surface.Depending on the number of electrodes installed it is
possible to mimic an “EINTHOVEN”derivation as well as “WILSON”
V1-V6 unipolar leads. The electrodes are connected to the input box
of the EGM and WLA PLUGSYS amplifier.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0550
BS4 73-0200
$
Model
2,927.00 ECG Electrode Insert for 12-Lead ECG
244.00 Monopolar ECG Electrode for Isolated Heart
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
NEW
Monophasic Action Potential (MAP) Measurements
Mini MAP Electrode
BS
47
3-0
151
BS4 73-0562
Bar with Mini-Ball
Ball = 5 mm
Rod = 8 mm OD, 140 mm long
Cane Type Monophasic
Action Potential (MAP)
Tip Electrode
BS4 73-0150
BS4 73-0566 Acrylate block clamp
for mounting bar on stand
BS4 73-3015
Spring Holder
The technique used for the measurement of Monophasic Actions
Potentials was described by the founder of this technique Prof. Franz
(Washington DC). The technique generates no injury on the heart.
The electrodes are available in two versions as “Cane type” and as
“Mini type”. By using special holders they can be mounted on laboratory stands and placed close to the animal for in-vivo applications.
They can also be used in conjunction with isolated hearts. For the
HSE-HA isolated heart systems, specific holders are used. These are
not described on these pages, see on page K23 for more information.
For multiple MAP measurements, input boxes are required. The box
is chosen depending on the number of MAP wanted and if ECG
measurement is also required. For input box options, see page I39.
BS4 73-0409
MAP Electrode
Single Channel Monophasic Action Potential (MAP) Measurements
Cane Version
Mini Version
Surface Connection
BS4 73-2910 (sponges)
BS4 73-2910 (sponges)
Electrode
BS4 73-0409
BS4 73-0150
Electrode Holder
BS4 73-3015
BS4 73-0562, BS4 73-0564, BS4 73-0151
Connection Cable
BS4 73-0152
BS4 73-0152
Amplifier
BS4 73-0153
BS4 73-0153
Lab Stand
BS4 73-0499, BS4 53-2012W
BS4 73-0499, BS4 53-2012W
Micromanipulator Left H.
BS4 64-0055, BS4 73-0566, BS4 53-2012W
BS4 64-0055, BS4 73-0566, BS4 53-2012W
Micromanipulator Right H. BS4 64-0056, BS4 73-0566, BS4 53-2012W
BS4 64-0056, BS4 73-0566, BS4 53-2012W
Stand
Cane Version
Mini Version
Surface Connection
BS4 73-2910 (sponges)
BS4 73-2910 (sponges)
Electrode
Quantity Needed
BS4 73-0409
1-12
BS4 73-0150
1-12
Electrode Holder
Quantity Needed
BS4 73-3015
1-12
BS4 73-0562, BS4 73-0564, BS4 73-0151
1-12
Lab Stand
Quantity Needed
BS4 73-0499, BS4 53-2012W
1-12
BS4 73-0499, BS4 53-2012W
1-12
Micromanipulator Left H.
Quantity Needed
BS4 64-0055, BS4 73-0566, BS4 53-2012W
1-12
BS4 64-0055, BS4 73-0566, BS4 53-2012W
1-12
Micromanipulator Right H. BS4 64-0056, BS4 73-0566, BS4 53-2012W
Quantity Needed
1-12
BS4 64-0056, BS4 73-0566, BS4 53-2012W
1-12
Physiology
Multiple Channel Monophasic Action Potential (MAP) Measurements
Stand
Input Box & Amplifier - Choose only one
1-3 Channel MAP Only
BS4 73-1787, BS4 73-3080
BS4 73-1787, BS4 73-3080
4-6 Channel MAP Only
BS4 73-1787, BS4 73-1780
BS4 73-1787, BS4 73-1780
7-12 Channel MAP Only
BS4 73-1788, 2 x BS4 73-1780
BS4 73-1788, 2 x BS4 73-1780
12-Lead ECG & 1-3 MAP
BS4 73-1790, BS4 73-3080, (BS4 73-1778, BS4 73-1779)
BS4 73-1790, BS4 73-3080, (BS4 73-1778, BS4 73-1779)
12-Lead ECG & 4-6 MAP
BS4 73-1790, BS4 73-1780, (BS4 73-1778, BS4 73-1779)
BS4 73-1790, BS4 73-1780, (BS4 73-1778, BS4 73-1779)
12-Lead ECG & 7-12 MAP BS4 73-1791, 2 x BS4 73-1780, (BS4 73-1778, BS4 73-1779)
BS4 73-1791, 2 x BS4 73-1780, (BS4 73-1778, BS4 73-1779)
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I41
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
Microelectrode Amplifier Module (MEA)
The PLUGSYS module MEA is a universal
single-channel, easily operated microelectrode
amplifier for physiological and pharmacological
research. With the aid of the separate preamplifier (headstage) it permits direct measurement of
intracellular or extracellular potentials. The compact PLUGSYS module incorporates extensive
technology and offers, in addition to its excellent
amplifier performance, also all modern extra
facilities such as adjustable output filter, calibration generator, audio monitor and LED bar graph
for audible and visual signal monitoring, microelectrode function test (resistance measurement), adjustable buzz frequency, capacity compensation and zero balance. Optionally the MEA
can be provided with special headstages.
HSE-HA Headstage
Preamplifier
BS4 73-2665 HSE-HA Headstage
•
•
Important Note for
Ordering:
Headstage
for intracellular potential recording using
the MEA
module
The Headstage Type 695-1G can
only be used in conjunction with
the BS4 73-1773 HSE-HA
Microelectrode Amplifier MEA,
see to left.
High input
impedance
1 GΩ
Specifications
Specifications
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Screened metal case with microelectrode holder integral and mounting
rod, 2 mm socket for bath reference
and screen connection for central
ground; headstage is independent of
MEA amplifier used and does not
require adjustment
Mounting
By 8 mm dia. support rod and integral
microelectrode holder suitable for
mounting of conventional micromanipulators as replacement against
standard microelectrode holder
Microelectrode Resistance
Suitable for microelectrodes in range
of 1 to 100 MΩ
Input Circuit
Fully integrated electrometer amplifier
with driven screen, boot-strapped
supply and capacity compensation
Input Current
Compensated to zero
Coupling Resistor
1 GΩ
Generator for signal adjustment to computing amplifier or recorder;
pressing CAL key injects complex calibration signal consisting of values
0 V, -100 mV and ±50 mV referred to input
Capacity Compensation
Adjustable over 0 to 8 pF
Frequency Range
DC to 75 kHz (-3dB)
LED bar graph with 30 LEDs for visual monitoring of applied signal
(7.5 mV per LED referred to input)
Supply
From MEA Microelectrode Amplifier
Type 695
For accurate zeroing bar graph range can be expanded by key
(magnifier function) to 1.5 mV per LED referred to input
Connecting Cable
Signal and supply cable 1.95 m long
with 8-pin binder or Amphenol-Tuchel
plug to suit MEA microelectrode
amplifier
Through separate preamplifier (headstage) for direct intracellular or
extracellular potential recording
Input Socket
8-pin binder or Amphenol-Tuchel socket with screw lock
Input Capacity Compensation
Continuously adjustable between 0 and 8 pF
Signal Output
Internally
Filtered output signal ±10 V corresponding to ±1 V input signal (gain 10x)
On PLUGSYS system bus, assigned via jumper to one of signal lines
AV-1 to AV-16.
By BNC socket on front panel
Externally
Amplifier Bandwidth
DC to 30 kHz (-3dB)
Output Filter
Low-pass in 7 steps covering 30 Hz to 30 kHz (-3dB)
Gain
10x (fixed)
Zero Balance
Compensation of input offset in range ±400 mV
Buzzer
AC feed through microelectrode to assist piercing cell membrane
during microelectrode insertion; buzz frequency adjustable with 16position switch between 10 Hz and 10 kHz to suit actual requirements
Calibration Signal
Analogue Indication
Audio Monitor
Audible monitoring system for measurement signal using monitoring
tone whose frequency is modulated according to signal amplitude;
loudness and base frequency are individually adjustable by trimmer
on front panel
Microelectrode Function Test
Check of microelectrode by feeding in (via the headstage) constant
current for approximate measurement of instantaneous electrode
resistance; since measurement current may damage microelectrode
by electrolysis, test duration automatically limited to 2 secs.
Supply
5 V 1.2 A from PLUGSYS system bus
PLUGSYS Width
3 slot units
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1773
I42
Construction
Input
$
Catalog No.
BS4 73-2665
$
Product
907.00 Headstage Preamplifier
Product
3,390.00 MEA Microelectrode Amplifier Module, including Headstage BS4
73-2665
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
Electromyogram (EMG)
Amplifier Module (EMGA)
Electroencephalogram (EEG)
Amplifier Module (EEGA)
This module is for amplify EEG signals. A
floating input circuit is used to avoid hum and
grounding problems. The filters are for EEG
signals up to 70 Hz. The analog EEG signal is
available at a BNC connector on the front
panel and also internally on the PLUGSYS system bus. Both outputs can be used for
recording on a chart recorder or for data
acquisition. A square-wave signal generator
with amplitudes of 50 µV and 100 µV is
incorporated for calibration.
This module is to amplify EMG signals in the
PLUGSYS system. A floating input circuit is
used to avoid hum and grounding problems.
The filters are designed for EMG signals up to
10 kHz. The analog EMG signal is available at
a BNC connector on the front panel and also
internally on the PLUGSYS system bus. Both
outputs can be used for recording on a chart
recorder or for data acquisition. A squarewave signal generator with 0.3 mV and 1 mV
amplitude is incorporated for calibration.
For EMG integration an envelope integration
circuit is provided. This signal is also
available on the front panel and on the
PLUGSYS bus.
Specifications
Specifications
Input
Floating differential input, isolated barrier internally clamped to
300 V, with protection against static discharges and 10 kHz input
filter for h.f. suppression
Input
Floating differential input, isolated barrier internally clamped to
300 V, with protection against static discharges and 10 kHz input
filter for HF suppression
Input Connector
5-pin binder socket with screw lock; pin connections correspond
to those of standard 3-pin EMG input cable
Input Connector
5-pin binder socket with screw lock; pin connection corresponds
to those of standard 3-pin EEG input cable
Input Impedance
10 Ω
Input Impedance
1010 Ω
10
Common Mode Rejection 106 dB
Filters:
Low-Pass Filter
High-Pass Filter
Envelope Curve
(HIGH CUT OFF) 10 kHz, 3 kHz, 1 kHz, 0.3 kHz
(LOW CUT OFF) 50 Hz, 25 Hz, 10 Hz, 2 Hz
(Leakage Time Constant) 0.2 s, 0.5 s, 1 s
Filters
Low-Pass Filter
High-Pass Filter
(HIGH CUT OFF) 70 Hz, 40 Hz, 20 Hz, 10 Hz,
(LOW CUT OFF) 10 Hz, 5 Hz, 2.5 Hz, 1 Hz
Filter Indication
By green LEDs on front panel
Filter Indication
By green LEDs on front panel
Gain Trimmer:
Switch
In Position x0.5
In Position x1
In Position x2
x1
100 to 500
200 to 1000
400 to 2000
Gain Trimmer:
Switch
In Position x0.5
In Position x1
In Position x2
x1
100 to 500
200 to 1000
400 to 2000
Display
Bar graph 0.75 V/LED
Display
Bar graph 0.75 V/LED
Outputs
BNC connector on front panel for EMG and envelope signal
(±10 V) output signals also available on PLUGSYS system bus
Output
BNC connector on front panel (±10 V) output voltage also available on PLUGSYS bus
Calibration
Square-wave signal generator with amplitudes of 0.3 mV and
1 mV amplitude
Calibration
Square-wave signal generator with amplitudes of 50 µV and
100 µV
Recorder Output
Internal outputs are connected to bus system via jumpers; EMG
signal and envelope signal are connected to recorder via
Recorder Output Module (ROM); also possible to connect
recorder directly to BNC connectors ‘EMG OUT’ and ‘Envelope
Integration’ at front panel
Recorder Output
Internal output is connected to bus system via jumpers; EEG signal is connected to recorder via Recorder Output Module (ROM);
also possible to connect recorder directly to BNC connector
“EEG OUT” at front panel
Quick Start
Quick Start
For rapid discharge of coupling capacitors by pressing QUICK
START key
For rapid discharge of coupling capacitors by pressing QUICK
START key
Power Supply
5 V/600 mA, through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1766
$
x10
1000 to 5000
2000 to 10000
4000 to 20000
Model
2,226.00 EMG Amplifier Module EMGA
x100
10000 to 50000
20000 to 100000
40000 to 200000
x10
1000 to 5000
2000 to 10000
4000 to 20000
x100
10000 to 50000
20000 to 100000
40000 to 200000
Power Supply
5 V/600 mA, through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1770
$
Physiology
Common Mode Rejection 106 dB
Model
2,210.00 EEG Amplifier Module EEGA
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I43
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
HSE-HA Peak Height Detector Amplifier (PHDA) Module
•
Special amplifier for recording
extracellular signals from isolated
sympathetic ganglia or whole
nerve bundles
•
Works in combination with the
Marsh Chamber
The HSE-HA Peak Height Detector Amplifier PHDA Type 683 is used in conjunction with the
ganglion chamber according to MARSH for measuring extracellular potentials of isolated sympathetic ganglia and whole nerve bundles of the rat.
The Peak Height Detector incorporates a variable gain, low-noise differential amplifier and a
spike amplitude evaluator. This enables simultaneous monitoring of low amplitude D.C. signals
and the amplitude of a selected portion of an evoked potential. The input circuit of this amplifier includes a headstage which is placed near the ganglion chamber. The peak height detector
output, which can be displayed on a chart recorder, provides a single continuous record of
changes in potential difference (membrane potential) and evoked potential amplitude or separate traces of the same two components, enabling high gain recording of low amplitude
changes in membrane potential. An amplified signal output allows oscilloscope monitoring of
the evoked potential and adjustment of the detection region for the peak detector.
Specifications
Input from Headstage:
Headstage
Input impedance
Input Capacity
Gain
Noise
Max. Differential
Input Voltage
Common Mode
Rejection Ratio
Overshoot Protection
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Trigger IN:
BNC Connector
Input Resistance
15 V constant, 100 V non-repetitive peak
Trigger Out Detect
Monitor output, TTL level, to control detect time with oscilloscope, BNC connector
AC Out
Output of AC voltage, BNC connector 10 V, 10 mA; output used to connect oscilloscope
DC Out
Output of DC voltage to chart recorder or oscilloscope; DC voltage shown in display;
BNC connector ±10 V, 10 mA; DC output shows membrane potential, which is slow signal
in frequency range from 0 to 0.2 Hz
Out
Signal output used to connect up chart recorder or oscilloscope; it is possible to switch
voltage peak height or peak height and additional DC voltage to BNC connector with switch
PEAK/PEAK+DC. 10 V, 10 mA BNC connector
Gain
Switchable x50/100/200/500/1000 (including Headstage Gain 10)
Offset
Fine adjustment with 10-turn potentiometer, can be switched off
Hold
Hold time is duration of holding amplitude of peak in peak memory; time can be set from
0.1 to 1.5 seconds.
Detect
Time is on-time for detecting max. of input signal; detect time can be set in range from
1 to 50 msec
Delay
During time peak height detector is out of action, peak height detector is enabled for detect
duration; delay time can be set in range from 2 to 100 msec
1.5 Hz to 40 kHz (-3 dB)
0 to 0.2 Hz (-3 dB)
Signal Output MUX
Literature MARSH, S.: Extracellular Recording from rat
sympathetic Ganglia and whole Nerve Bundles. BVM
Biological Measuring Technique Vl/89, BiomesstechnikVerlag March GmbH, D-79232 March, Germany.
>120 dB
4 to 30 V
5 kΩ
Frequency Range:
AC
DC
PHDA Built-In PLUGSYS Case, Type 601,
with Headstage Preamplifier
Differential input
>1012 Ω
20 pF
10 (only for headstage)
40 µVpp
> 0.2 V
After pressing MUX key, one of analog voltages (depending on switch PEAK/PEAK+DC)
is switched to system bus line AM (analog multimeter), which can be switched to Digital
Display Module (DM) or Digital Voltmeter Module (DVM). Function is self-maintained;
module previously selected is switched off.
Power Supply
5 V/0.7 A through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 80.8 x 220 mm (5.1 x 3.2 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
4 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Weight
500 g
Accessories
2x BNC-BNC cable; 3x BNC-banana cable; 2x BNC-banana adapter; operating instructions
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1743
I44
$
Product
3,227.00 Peak Height Detector Amplifier Module PHDA
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Biopotential Amplifiers
Thermocouple Amplifier Module
(TCAM)
The measurement of temperature on small
structures requires probes of correspondingly
small dimensions. With the TCAM Module and
a suitable thermocouple, there are virtually no
limitations. Thermocouples (Type T, copperconstantan) are available in a wide range of
forms. From the thinnest wires with a diameter
of 0.23 mm (IT-23) to the largest rectal probe
with 4 mm probe diameter (RET-1); a whole
range of probes in different forms and dimensions can be supplied. The temperature probes
are directly interchangeable and do not require
individual calibration.
TCAM Module requires Thermocouple Probes.
Please see pages D22 to D25 for a complete
selection of Thermocouple Probes.
The range of the TCAM module covers 0°C to
100°C. In the physiological temperature range
(30 to 45°C) the basic accuracy is 0.1°C; outside this range the accuracy is 0.2°C. The builtin digital display has a resolution of 0.1°C. The
TCAM module has an analogue output for connection to a recorder or data acquisition system. The recorder or
acquisition system can easily be calibrated through a build-in simulation device with two adjustable temperature values. In addition,
there is a zero suppression facility for recorders which permits
recording temperatures within a limited range (e.g., 36 to 38°C) at a
high resolution.
Specifications
Floating differential input, max. isolation 1500 Vrms, transient
protection to ANSI/IEEE C37.90. 1-1989, input protection to 240
VAC continuous
Input Resistance
50 MΩ
Input Connector
Thermoelement connector blue, Cu/CuNi
Range
0 to 100°C
Resolution
0.1°C
Sensitivity
0.1°C in physiologic range between 30° and 45°C; 0.2°C outside
this range
Response Time
0.2 sec (90% span)
Display
3-1/2 digit LED display
Analog Output
For simultaneous recording, using BNC connector on front panel
(±10 V, output impedance 100 Ω); output voltage is also available on PLUGSYS bus system; 100 mV per 1°C = 1 V per 10°C
Calibration
2-point calibration with two freely selectable temperatures
Power Supply
+5 V/450 mA supplied via PLUGSYS system bus
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 64-pin VG
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1792
BS4 73-1911
$
Physiology
Input
Product
1,683.00 Thermocouple Amplifier Module TCAM
33.00 Extension Cable EXT-6 for Thermocouples
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I45
PLUGSYS Amperometric & Electrometer Amplifiers
pH Measurement Module (pHMM)
pH Control Module (pHCM)
The HSE-HA pH Measurement module is used
to measure pH with pH glass electrodes. The
main application is continuously pH recording
with the combination pH electrodes for measurement in biological fluids such as perfusate
for isolated perfused organs. The input circuit
of the module includes an isolation amplifier
(potential separation between sensing electrode and circuit ground of the PLUGSYS
measuring system) to avoid measurement
errors due to ground loops and leakage currents.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specifications
I46
Floating single-ended input, isolated barrier internally clamped
to 300 V
Input Connector
Isolated BNC connector
Input Impedance
10 Ω
Input Bias Current
±300 fA
pH Range
0 to 14
Resolution
0.01 pH
Display
3 1/2 -digit LED display
Millivolt Range
±600 mV
Offset Range at pH7
±100 mV
Slope
45 mV/pH to 90 mV/pH
Output
1 V per 1 pH on BNC connector on front panel (±10 V); output
voltage is also available on PLUGSYS bus
Suppression
OFF, output voltage 0 V = pH 0 and 10 V = pH 10
ON, output voltage 0 V can be adjusted to any pH in the range 0
to 14
Adjustable between approx. 0.05 to 1 pH units; setting is indicated on pHMM module by pressing DISPLAY key
Controlled Medium (Gas) Depends on perfusion solution used and on control direction;
when used on Krebs-Henseleit solution where pH has to be
reduced: CO2 gas
2 point adjustment using calibrated buffer solutions
Simulation
Physiological measuring range for calibrating recording output
can be simulated using 2 corresponding push buttons; each simulated value can be adjusted in
pH range of 0 to 14
Power Supply
+5 V/450 mA (2.25 W)
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
$
Control Range, Setting SET POINT is adjustable between approx. pH 6.5 and pH 8.5;
set value is indicated on pHMM module by pressing DISPLAY
key
Differential, HYST
15
Slope Adjustment
BS4 73-0215
The main application is in ensuring a constant pH of biological solutions, as e.g. the perfusate of isolated organs
as isolated lung, heart, liver, kidney or isolated tissues,
see our Isolated Organ and Tissue Section K. To control
the pH a gas (commonly CO2) flow bubbling through
the perfusion solution is switched on and off. Fine
adjustment of the rate of gas flow is by a built-in needle
valve. The required pH value and the permitted fluctuations (Hysteresis) can be adjusted on trimmer potentiometers and can be indicated on the corresponding
pHMM module by pressing a key.
Specifications
Input
Catalog No.
The pHCM module Type 694/1 is used for maintaining a
constant pH in perfusion systems. It can only be used in
conjunction with pHMM pH Measurement Module, see
to the left, in the PLUGSYS system.
Required Condition of Dirt particle size 25 µm max., dry gas pressure 2 bar max.
Controlled Medium (Gas)
Gas Flow
Continuously adjustable
Power Supply
From pHMM module to which it is linked
PLUGSYS Width
1 slot unit
Connector
10-way ribbon cable to pHMM module
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1776
$
Product
1,121.00 pH Control Module pHCM
Product
1,645.00 pH Measurement Module pHMM
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Amperometric & Electrometer Amplifiers
Oxygen Partial Pressure Module
(OPPM)
Electrometer Module (EMM)
The Oxygen Partial Pressure Module OPPM is a polarographic amplifier for the PLUGSYS system. It is used to
measure oxygen concentrations with CLARK-style electrodes. The main application is recording of pO2 concentrations in biological fluids e.g. perfusate or effluate
of isolated perfused organs, using the corresponding
electrodes e.g. Mini Oxygen Electrode Type 733 or ZABS
Flow-Through O2 Chemosensor, see our website. The
digital display indicates either electrode polarization
voltage, O2 concentration as percent or mmHg or the
electrode current.
The HSE-HA Electrometer module
is a high-impedance electrometer
plug-in amplifier for the PLUGSYS
measuring system. It is used to
measure continuously concentrations with potentiometric electrochemical sensing electrodes. The
main application is recording of
pCO2 or Na+, K+ and Ca++ concentrations in biological fluids such
as perfusate for isolated perfused
organs, using the corresponding
electrodes, see our website. The
input circuit of the module
includes an isolation amplifier
(potential separation between
sensing electrode and circuit
ground of the PLUGSYS measuring
system) to avoid measurement
errors due to ground loops and
leakage currents.
The input circuit of the module includes an isolation
amplifier (potential separation between sensing electrode and circuit ground of the PLUGSYS measuring system) to avoid measurement problems due to ground
loops and leakage currents.
Specifications
Specifications
Input Connector
Isolated BNC connector
Input
Polarization Voltage
Adjustable with trimmer between -1 and +1 V
Floating single-ended input, isolated barrier
internally clamped to 300 V
Digital Display
3-1/2 digit LED display displays O2 concentration in ranges 0 to 199.9% or 0 to 1999
mmHg; electrode current in range of 0 to 1.999 (ampere multiplied with gain factor)
or polarization voltage in range from -1.000 V to +1.000 V can also be displayed
Input Connector
Isolated BNC connector
Input Impedance
1015 Ω
Input Bias Current
±300 fA
Resolution
±one least significant digit
Display
3 1/2 -digit LED display
Millivolt Range
±1200 mV
Resolution
±One least significant digit
Accuracy of Amplifier
±1% (total accuracy depending on electrode)
Linearity of Amplifier
±0.5%
Gain Adjustment
Input current ranges for electrode currents: 10-6A, 10-7A, 10-8A, 10-9A, 10-10A full
scale
Gain
x10, x20, x50, x100 set internally using jumper
Gain Fine
For fine adjustment of gain
Output
On BNC connector on front panel (±10 V, output
impedance 100 Ohm); output voltage also available on PLUGSYS bus; signal output is
assigned to connecting lines AV-1 to AV-16
through jumper
Zero Adjustment
Coarse zero current ranges: 10 A, 10 A, 10 A, 10 A, 10 A
Zero Fine
For fine adjustment of zero current
Analog Output
For simultaneous recording, using BNC connector on front panel (±10 V, output
impedance 100 Ω); output voltage also available on PLUGSYS bus system; signal output is assigned to internal connecting lines AV-1 to AV-16 through jumper
Suppression
Only active on output, adjustable with 10 turn
trimmer (max. ±10 V); suppression can be
switched on and off
Simulation
Two physiological pO2 values can be simulated for calibrating recording output;
this gives advantage of easy calibration procedure for connected chart recorder
or data acquisition system
Simulation
Power Supply
+ 5 V/450 mA
Physiological measuring range for calibrating
recording output can be simulated using 2 corresponding push buttons; for each simulated value
can be adjusted in range of ±150 mV
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Power Supply
+5 V/450 mA
Connector
DIN 41612, 64-pin VG
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0210
-8
$
-9
-10
Product
2,380.00 Oxygen Partial Pressure Module OPPM
-11
-12
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0212
$
Physiology
Floating single-ended input, max. isolated barrier internally clamped to 300 V
Input
Product
1,645.00 EMM Electrometer Module
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I47
PLUGSYS Calculating Modules
HSE-HA Heart Rate and ECG
Amplifier Module (HRM)
HSE-HA Respiration Rate
Module (RRM)
• Heart Ratemeter with wide range 20
to 1000 beats/min
•
Respiratory Rate Meter with a wide
range: 3 breaths/min to 150
breaths/min
•
Suitable for all species from mouse
up to large animals
• Includes an ECG Preamplifier
• Can calculate Heart Rate from any
signal (BP, LVP, ECG, etc.)
• Suitable for all species from mouse
up to large animals
This module is used to calculate frequency
(rate) within the range 20 to 1000 beats/min
from a signal. The input signal is provided
either from a PLUGSYS Preamplifier Module
(e.g.TAM-A or TAM-D, see page I33, having a
Blood Pressure, see pages J3 and J4, or a
force Transducer, see pages I4 to I7),
connected via the PLUGSYS bus system or
from a PLUGSYS external preamplifier over
the external input on the front panel.
The
module
also
includes
an
ECG-Preamplifier. An appropriate cable can
connect ECG-electrodes (Single Lead) directly to the external input
for reading Heart Rate. The ECG Signal is also available for recording.
Specifications
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Input
Internally
Selected by switch "INT/INPUT” (indication through LED)
“INT” signal through the 96-pin connector from the PLUGSYS
bus system
“INPUT” Using ECG electrodes connected to the built-in ECG
amplifier, or from an external unit
Externally
Specifications
Input
Internally
Externally
Selected by switch (indication through LED)
Signal through 96-pin connector from the PLUGSYS bus system
From an external amplifier
Input Filter
Band-pass, bottom and top frequency limit selected separately
within the ranges 0.04 / 0.2 / 1 Hz and 5 / 10 / 20 Hz
Trigger Operation
Adjustable over a wide range through 10-turn potentiometer
3 ranges are available, selected by a switch
3 to 37,5 breaths/min
6 to 75 breaths/min
12 to 150 breaths/min
Sensitivity
5 mV to 10 V, ECG Input: 0.1 mV to 25 mV
Input Filter
Band-pass, bottom and top frequency limit selected separately
within the ranges 0.2 / 1 / 5 Hz and 25 / 50 / 100 Hz
Range
30
60
120
Trigger Operation
Adjustable over a wide range through 10-turn potentiometer
Indication
3 1/2-digit LED display (0 to 1000 breaths/min); additional trigger
response check through LED in display field
Range
200
400
800
3 ranges are available, selected by a switch:
20 to 250 beats/min
40 to 500 beats/min
80 to 1000 beats/min
Outputs
The analogue frequency signal is available at a BNC socket on
the front panel (0 to 10V) and through the connector on the
PLUGSYS bus system. The external input signal (±10 V) can
also be passed to the PLUGSYS bus system
Indication
3 1/2-digit LED display (0 to 1000 beats/min); additional trigger
response check through LED in display field
Output Filter
Three positions: 2.5 / 5 / 25 s, are provided for smoothing the
recording
Outputs
The analogue frequency signal is available at a BNC socket on
the front panel (0 to 10 Volt) and through the connector on the
PLUGSYS bus system. The external input signal (±10 Volt) can
also be transmitted to the PLUGSYS bus system (e.g. ECG)
Signal Output MUX
Output Filter
3 positions: 0.5 sec/1 sec/5 sec, are provided for smoothing the
recording
After pressing the MUX key the response signal is switched to
the system bus line AM (analog multimeter) which can be
switched to an optional digital Display Module DM or a Digital
Voltmeter DVM. The function is self-maintained; the module previously selected is switched off.
Power Supply
5 V, 450 mA, through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
5 V, 450 mA, through connector from PLUGSYS bus system.
Dimensions, H x W x D 128.7 x 40.5 x 220 mm (5.1 x 1.6 x 8.7 in)
Power Supply
Dimensions, H x W x D 128.7 x 40.5 x 220 mm (5.1 x 1.6 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
2 slot units
PLUGSYS Width*
2 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Weight
0.45 kg (1 lb)
Weight
0.4 kg (0.9 lbs)
Accessories
Accessories
Input Cable, Output Cable, Operating Instructions
Input Cable
Output Cable
Operation Instructions
Connector
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0165
BS4 73-0148
I48
The Respiration Rate Module is used to calculate respiration frequency (rate) in the
range from 3 to 150 breaths per minute from
any signal reflecting it (respiratory airflow,
thoracic excursion signal, nasal airflow temperature signal, etc.). The input signal is
provided either from a PLUGSYS Preamplifier
Module (e.g. Bridge Amplifier (TAM-A, TAMD with repiratory belt or a Carrier Frequency
Amplifier (CFBA) with a differential pressure
transducer and a pneumotachometer connected) via the PLUGSYS bus system or from
a PLUGSYS external preamplifier over the
external input on the front panel.
$
Product
2,593.00 HRM Heart Rate Module with ECG Amplifier
Call
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1747
$
Product
2,727.00 RRM Respiration Rate Module
ECG Cable with Banana Plugs
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Calculating Modules
HSE-HA Differentiator Modules
(DIF) and (DIF/S)
HSE-HA Integrator Module (INT)
• Differentiator Module for recording
signals such as dLVP/dt, dF/dt on an
analogue recording device
• Includes maximum and minimum
tracking
The HSE-HA Differentiator is a universal analog calculator for evaluating the rate of rise
and fall of signals such as blood pressure
dP/dt, force dF/dt, displacement,
Intracellular Action Potential etc. The input
signal is provided either from a PLUGSYS
Preamplifier Module (e.g.TAM-A or TAM-D,
see page I33, having a Blood Pressure, see
pages J3 and J4, or a force Transducer, see
page I4, connected via the PLUGSYS bus system or from a PLUGSYS external preamplifier
over the external input on the front panel.
Output signals available are the differentiated
signal and a tracking signal of its maximas
and minimas. All the output signals are available via the PLUGSYS bus
for further processing or for linking to a Chart Recorder using a
Recording Output Module. The differentiated signal is also available at
the auxiliary output on the front panel.
Specifications
Externally through BNC socket or internally from system bus as
selected by switch (±10 V)
Range
Differentiation factor x calibration value x sec-1
(Differentiation factor = x1; x2; x5; x10; x20; x50; x100; x200)
(Calibration value: e.g. 100 mmHg or 1 mN)
Overrange
Overrange of the differential stage is indicated by LEDs
Amplitude Adjustment
Through separate10-turn trimmer, adjustable for external and
internal input
Operating Mode
Selected either amplitude adjustment (Matching Cal. Val.) or
differentiation (RUN)
Output Low-Pass Filter 12 positions from 2 Hz to 10 kHz, selected by rotary switch
Analog Indication
Through LED bargraph +15 LEDs/–14 LEDs for visual monitoring of the differentiated signal. The sensitivity is ±10 V
Signal Output
a) On front panel through BNC socket (+10 V)
b) Through bus connector to PLUGSYS Measuring System
through link plugs; all signals or selectively:
— Differentiated signal
— Maximum positive slope
— Maximum negative slope
— Positively limited input signal
Limit Ref
Through a 10-turn trimmer a positively limited section of the left
venticular pressure signal can be emulated which can later be
recorded enlarged on the recorder without overloading the
recording channel.
Power Supply
5 V, 900 mA through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
Dimensions, H x W x D 128.7 x 40.5 x 220 mm (5.1 x 1.6 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
2 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Weight
0.33 kg (0.7 lbs)
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0164
2,871.00 DIF Differentiator Module with Max/Min Storage
BS4 73-1587
2,132.00 DIF/S Differentiator Module without Max/Min Storage
Integrator Module for recording area
under curve (e.g., Respiratory Tidal
Volume, Cardiac Minute Volume) on
an analogue recording device
•
Includes maximum tracking
The Integrator Module INT is used to calculate the area under the curve of an input signal in the PLUGSYS system. The module readily provides time or stroke integration of
periodic physiological signals or other timerelated parameters.
Examples for Integration:
• From the Respiratory Curve
– Respiratory Minute Volume
– Respiratory Tidal Volume
• From the Aortic Flow Curve
– Cardiac Minute Volume
– Stroke Volume
– Cardiac Output (C.O.)
The input signal is provided either from a PLUGSYS Preamplifier
Module such as the Carrier Frequency Amplifier CFBA, see page I34,
with a differential pressure transducer, see page F42, and a
pneumotachometer, see pages F40 and F41, connected for airflow or
from a Transit Time Ultrasonic Flowmeter TTFM, see page I34, for
aortic flow, via the PLUGSYS bus system or from a PLUGSYS external
preamplifier over the external input on the front panel. The output
signal from maximum tracking is available on the system bus.
Specification
Input
Externally through BNC sockets or internally from system bus
as selected by switch.
Input voltage: ±10 V
Integration Time
Selected in 6 steps: 0.05 / 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.5 / 1 / 2 / 5 / 10 / 20 sec
Constant
Integration Period
Controlled through the cyclic input signal over one cycle (stroke
integration). Time-controlled through a built-in timer, selected in
the following steps: 0.5/1/2/5/10/20/30/60/120 sec. Controlled by a
trigger signal from the bus system or by pressing (RESET key)
Polarity
Choice of input signal to be integrated, positive half-wave only or
negative half-wave only or both, as selected by switch
Amplitude Adjustment
Through separate 10-turn trimmer for external and internal input
Analogue Indication
Through LED bargraph for visual monitoring of the input or output signal; sensitivity ±10 V or ±1 V by pressing the ‘x 0.1’.
Signal Output
On the front panel through a BNC socket (±10 V) through bus
connector to PLUGSYS measuring system as selected by links:
a) Current integration signal
b) Maximum value of the elapsed integration period
Power Supply
5 V, 700 mA through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 40.5 x 220 mm (5.1 x 1.6 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
2 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Weight
0.33 kg (0.7 lbs)
Physiology
Input
•
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1583
$
Product
2,650.00 INT Integrator Module
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I49
PLUGSYS Input/Ouput Modules
HSE-HA External Input Module (EIM) Data Interface Modules (ROM-DL,
DIM, DIM-D)
•
For linking
external
equipment to
the PLUGSYS
system for
connection to
data acquisition
hardware
PLUGSYS
version
BS4 73-1683
ROM-DL
BS4 73-0223
DIM-D
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
The External Input Module is used for feeding external analog signals
into the PLUGSYS Measuring System, such as a flow signal from an
external blood flowmeter, a force signal from an external bridge
amplifier or distance signals measured using a sonomicrometer. The
EIM consists of the two parts EIM-A (Adjust) and EIM-B (BNC).
The modules EIM-A and EIM-B normally fit in the PLUGSYS Mainframe
from the front. With an optional board it is possible to install the module EIM-B on the rear to have more space on the front.
An optional suppression for the EIM module is available. This option
is used to zero shift the input signal to blank out uninteresting parts of
the signal or for correcting offsets of an external amplifier.
Specifications
Inputs
4 analog inputs through BNC sockets on module EIM-B
Gain
From 0.25 to 100 adjustable by 10-turn trimmer together with
range switch x0.5/x1/x2, corresponding to max. input voltage
range of ±0.1 to ±10 V
Outputs
Through links on circuit board (jumpers) signal outputs are fed
directly into bus distribution board of PLUGSYS measuring system
Power Supply
5 V, 300 mA from PLUGSYS measuring system
Dimensions, H x W x D:
EIM-A
128.7 x 20.2 x 220 mm (5.1 x 1.6 x 8.7 in)
EIM-B
128.7 x 20.2 x 50 mm (5.1 x 1.6 x 2 in)
Suppression
128.7 x 20.2 x 100 mm (5.1 x 1.6 x 4 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
3 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Weight
0.25 kg (0.6 lbs)
Accessories
2 BNC-BNC input cable, operating instructions
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0222
I50
$
Product
1,159.00 EIM External Input Module (Contains Both EIM-A
and EIM-B Modules)
The ROM-DL is used as a central output for the analog output signals
of the modules in a PLUGSYS Mainframe. It can be used as a central
output to a recording device if connected to a ROM-C. It is used
instead of the ROM-A if the adjustment of the output amplitude is not
required that means if the connected device can handle the ± 10 Volt
signals. The ROM-DL is only a connecting board and requires a DIM
or a ROM-C as connection.
The ROM-DL is used in combination with the DIM module to realize
the connection of the PLUGSYS modules to the Data Acquisition
Board going with the HSE-HA software packages. This combination
gives a simple single cable connecting system.
For modules which require digital control, like PSM or PPG, used in
the PLUGSYS Main System Case, the DIM-D allows the digital communication between the Data Acquisition Board, HSE-HA Software
and these modules.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-1683
440.00 ROM-DL Recording Output Module - Direct Link
BS4 73-1634
491.00 Additional Board to Mount EIM-B at Rear
BS4 73-2823
345.00 DIM Data Interface Module
BS4 73-1601
660.00 Suppression Module for EIM
BS4 73-0223
511.00 DIM-D Digital Bus Link for DIM
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Input/Output Modules
HSE-HA Recording Output Standard Set (ROM)
BS4 73-1684
Recording Output
Module ROM-A
If the connected system chart recorder or data acquisition system
can handle the output voltages of ±10 Volt, adjustment for each
channel individually from 0 to ±10 Volt is not required. In this case
the ROM-DL can be substituted for the ROM-A module, and the
ROM-C with the BNC connector box can be connected to the ROMDL and installed either in the front or at the rear of the PLUGSYS system case if there is not sufficient module space on the front.
Specifications
BS4 73-1685 BNC
Connector Block
ROM-A Type 670/1
BS4 73-1683
Recording Output
Module ROM-C
Inputs
Direct from PLUGSYS system bus, all 16 analogue lines AV1 to
AV16 and MUX line
Amplitude
Individually adjustable in the range from 0 to ±10 V
Outputs
Ribbon cable connector for connecting internally the ROM-C
Dimensions, H x W x D
127.5 x 20.2 x 220 mm (5 x 0.8 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
1 slot unit
Weight
80 g (2.8 oz)
ROM-C Type 670/7
ROM DL board with DIM or ROM C. DIM is used for A/D board connection.
ROM-A is an attenuator for the internal analogue lines AV1 to AV16.
Each channel individually adjustable from 0 to ±10 Volt for optimum
matching with the recording unit.
ROM-C is a central output connector 36 pin ribbon type. All outputs
have EMI filters to reduce the electromagnetic interference from and
to the PLUGSYS measuring system.
BNC Connector Block external box with 17 BNC sockets for the 16
analogue lines AV1 to AV16 with additional EMI filters and ESD protection circuit. The maximal cable length between the PLUGSYS and
the BNC connector block is nominal 3 m. As a further combination it
is possible to use the slave output of the BNC connector block to connect up an additional evaluation and recording unit.
Output module for ROM-A or ROM-DL connected over ribbon
cable to ROM-A or DL
Outputs
All AV signals and MUX output centrally through 36-pin ribbon
output socket (e.g., CONEC Type CRS 36 LG (301A 10269x));
MUX output is additionally taken to BNC socket
Output Filter
EMC filter for suppressing radiated interference or interference
pick-up
Dimensions, H x W x D
127.5 x 20.2 x 65 mm (5 x 0.8 x 2.6 in)
PLUGSYS Width**
1 slot unit
Weight
80 g (2.8 oz)
Accessories
Fixing screws, operating instructions, connecting cable ROM-C
to ROM-A or DL
Add-On
One or two ROM-B modules, BNC connector options block
BNC Connector Block, Type 670/6
Construction
Natural anodized aluminium case with 36-pin ribbon input and
slave output socket (e.g., CONEC Type CRS 36 LG (301A
10269x)). All PLUGSYS 16 analog outputs AV1 to AV16 and
MUX-OUT available for individual connection via BNC sockets
Output Filter
EMC filter for suppressing radiated interference or interference
pick-up and ESD protection circuit
Dimensions, H x W x D
55 x 105 x 245 mm (2.2 x 4.1 x 9.6 in)
Weight
0.8 kg (1.7 lbs)
Add-On
Customized cable for connecting slave output to data acquisition
board
Physiology
The Recording Output Standard
• Central output for all
Set consists of the ROM-A Type
selected output signals
670/1, ROM-C Type 670/ 7 and
of the modules in a
BNC Connection Block Type
PLUGSYS Main Frame
670/6. This module combination
• Reduces the number of
is ideal for connecting a chart
connecting wires
recorder or digital data acquisi• Allows clear connection to
tion unit to the PLUGSYS measurany chart recorder or data
acquisition system using
ing system. The adjustable amplicustom cable
fier module ROM-A buffers all 16
internal analog lines AV1 to AV16.
The ROM-A is internally connected to the central output connector module ROM-C and has to be installed into the PLUGSYS rack from the front.
The output connector ROM-C can be installed either in the front or at
the rear if there is not sufficient module space on the front.
Construction
Recording Output Standard Set
Accessories
Operating instructions, 5 BNC cables, connecting cable ROM-A
to ROM-C (ribbon), connecting cable ROM-C to BNC connector
block are included.
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0166
$
Product
2,240.00 Recording Output Standard Set consisting of ROMA, ROM-C, and BNC Connector Block
BS4 73-1684
752.00 Recording Output Module ROM-A
BS4 73-1639
406.00 Recording Output Module ROM-C
BS4 73-1685
BS4 73-1683
1,102.00 BNC Connector Block
440.00 Recording Output Module Direct Link ROM-DL
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I51
PLUGSYS Input/Output Modules
Trigger Input/Output
Module (ROM-T )
•
Provides 2 trigger inputs
and 2 trigger outputs to
the PLUGSYS system
•
For triggering external
equipment like oscilloscopes or stimulators
•
For synchronization of
HSE-HA software with
external equipment (e.g.,
stimulators, ventilators,
etc.)
This module is used as a trigger
input and output. BNC sockets 1
and 2 are used as trigger outputs,
the BNC sockets 3 and 4 are used
as trigger inputs.
This module is connected to the
module ROM-A and mounted in
the PLUGSYS Mainframe from the rear. With the
trigger outputs 1 and 2 it is possible to trigger an
oscilloscope from a PLUGSYS module providing
this feature.
With the trigger inputs 3 and 4 it is possible to
trigger a PLUGSYS module from the outside, e.g.
triggering a module with an external stimulator.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Requires a ROM-A module to connect to the
PLUGSYS Bus
BNC Output Module
(ROM-B)
•
2 TTL outputs, open collector
TTL signal, low activ. pull-up
resistor 2.2 kΩ
Inputs
2 inputs, TTL or CMOS-signal
dynamic inputs, acting on falling
edge
The ROM-B module
is an 8 channel BNC
output
of
the
PLUGSYS measuring
system for connecting external recording or evaluation systems. The module is
normally installed at
the rear of a
PLUGSYS
rack.
Either the signals
AV1-8 or the signals
AV9-16 are taken out
via the 8 channel
output connector
module ROM-B. The maximum arrangement
is therefore 2 ROM-B for the 16 AV lines AV1
to AV16. The output modules ROM-C and
ROM-B can be combined in any way. The outputs of ROM-C and ROM-B are then connected in parallel; there is no provision for decoupling through output amplifiers.
Note:To connect ROM-B to the module ROM-A module a ROMC is necessary.The ROM-B module can be connected directly to
ROM-DL or via a ROM-C module.
Specifications
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 40.5 x 100 mm
(5.1 x 1.6 x 4.3 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
2 slot units
Weight
150 g (5.3 oz)
Dimensions, H x W x D 128.7 x 20.2 x 100 mm (5.1 x
0.8 x 4.3 in)
Catalog No.
PLUGSYS Width*
1 slot unit
BS4 73-1631
Weight
150 g (5.3 oz)
383.00 ROM-B 8-BNC Output
Module (Ch 1-8)
Accessories
2 BNC-BNC output cables
BS4 73-1632
443.00 ROM-B 8-BNC Output
Module (Ch 9-16)
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1633
$
Product
242.00 ROM-T Trigger
Input/Output Module
$
•
Alternative to
central output
ROM-C
Specifications
Outputs
Software Trigger Output
Module (STOM)
The Software Trigger Output
Module STOM is used for triggering an external device (e.g. a
stimulator) from a computer
using HSE-HA software. This
module has been specially developed for triggering stimulators, it
is also possible to trigger other
devices.
The data acquisition software,
including HSE-HA ISOHEART,
ACAD, NEURODYN and EPES,
provides the STOM module via the PLUGSYS
system with a trigger pulse. The module can
be connected to any stimulator having the
capability of trigger inputs, such as the HSEHA Stimulators I or P.
Operation of this module requires the
following components:
• Computer
• Data Acquisition Hardware, PLUGSYS
version
• DIM-D Digital Bus Link for DIM Module
• HSE-HA Software (ISOHEART, ACAD,
NEURODYN or EPES)
Specifications
Indication
LED indication for:
1. TTL/CMOS Level
2. Positive/Negative Trigger
Pulse
Outputs
2 BNC sockets Trig1 Out and
Trig2 Out, duration of trigger
pulse is 20 µsec (protected
against short-circuit)
Protective Circuit
Both outputs protected against
brief overvoltages up to 100 V
Supply
5 V 420 mA, supplied via
PLUGSYS system bus
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 20.2 x 220 mm (5.1 x
0.8 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
1 slot unit
Weight
0.2 kg (0.4 lbs)
Accessories
2 BNC cables, operating
instructions
Product
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1752
BS4 73-1704
I52
For triggering an external
device from HSE-HA
Software (e.g., Stimulator,
Oscilloscope, etc.)
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
$
Product
1,205.00 STOM Software Trigger
Output Module
Call
Software Module to
HSE-HA Software for
STOM;Control
PLUGSYS Controlling Modules
HSE-HA Output Driver
Module (ODM)
HSE-HA PLUGSYS Modules
Servo Controller for
Perfusion (SCP) Type 704
The PLUGSYS® plug-in unit “Servo Controller
for Perfusion” (SCP) is used for the
perfusion of organs and tissues using a
peristaltic pump in the physiological and
pharmacological laboratory. It is a
conventional PID controller which operates
to maintain either a constant perfusion
pressure or a constant perfusion flow.
Extension Unit
Type 605
Manual Control Box
Type 672/3
Connection Cable
For a functioning system the following
additional items are required:
•
For controlling power circuits like
valves or motors) from software
•
Connects the extension unit 605 to
the PLUGSYS system
• Measuring system, either for perfusion
pressure or for perfusion flow
• Pump suitable for external control and
providing the appropriate pumping rate
The PLUGSYS Output Driver Module is used
for the control of power circuits from a laboratory computer in automated experiments.
The output driver module can control up to 6
external power switch modules each with 8
switches (a total of 48 relays). The switch
board modules are installed in a PLUGSYS
Extension Unit, see above.
Description
Servo Controller for Perfusion (SCP) Type 704
Function
Electronic PID Controller for Physiological and Pharmacological
Research
Actual Value Input
0 - 10 V Via System Bus
Setpoint
0 - 5 V, Adjustable
Control Gain
1 - 50, Adjustable
Through 25-pin connector on front panel as link between
PLUGSYS system and switch board modules installed in
extension unit
Derivative Factor
0.1 - 100, Adjustable
Integral Factor
0.05 - 10, Adjustable
From laboratory computer through bus of PLUGSYS
measuring system
Ambient Conditions
Laboratory Indoors
Digital Indication
Range -1999 to +1999, Selectable for Actual Value, Setpoint, or
Control Output Signal
Specifications
Output
Control
Specifications
Power Supply
5 V, 400 mA through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 20.2 x 220 mm (5.1 x 0.8 x 8.7 in)
Control Voltage
0 - 10 V to Operate the Oump
PLUGSYS Width*
1 slot unit
Recorder Output
0 - 10 V, BNC Socket
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Construction
Plug-in Module for a PLUGSYS® Housing
Weight
0.25 kg (0.6 lbs)
Supply
5 V, 0.3 A from PLUGSYS® System Bus
Accessories
Cable, operating instructions
PLUGSYS Width
2 slot units
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1597
$
Product
760.00 ODM Output Driver Module
BS4 73-1572
4,192.00 PLUGSYS Extension Unit Type 649/1
BS4 73-1574
4,886.00 PLUGSYS Extension Unit Type 649/3
BS4 73-1600
749.00 MCB Manual Control Box Type 672/3
System Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Weight
0.3 kg
Accessories
Operating Instructions, Screwdriver, Output Cable to Pump
Catalog No.
BS4 73-2806
$
Physiology
Note: These automated experiments (e.g. on isolated tissue
bath where multiple pumps and valves have to be
controlled) are custom made and require several other
hardware and software components.Additionally to this
module the HSE-HA computer data acquisition hardware
and HSE-HA software ACAD or ISOHEART is required for
using the output driver module. Please ask for specific
applications.
Function
The pressure or flow measuring system
evaluates the current perfusion pressure or
perfusion flow (= actual value X); this is fed in to the “actual value”
input of the SCP module (over the PLUGSYS bus). The SCP has provision for setting the required perfusion pressure (e.g. 100 mm Hg) or
perfusion flow (e.g. 50 ml/min); this represents the setpoint X. From
these two values the SCP module produces a control voltage (Y) for
the pump so that the required perfusion pressure or perfusion flow is
produced. When using a proportional-action pump (e.g. a roller
pump) the pump control voltage corresponds to the perfusion flow
rate. This voltage is available for further use at the Y output on the
front panel. The built-in digital indication can be set to show either the
actual value X, the setpoint X, or the control output signal Y.
Product
1,501.00 Servo Controller for Perfusion SCP
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I53
PLUGSYS Controlling Modules
Pressure Regulator Module (PRM) Gas Select Module (GSM)
•
Pressure regulator 0.5 bar
•
Low hysteresis
The Pressure Regulator Module PRM is a special module to provide
a safe gas pressure from the high pressure of the gas cylinder to any
apparatus. It is used to avoid an excessive input pressure and to prevent a dangerous overpressure on instruments, glassware, etc. It
reduces the incoming gas pressure from maximum 8 bar to 0.5 bar.
Specifications
Input Pressure
8 bar max.
Output Pressure
350 mmHg (0.466 bar)
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 80.8 x 150 mm (5.1 x 3.2 x 5.9 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
4 slot units
Weight
1.2 g (2.7 lbs)
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
I54
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0195
734.00 PRM Pressure Regulator Module
BS4 73-1520
355.00 Housing for Inserting PRM and GSM
•
Used to select one of the
different gas mixtures
•
For hypoxic and nomoxic
studies on isolated organs
(hearts) using pre-mixed
gas tanks
The Gas Select Module GSM is used to select one of four different
gases. To switch from one gas to another the stopcock of the module
must be turned to the corresponding position. The GSM Module is
normally used in front of the Pressure Regulator Module PRM.
The GSM works under the normal high input pressure. Following the
GSM, a Pressure Regulator Module PRM has to be used to avoid
excessive input pressures and to prevent a dangerous overpressure
on instruments.
Specifications
Input Pressure
8 bar max.
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 80.8 x 150 mm (5.1 x 3.2 x 5.9 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
4 slot units
Weight
0.9 kg (2 lbs)
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-1647
526.00 GSM Gas Select Module
BS4 73-1520
355.00 Housing for Inserting PRM and GSM
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Controlling Modules
Ventilation Control Module (VCM)
Timer Counter Module (TCM)
The Ventilation Control
Module VCM has been
developed especially for
producing a negative
pressure at a respiratory
rhythm as required for
operating an isolated perfused rabbits, rats, guineapigs, or mouse lung.
The module operates with
a positive pressure.
The negative pressure
required for ventilation is
generated by means of a
venturi nozzle which is fitted externally. When used
with a restrictor nozzle the
module can also be
employed for positive
pressure ventilation during the preparation phase of the lung, a very convenient facility.
In order to prevent the slow collapse of the
isolated lung during quiet respiration, a deep
inspiration should be produced every 5 to 20
minutes. This results in an appreciable extension of the lifetime of the preparation. The
VCM, see facing page, therefore has a facility
for triggering such a deep inspiration by
pressing the ‘DIRECT’ key or at the regular
intervals from the HSE-HA Timer Counter
Module. Other PLUGSYS modules are also
capable of responding to this output signal.
Specifications
Input and Output
Trigger Signals
Connections made via jumpers to trigger lines
of 96-pin VG connector from internal PLUGSYS
system bus
Time Mode
Deep inspiration is produced at predetermined
time intervals. Quartz-controlled timer inside
TCM runs down from set time to ‘00’ and then
resets counter back to selected value; when
‘00’ is reached, VCM is triggered to perform
deep inspiration cycle.
Count Mode
Deep inspiration is produced after predetermined number of respiratory cycles of VCM.
Respiration cycles are counted down on presetting counter inside TCM; when zero is
reached, VCM is triggered to perform deep
inspiration cycle and counter automatically
resets to preset value
Preset
Time or event presetting is selected on two digit
thumbwheel switch (00-99) mounted on
front panel; time or count range can be altered
with switch SEC/MIN or x1/x10 to select
appropriate factor
Warning Function
TCM incorporates warning function which
announces next triggering operation; announcement activated when internal timer or counter
counts last 10 seconds or respiratory cycles;
function is indicated visually on LED and audibly
by built-in loudspeaker. Purpose of facility is to
remind user that deep inspiration is coming
shortly. This can be inhibited by pressing ‘SKIP
NEXT’ key, if desired to avoid interference with
any measurement during experiment.
Power Supply
5 V, 350 mA through connector from PLUGSYS
bus system
PLUGSYS Width
1 slot unit
Specifications
Adjustment Ranges:
Ventilation Rate
Inspiration Time
‘RATE’: 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 (min-1)
‘INSP. CYCLE’: 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60. 70. 80 (%)
Airflow at Outlet
0 to 4 I/min (no back pressure)
Internal Operating Pressure
100 to 5 mmHg electronically controlled
Trigger Output (BNC Socket)
[inspiration = low level] / [expiration = high level] TTL level (open collector)
Trigger Inputs/Outputs
through Internal Jumpers
to PLUGSYS Bus
DEEP INSP. OUT (output TTL level open collector)
EXP./INSP. OUT (output TTL level open collector)
DEEP INSP.IN (input TTL load resistance 2.2 kOhm)
Power Supply
5 V 0.4 A, 24 V 0.4 A through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
PLUGSYS Width
5 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-1741
4,090.00 Ventilation Control Module VCM-P; uses integral pump
BS4 73-2795
4,084.00 Ventilation Control Module VCM-R; uses pressure regulated gas
source (tank or house air): Requires gas pressure in the range of
2-8 bars.
Catalog No.
BS4 73-1750
$
Physiology
The VCM module works independently; it requires neither a vacuum nor a compressed air supply. The module consists of an electronic and a pneumatic section. A
low-noise pump stores the compressed air in a small reservoir where it is stabilized
electronically. The air stream which appears at the outlet connection (TO VENTILATION HEAD) passes through adjustable valves. The air is controlled electronically
according to the selected respiration rate (RATE) and the selected inspiration cycle
(INSP. CYCLE%). In addition one (or several) deep breaths (DEEP INSPIRATION)
can be triggered by pressing a button. The output therefore consists of a rhythmically
modulated air stream at a positive pressure. By connecting it to a suitable nozzle a
rhythmically modulated pressure of the desired magnitude can be produced.
The Timer Counter Module was designed to
operate in conjunction with the HSE-HA
Ventilation Control Module VCM used in all
HSE-HA isolated lung apparatus from mice to
rabbits. As a timer or event counter module it
generates a signal which triggers the VCM to
perform a deep inspiration cycle
(sigh breath).
Product
1,292.00 Timer Counter Module TCM
Note: The real ventilation curve depends on the characteristics of the venturi or restrictor nozzle and the
volume of the negative pressure lung chamber.All technical data refer to our isolated perfused lung
setups for mouse, rat, guinea pig and rabbit.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I55
PLUGSYS Controlling Modules
HSE-HA Plethysmograph Control Unit Module (PCU)
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
•
•
Control unit for switching
valves, jet nebulizers,
oxygen flushing in
a multiple animal study
using Plethysmograph
Box 855
Can be driven by the
HSE-HA* Software
PULMODYN ‘Pennock’
This module has been developed
specially for the investigation of
bronchospasmolytic-active substances on the awake animal in
combination with the plethysmograph box type 855 and the membrane valves in the PLUGSYS system. This type of experiment
involves switching valves, nebulizer and oxygen periodically on
and off in a specific sequence.
The PCU module together with the Manual Control Box (must be ordered
separatly) is used to automate and synchronize the switching of these
valves, nebulizer etc.
On the Manual Control Box it is only necessary to select a specific state
(measurement, challenge, flushing, calibration) and the PCU switches
all the valves according to this state. The PCU also delivers the bias flow
for the Plethysmograph box. One PCU can control two plethysmograph
boxes. With an extension module it is possible to control up to four
boxes. In addition the module provides for control of all four plethysmograph boxes from a computer so that a complete computerized system can be set up. This module also incorporates monitor functions. It
checks whether oxygen pressure for flushing is applied and provides an
appropriate warning. It also checks whether aerosol challenge is followed by flushing and if not provides a warning. The connection to the
plethysmograph boxes consists of 6-way ribbon tubing with the connectors ‘To Plethysmograph Box 1’ and ‘To Plethysmograph Box 2’. Each
channel can be switched on and off separately.
Specifications
Inlet Oxygen
Receives oxygen for flushing plethysmograph box — DO NOT
exceed 6 bar
Inlet Compressed Air
For switching membrane valves, driving aerosol jet nebulizer and
generating bias flow in
plethysmograph box via venturi jet — DO NOT exceed 6 bar
LED Oxygen Fault
Blinks and sounds beeper if no oxygen is delivered (empty cylinder or closed valve at oxygen pressure reducer)
Power Supply
5 V/600 mA, through connector from PLUGSYS bus system
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 121.9 x 220 mm (5.1 x 4.8 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
6 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Weight
0.8 kg (1.8 lbs)
Accessories
Operating instructions
* Note: For description of Slot Unit, see page I28.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-1748
3,726.00 PCU Plethysmograph Control Unit for Channel 1
BS4 73-1749
1,589.00 PCU Plethysmograph Control Unit Extension for
Channel 2 or 4
BS4 73-1754
1,678.00 PCU Plethysmograph Control Unit Extension for
Channel 3
BS4 73-3423
Call
Manual Control Box to PCU Plethysmograph Control
Unit
Refer to page F76 for the complete System.
I56
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
PLUGSYS Controlling Modules
HSE-HA Multiple-Channel Ventilator for Large Rodents
BS4 73-0047
•
Ventilate up to eight rodents at the same time
Valve Control line
•
Adjust tidal volume individually
Air Out
•
Very small dead space volume
•
For applications where multiple rodents must be
ventilated simultaneously (e.g. multiple blood
pressure measurement)
•
For Einthoven bronchospasmolysis test on multiple animals
Gas In
Tracheal Cannula
Air Flow
Control
BS4 73-0046
Specifications
Compressed Air Supply:
Minimum
Maximum
4 bar (58 lbs)
8 bar (116 lbs)
Respiratory Rate
30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 breaths/min
Inspiratory Time
10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80 % of total cycle
duration
Control of Ventilation Heads:
Ventilation Pressure 150 mmHg
Control Pressure
Adjustable 0 to 50 cmH2O, safety pressure set
at ‘Max. Insp. Pressure’
Ventilator Sequencer Module (VSM)
BS4 73-0048
Set up for 4 Animals
LED lights up during inspiration
Trigger Output
BNC socket on front panel (TTL open collector;
inspiration = low level; expiration = high level);
trigger signal also available on PLUGSYS bus
system
Power Supply
5 V 0.4 A and 24 V 0.18 A through connector
from PLUGSYS bus system
Dimensions, H x W x D 1128.7 x 101.6 x 220 mm (5.1 x 4 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width
5 slot units
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Catalog No.
BS4 73-0045
BS4 73-1523
One to eight ventilation heads BS4 73-0047 can be connected to the VSM. If more than
one ventilation head is used, a connecting block BS4 73-0048 is required. A directional valve within the ventilation head is controlled by the VSM to regulate the inspiratory and expiratory cycle. The VSM ventilation head includes all necessary tubing.
BS4 73-1537
$
Product
2,108.00 PLUGSYS Basic System Case
629.00 PLUGSYS Minicase1
75.00 PLUGSYS Minicase Case Extension
Option1
BS4 73-1538
290.00 PLUGSYS Minicase 24 V Option1
BS4 73-0046
3,155.00 Ventilator Sequencer Module (VSM)4
An optional MPX pressure transducer, BS4 73-0064, can be connected to the ventilation head. This pressure transducer attached to a TAM-A transducer amplifier,
BS4 73-0065, page I33, can be used to record tracheal/airway pressures. This
setup is described more thoroughly in the Einthoven Anti-asthmatics system, see
our website. All components must be purchased separately.
BS4 73-0048
792.00 Connecting Block for up to 8 Ventilation
Heads
BS4 73-0047
596.00 Ventilation Head Kit2
BS4 73-0500
140.00 Stand with Triangular Plate
HSE-HA Ventilation Sequencer Module (VSM)
The HSE-HA Ventilation Sequencer Module (VSM) consists of an electronic and a
pneumatic section and requires a compressed air supply. The VSM module with the
ventilation head operates on the principle of ‘intermittent constant flow ventilation’.
A continuously adjustable air flow is passed by a main valve either to the animal
(during inspiration) or to an overflow outlet (during expiration). The design of the
main valve provides an adjustable, pressure controlled, protection against excessive pressure rise in the animal’s lung. The main valve is controlled electronically
according to the selected respiration rate (RATE) and the selected inspiratory cycle
(INSP. CYCLE %). The safety pressure which is the maximum admitted inspiratory
pressure can be adjusted on the VSM module. The timing and the safety pressure
are the same for all the ventilation heads, the constant air flow during inspiration
can be adjusted individually on each ventilation head.
BS4 73-0064
387.00 MPX Pressure Transducer4
BS4 73-0065
946.00 TAM-A Amplifier Module4
BS4 73-0557
1
2
3
4
Physiology
The HSE-HA Multiple-Channel Ventilator is a modular system for ventilation of one
to eight large rodents. The respiratory rate is adjustable from 30 to 100 breaths per
minute. It is based on the PLUGSYS system, see Section I for a complete description of the PLUGSYS system. The primary component is the Ventilator Sequencer
Module (VSM) which plugs into a PLUGSYS mainframe case and is used to set the
respiratory rate, inspiratory:expiratory (I:E) ratio and the maximum inspiratory
pressure (i.e. safety pressure) for all animals. The safety pressure is set by the
researcher and is used to prevent over inflation of the animal’s lungs. The VSM
requires a compressed air supply and, using both electronic and pneumatic controls, directs the air flow to the VSM ventilation head.
Indication
27.00 Perspex X-Block3
Alternative case if pressure monitoring not used.
Kit includes ventilation head, stand and block clamp.
One required for each MPX transducer.
For more information on VSM, MPX Transducer or TAM-A, see Section I.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I57
PLUGSYS Controlling Modules
HSE-HA Programmable
Stimulator Module (PSM)
The Programmable Stimulator
Module PSM is a square-wave single-channel stimulator with isolated constant-current output for the
PLUGSYS system. It has been devel• Up to 8
oped specially for stimulating isochannels in one
main frame
lated tissue in physiological and
pharmacological research. The
• For applications
with tissue
stimulator is operated through
baths
software from a PC. All the settings
are performed through the control
program STIMULUS or through HSE-HA Software ACAD or
ISOHEART. The system features interactive operation, i.e. all
inputs are set at a special user level with window menus. The
instrument settings are stored inside the computer on disk or
hard disk and can at any time be loaded into the stimulator
module using the control program. With automated experimental setups the stimulator can be controlled from evaluation HSE-HA software. For example, in automatically evaluating the refractory period of an isolated guinea-pig atrium, each stimulation cycle is followed by recalculation of the interval between the first and
second stimulus of the twin stimulation, and the appropriate changes are
then made to the settings of the stimulator module. The unit cannot be
operated by itself; it requires at least the system components listed below.
•
Combination of
stimulator and
measurement
system in one
Note: In case of using more than one PSM in the basic system case, an additional power supply must be installed (option 5, 24 V DC, 100 VA).A maximum of 4 PSM modules can be
installed (power consumption 100 VA).
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specifications
Construction
Programmable Stimulator Module PSM designed as module of
HSE-HA PLUGSYS measuring system; occupies one slot unit
Hardware Required
Pentium computer, at least 500 MHz; HSE-HA PLUGSYS basic
system case, Type 603; HSE-HA data acquisition hardware,
PLUGSYS version; DIM-D Digital Bus Link for DIM
Software Required
Microsoft WINDOWS 2000/XP/NT; HSE-HA Stimulator Control
Program Stimulus; HSE-HA software ACAD, ISOHEART, NEURODYN or EPES with according Software module
Operating Modes
Free-running (continuous stimulation); Trains; hardware-triggered
through control signal; software-triggered through control command;
single or twin stimulation; output current polarity fixed or alternating
(automatic change-over after each stimulation cycle)
HSE-HA Programmable
Pulse Generator (PPG)
The PPG Programmable Pulse Generator
Module is a module
• Microprocessor controlled
of the HSE PLUGSYS
• All functions programmable via PLUGSYS I/O and
measurement system.
MS-WIN PC
In combination with a
• Complementary TTL
MS-Windows compulse output
patible computer,
Software Features:
additional I/O hard• Stimulation mode free run
ware and the PPG
or hardware triggered
control software, the
• Single pulse or train
module forms a prostimulation
grammable stimula• Stand alone system with
tion pulse generator
PPG control software
(repetition rate and
• Fully supported and
pulse width). The
controlled by HSE-HA
stimulus outputs are
Software.
TTL compatible and
have a minimum
drive capability of 4 standard TTL inputs. The complementary output offers
both active high and active low pulse signals. Therefore the PPG can direct
control e.g. up to four HSE UISO Universal Isolated Stimulator Outputs or
any external stimulator output stage with TTL gating or trigger possibility.
Hardware Features:
The PPG is connected to the A/D converter and controller board of the
computer via the DIM and its extension DIM-D. The DIM and the A/D
board are connected by the data cable. The DIM-Module is installed on the
rear side of the PLUGSYS mainframe, the A/D converter and controller
board is installed in the computer.
The software installed on the control computer presents a menu to adjust
the different stimulation parameters pulse width and frequency. These
parameters can be stored on disk for later use. The PPG control software
has to be recalled to make any changes in the stimulation parameters.
Specifications
Rise and fall time
200 nsec.
2 Stimulus TTL outputs (1 POS and 1 NEG),
BNC sockets on front panel
Basic Rhythm R
Continuously adjustable between 100 msec and 10 sec
Output
Delay D
Spacing between stimulus 1 and stimulus 2 adjustable between
1 msec and 1 sec, or 0 for no twin stimulation
Output Resistance
50 Ohm
Width W
Stimulus duration adjustable between 0.5 msec and 200 msec
Supply
5 V, 350 mA max from PLUGSYS system bus
Output O
Output can be programmed from 1 mA to 25 mA or from 10 mA
to 250 mA (manual change of current range)
Pulses
TTL compatible
Connector
DIN 41612 96-pin VG (PLUGSYS system bus)
PLUGSYS Width
1 slot unit (20,2 mm)
Ambient Conditions:
Operating Temperature
Humidity
Storage Temperature
0 to 40°C
20 to 80% relative humidity, no condensation
-20 to + 60°C
Power Supply
+ 5 V/700 mA and + 24 V/1 A through connector from PLUGSYS
system bus
Dimensions, H x W x D
128.7 x 20.2 x 220 mm (5.1 x 0.8 x 8.7 in)
PLUGSYS Width*
1 slot unit
Connector
DIN 41612, 96-pin VG
Weight
0.35 kg (0.8 lbs)
Catalog No.
$
Product
Catalog No.
$
Product
The following components are all required for this module.
BS4 73-0221
2,019.00 PSM Programmable Stimulator Module
BS4 73-3097
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE Data Acquisition Hardware, PLUGSYS Version
BS4 73-0161
599.00 PPG Programmable Pulse Generator Module
1,999.00 HSE Data Acquisition Hardware, PLUGSYS Version
BS4 73-0223
511.00 DIM-D PLUGSYS Digital Bus Link Module Amplifier
BS4 73-0223
511.00 DIM-D Digital Bus Link for DIM
BS4 73-3497
Call
BS4 73-3497
Call
BS4 73-0224
I58
NEW
Software “Stimulus” for PSM and PPG Control
1,102.00 Software Module to HSE-HA Software for PSM and
PPG Control
BS4 73-0224
Software “Stimulus” for PSM and PPG Control
1,102.00 Software Module to HSE-HA Software for PSM and
PPG Control
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Stand Alone Amplifiers
NEW
Laser Doppler Flowmeter BRL-100
Sensor
Plate Type (suitable for Skin, Organ Surface)
•
Small and light weight.
•
Multiple types of sensors are available.
•
Measuring range from small animals (i.e., mouse and rat) to
large animals.
•
Simple and easy to operate.
•
Flexibility in applications. (acute to chronic)
BP-8S Plate OD = 8mm, H = 0.7mm
Body OD = 4mm, H = 3mm
BP-8S
BP-8L Plate OD = 8mm, H = 0.7mm
Body OD = 4mm, H = 3mm
BP-8L
Disc Type (suitable for Brain Cortex, Organ Surface)
BD-6 Body OD = 6mm, H = 3mm
BD-6
Principles of Measurement
Straight Type (suitable for Brain Cortex, Organ
Surface, Spinal Marrow)
The laser light strikes the moving corpuscles in the blood and is
reflected back to a receiving sensor which measures the doppler shift
in the original signal. The laser light that strikes the tissue is absorbed
and no light is reflected back to the receiving sensor.
BS-24 Body OD = 2.4mm, H = 10mm
The BRL-100 is perfect for the monitoring of the blood circulation in
small animals
Since ordinary laser flow meters are basically designed and made for
human use, these flow meters exhibit several disadvantages when
used on small animals, such as: extremely large sensors, heavy optical fiber cables, and a fixed number of circuits for measuring the
human body not applicable to small animals.
The BRL-100 is an efficient design to reduce the cost and to simplify
the operation of the laser flow meter. Light optical fiber cables and
miniaturized sensors are utilized so that smaller animals may be
measured.
Needle Type (suitable for Brain, Muscle, Organ,
Spinal Marrow)
BN-11 Tip OD = 1.1mm, H = 6mm
Body OD = 2.4mm, H = 4mm
BN-11
BN-05 Tip OD = 0.5mm, H = 6mm
Body OD = 1.3mm, H = 5mm
BN-05
Catalog No.
Specifications
BS4 73-0748
Type of Laser
Semiconductor Laser 780 nm
Fiber
80 µm, GI, Quarts Fiber
Laser Output
1.5 nW (At the End of the Connector)
Gain
0–1000
CAL
100 mV
Indicator
4 digit, LED
Analog Output
1 mV Output/1 digit
Power Requirements
230 V or 120 V AC. 50/60Hz
Consumption
15 VA
Size, H x W x D
74 x 216 x 235 mm
Weight
4.18 lbs (1.9 kg)
$
Model
13,193.00 BRl-100
Physiology
The BRL-100 detects the heterodyne wave from some of the laser
light. It analyzes the light signal using the Stern method. It can calculate the flow parameters by looking at the amount of the blood flow.
BS-24
Product
Laser Doppler Flowmeter
BS4 73-1197
call
BP-8S
Plate Type Laser Doppler Flow
Probe
BS4 73-1198
call
BP-8L
Plate Type Laser Doppler Flow
Probe
BS4 73-1199
2,058.00 BD-6
Disk Type Laser Doppler Flow Probe
BS4 73-1200
2,058.00 BS-24
Stick Type Laser Doppler Flow Probe
BS4 73-1201
2,058.00 BN-11
Needle Type Laser Doppler Flow
Probe
BS4 73-1202
2,058.00 BN-05
Needle Type Laser Doppler Flow
Probe
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I59
Amplifiers & Preamplifiers
Amplifier Interfaces
•
Extremely versatile
•
Two models available:
— Modular for plugging directly
|into Modular Universal
Oscillographs, see page I66
— Freestanding for direct connection
to Data Acquisition Systems,
see pages I102 to I146, Student
Oscillograph or other recording
devices, see pages I65 to I70
Transducer Interface
The Modular Interface receives its power from the Modular Universal Oscillograph. The
Freestanding Interface is AC powered. This interface handles six transducer types using a sixposition switch, see page I66.
•
For ECG, EMG, ENG and EOG
•
High gain, low noise and drift
Transducer Types:
•
Step gain switch, x10, x50, x100,
x200, x500, x1000
•
AC/DC selector switch
•
DC level control
For force of muscle contraction, use with Harvard Apparatus Isometric Force
Transducers, see page I8. Two series of isometric transducers are available in various load forces, see Harvard Apparatus Isometric Transducers and UF1 Series
Isometric Transducers.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Isometric
I60
AC/DC Preamplifier Interface
Isotonic
For isotonic muscle contractions, use with BS4 50-6360 Harvard Apparatus Isotonic
Transducer, see page I8. Pivoting beam of Isotonic Transducer gives electrical output proportional to angular rotation.
Pressure
For direct blood pressure, use with the Blood Pressure Transducer, see Cardiovascular
Section J. Blood Pressure Transducer features removable transparent dome, two Luer
fittings, minimum volume and displacement and range of ±300 mmHg. For indirect
blood pressure, use with BS4 50-4472 Armcuff with Microphone.
Pneumograph
For human respiratory waveform, use with BS4 50-8028 Pneumograph with
Transducer. Pneumograph consists of a corrugated bellow that straps around chest and
pressure transducer that transforms chest excursion into voltage suitable for recording.
Plethysmograph
For human arterial pulse, use with BS4 50-8093 Finger Plethysmograph.
Plethysmograph is practical finger transducer that responds to blood density changes
produced by peripheral pulse.
Potentiometric
In this mode, Transducer Interface responds to changing resistance from potentiometer, as found in BS4 50-1676 Student Spirometer, see page F52. Front panel
DC level control permits compensation of DC component of input signal. 7-pin DIN
female input connector is also located on front panel of Transducer Interface and
allows connection of variety of transducers.
This is a general purpose differential
Preamplifier for animal use only. There is a 6position gain switch (x10, x50, x100, x200,
x500 and x1000), an input selector for AC or
DC coupled, a filter selector (3 dB at 15 Hz,
150 Hz and 15 kHz) and a DC level control
giving a maximum offset range of ±4 volts.
Common mode rejection is greater than 80
dB and the maximum gain when used with a
Harvard Apparatus Oscillograph is 30 µV/cm
of pen deflection. The input impedance is 4.7
MΩ. Input is via a 7-pin binder socket and
output via edge connector into the Universal
Oscillograph or Interface Adapter.
Catalog No.
$
Product*
BS4 50-8879
581.00 AC/DC Preamplifier
Interface
BS4 50-9836
751.00 3-Lead Surface
Electrode Set
Specifications
BS4 50-9802
339.00 3-Lead Animal
Electrodes
Dimensions, H x W x D:
Modular
50 x 120 x 120 mm (2 x 4.75 x 4.75 in), approx.
Freestanding
95 x 165 x 138 mm (3.75 x 6.5 x 5.25 in)
BS4 50-7954
Freestanding Weight
Catalog No.
BS4 50-8861
750 g (1.7 lb)
$
Product
702.00 Modular
BS4 50-7970
881.00 Freestanding, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
BS4 50-7996
961.00 Freestanding, 230 VAC, 50 Hz
BS4 50-9158
18.00 Replacement 7-Pin Female Input Connector for Front Panel
BS4 50-9141
25.00 7-Pin Male Connector for Mating with Front Panel Female Connector
BS4 50-9166
20.00 7-Pin Female In-Line Connector for Use in Making Extension Sets
12.00 Male 3-Pin DIN Input
Connector
* For Biopotential Leads and Electrodes, see pages I71
to I77.
Amplifier Modules on pages
I60 to I62 are designed to
interface
with
Harvard
Apparatus’s Amplifier Case, see
page I69, Chart Recorders, see
pages I65 to I70 and the
CEPTU physiology system, see
pages I65 and I64.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Amplifiers & Preamplifiers
Amplifier Interfaces
BS4 50-8960
BS4 50-8895
Thermistor Interface
Cardiotach Interface
When used with a Harvard Apparatus thermistor or YSI series 400 Thermistor, temperature is displayed on the LCD and produced
as a DC level proportional to temperature
from the linear range when used with the
above mentioned thermistors is 30° to 50°C.
Input is via a standard phone socket and output via edge connector into the Universal
Oscillograph or Interface Adapter.
The Cardiotach counts repetitive events such
as ECG or blood pressure wave forms and
gives a DC level output proportional to rate
in beats per minute. Counting is done on a
beat-to-beat basis. Input is taken from the
‘monitor’ socket on the Harvard Apparatus
Universal Oscillograph, via a BNC lead which
is supplied. There are tow ranges: 17 to 250
bpm and 17 to 500 bpm. A ‘Trig Level’ control
sets the threshold level for counting, and there
is an ‘Under Range’ indicator to warn that no
wave forms are being counted. The top panel
output gives 1 volt per 100 bpm for use with
the BS4 50-8960 Harvard Cardiotach Display.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-8903
541.00 Thermistor Interface
BS4 50-9133
410.00 General Purpose
Temperature Probe
BS4 59-9808
106.00 Rectal Probe
YSI 400
Any YSI 400 series
Thermistor Probes, see
pages P28 and P29
Catalog No.
BS4 50-8895
$
Product
791.00 Cardiotach Interface
The following Harvard
Apparatus
Freestanding
Preamplifiers are offered for
use with the Harvard
Student Oscillograph, flat
bed recorders and computer
interfaces.
Freestanding Transducer
Amplifiers
This is to give power to and amplify signals
from the Harvard Apparatus range of transducers (Isotonic, Isometric, Pressure,
Plethysmograph and Potentiometric chosen
by 6-position selector switch). This is an
Isometric Filter to reduce the effort of gas
bubbles vibrating the preparation and a DC
Level Control for balancing transducers to
base line. Input is via a 7-pin binder socket
and the output is via a BNC lead. It measures
95 x 165 mm (3.75 x 6.5 x 6.3 in) and
weighs 0.75 kg. (1.65 lb). See page I60 for
complete details.
Catalog No.
$
Product
881.00 Freestanding
Transducer Amplifier,
115 VAC, 60 Hz
BS4 50-7996
961.00 Freestanding
Transducer Amplifier,
230 VAC, 50 Hz
Cardiotach Display
Solely for use with the BS4 50-8895
Cardiotach Interface. This Display fits into the
top right hand corner of the Harvard
Apparatus Universal Oscillograph and
receives its power and signal form the
Cardiotach Interface via the a cable supplied.
Beats per minute are displayed on the LCD.
Isolator Interface
Catalog No.
The sole purpose of this interface is to allow
connection of the Harvard Apparatus range of
Isolated Preamplifiers to the Universal
Oscillograph or Interface Adapter. The On/Off
control is used to connect the battery power
in the Isolated Preamplifier.
BS4 50-8960
Catalog No.
BS4 50-5966
$
Product
$
Physiology
BS4 50-7970
Product
393.00 Cardiotach Display
Basic Audio Amplifier
A general purpose AC coupled amplifier with
a selectable modulation facility. Input is via
two 4 mm tie posts/sockets. It is battery powered and has a level indicator. It measures 95
x 165 mm (3.75 x 6.5 x 6.3 in) and weighs
0.6 kg. (1.32 lb).
404.00 Isolator Interface
Catalog No.
BS4 50-5172
$
Product
616.00 Basic Audio Amplifier
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I61
Amplifiers & Preamplifiers
Transducer Amplifier Interface
Isolated GSR Preamplifier
•
For GSR on human subjects for
teaching purposes only
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
The front end of the preamplifier is battery
powered (2 x 9 volt transistor radio
batteries) while the back end receives its
power from the host unit. A meter shows
battery state and the batteries are connected
only when linked to the host unit. There are
3 ranges (0 to 10 kΩ, 0 to 100 kΩ and 0 to
1 MΩ) and DC level control, built in audio
speaker with modulation facility and a
normal/differential switch. The maximum
sensitivity is 50Ω/cm of pen deflection when
used with the Harvard Apparatus oscillographs. It is supplied with the BS4 50-9521
GSR Finger Electrode Set.
The BS4 50-5966 Isolator Interface is
needed to connect this unit to a Universal
Oscillograph or Interface Adapter, or it plugs
directly into the Harvard Apparatus Student
Oscillographs.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-9505
BS4 50-7954
BS4 50-9810
$
Product
825.00 Isolated GSR
Preamplifier
12.00 Male 3-Pin DIN
Input Connector
339.00 GSR Palm Disposable
Electrode Set, see
page I72; use as an
alternative to the BS4
50-9521 2-Lead Input
Cable with Finger
Electrodes which is
included with the
Amplifier
Isolated Preamplifier
•
For ECG, EMG, ENG, EOG on human
subject for teach purposes only
The front end of the Preamplifier is battery
powered (2 x 9 volt transistor radio batteries) while the back end receives its power
from the host unit. A meter shows battery
state and the batteries are connected only
when linked to the host unit. The input is via
either the 3-pin binder socket or the row of
five standard color coded 2 mm sockets
(labeled LA, RA, LL, RL and C) for 5 electrode ECG measurements. A 7-position ‘limb’
selector allows connection of the standard
ECG electrode configurations.
There is a 3-position gain switch (x10, x100
and x1000), an input selector for AC or DC
coupled, a filter selector (3 dB down at 30
Hz, 150 Hz and 15 kHz) and a DC level
control. Maximum gain when used with a
Harvard Apparatus Oscillograph is 30 µV/cm
of pen deflection. A comprehensive range of
electrodes and input leads is available.
AC/DC Preamplifier
This is a general purpose differential
preamplifier for use on animals. It is powered
by two 9 volt batteries (not supplied ) and has
a battery meter. Input is via a 3-pin binder
socket and there is a two position gain
control (x10 and x100 for DC coupled; x100
and x1000 for AC coupling ). LF out (3 db
down at 1, 5, 10, and 100 msec and 1 sec )
and HF out (3 db down at 40 Hz, 100 Hz, 1
kHz, 10 kHz and 40 kHz ) are selectable by
two controls. Input impedance is 4.7 MΩ and
the output is from a BNC connector. It measures 95 x 165 mm (3.75 x 6.5 x 6.3 in) and
weighs 0.75 kg. (1.65 lb).
Catalog No.
BS4 50-5131
The BS4 50-5966 Isolator Interface is
needed to connect this unit to a Harvard
Apparatus Universal Oscillograph or
Interface Adapter. The Isolated Preamplifier
will plug directly into the Harvard Apparatus
Student Oscillographs, see page I68.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-9513
$
Product
1,246.00 Isolated Preamplifier
* For Biopotential Leads and Electrodes, see pages I71
to I77.
The Amplifier Modules on pages I60 to I62 are designed to interface
with Harvard Apparatus’s Amplifier Case, see page I69,
Chart Recorders, see pages I65 to I70
and the CEPTU physiology system, see pages I65 and I64.
I62
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
$
Product
760.00 AC/DC Preamplifier
Amplifiers & Preamplifiers
Complete Electrophysiology Teaching Unit
• Electrocardiograms
• Electromyograms
• Simple electroencephalograms
• Other bioelectrical measurements
The Electrophysiological Teaching Unit is for investigating, displaying,
and analyzing most bioelectrical phenomena of importance to nervemuscle studies including:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Stimulus-reaction times
Reflexes
Nerve transmission speed
Nerve mapping
Nerve-muscle preparation
Neurological reflex
The Electrophysiology Teaching Unit has the following integral
components:
•
•
•
•
2-Channel Oscilloscope
2-Channel Stimulator
Audio Amplifier switchable between channels
Transducer Interface (same as BS4 50-8861 Transducer
Interface, see page I60)
• 2 preamplifier inputs for connection of two BS4 50-9513
Isolated AC/DC Preamplifiers supplied
A comprehensive range of accessories are also supplied including all
leads and connectors necessary for most needs and a practical handbook
that gives students a firm foundation in basic electrophysiology, see facing page. The inputs are totally isolated electrically from the outputs.
Physiology
Harvard’s Electrophysiological Teaching Unit enables students to
grasp the essentials of complex electrophysiological control functions including:
The Oscilloscope has a 12.7 cm (5 in) dual-trace CRT with a 10 x
8 cm (4 x 3.1 in) display. The 2-Channel Stimulator is well-suited for
both teaching and research applications. The two channels share the
same pulse generator but each channel has independent controls for
delay, pulse width and voltage. Each channel can be used independently or the outputs can be combined to produce stepped waveforms.
The Stimulator includes a sync output for the oscilloscope and trigger
inputs for remote triggering of the Stimulator.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I63
Amplifiers & Preamplifiers
Complete Electrophysiology Teaching Unit
The two BS4 50-9513 Isolated AC/DC Preamplifiers, see page I62 for
full details, are connected externally to the Electrophysiological
Teaching Unit, enabling measurements such as vector cardiography. In
addition, for certain experiments, two students can use the equipment
at one time. The high gain, low noise and high common mode rejection make these Preamplifiers suitable for applications at the microvolt level, which is within the range of nerve and muscle potentials,
ECG, EMG and EEG signals. The Preamplifiers are optically-isolated
and battery-powered for maximum safety.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-8267
12,000.00 Complete Electrophysiological Teaching Unit, 230 VAC,
50 Hz
Individual Components Included with Electrophysiological Teaching Unit
BS4 50-9513
1,246.00 Isolated AC/DC Preamplifiers, pkg. of 2
473.00 Isotonic Transducer
BS4 50-7905
690.00 Harvard Apparatus Isometric Transducer, 0 to 50 g
Force Range
BS4 50-8275
317.00 Harvard Apparatus Stimulus Isolation Unit with
Positive Output Pulses
BS4 50-5271
405.00 Patella Hammer
BS4 50-5305
156.00 Stimulating Electrode with Round 1 cm (0.4 in) D Tip
for Stimulating with Voltages up to 100 V
BS4 50-7004
198.00 Screened Electrode
BS4 50-7020
391.00 Nerve Conduction Chamber
Specifications
BS4 50-9539
197.00 Plate Electrodes and Straps, pkg. of 4
Oscilloscope:
BS4 59-8438
The Transducer Interface has suitable bridge and amplifier circuits for
use with Harvard Apparatus’s complete range of transducers, see right.
A multi-turn potentiometer can be used to adjust the DC level. A mode
selection switch matches the input to the appropriate transducer.
Vertical Deflection
5 mV/div to 20 V/div
Time Base
0.5 µsec/div to 0.2 sec/div
Input Impedance
1 MΩ // 30 pF
Input Coupling
45.00 Disposable Foam Electrodes, 48 mm (1.9 in), pkg. of
50
BS4 50-9265
100.00 Nondisposable Ag/AgCl Cup Electrodes, pkg of 3
Electrodes, 2 pkgs. Supplied
AC/DC
BS4 50-9273
49.00 Small Double-Sided Adhesive Discs to Hold NonDisposable Ag/AgCl Cup Electrodes, Roll of 100
0.1 to 1000 Hz
BS4 50-5313
29.00 Electrode Gel
Delay
0.1 to 1000 msec
BS4 50-8309
10.00 Syringe with Blunt Needle
Width
0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1, 2, or 5 msec
BS4 50-5321
17.00 Electrode Adhesive Tape
Voltage
0.25 to 25 V in 3 ranges
BS4 50-9570
Output Impedance
22 Ω
99.00 4 mm Socket to Snap Fastener (Press Stud)
Connector, pkg. of 5
Triggers
Oscilloscope and external
BS4 50-9547
99.00 3-Lead Input Cable, 3-Pin DIN to Three 1 mm Plugs
BS4 50-9562
90.00 ECG Limb Cables, 2 mm Plugs to 4 mm Plugs,
Color-Coded, pkg. of 5
BS4 50-7954
12.00 Male 3-Pin DIN Input Connector, pkg. of 2
BS4 50-9232
37.00 BNC to BNC Output Leads, pkg. of 5
Stimulator:
Frequency
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Product
12,000.00 Complete Electrophysiological Teaching Unit, 115
VAC, 60 Hz
BS4 50-6360
The Audio Amplifier can be used to monitor the twin Preamplifiers’
signal. The controls on the front panel select the modulation facility
and the channel to be monitored.
I64
$
BS4 50-8259
Isolated AC/DC Preamplifier:
Input
Differential, isolated
Output
Single-ended
Common Mode
Rejection
> 70 dB
Transducer Interface of this Teaching Unit is For Use With:
Gain
x10, x100, x1000
BS4 50-6360
HF Filters
30 Hz, 150 Hz, 15 kHz
Harvard Apparatus Isometric Transducers, see page I8
Coupling
AC/DC
BS4 50-7905
690.00 0 to 50 g
Input Configuration
Simple three-lead differential or clinical with modes I, II, III,
AVR, AVL, AVF, V
BS4 50-7913
690.00 0 to 100 g
BS4 50-7921
690.00 0 to 200 g
Audio Amplifier:
473.00 Harvard Apparatus Isotonic Transducer, see page I8
BS4 50-7939
690.00 0 to 500 g
External Loudspeaker Load 4 Ω
BS4 50-7947
690.00 0 to 1000 g
Dimensions, H x W x D
43 x 53 x 33 cm (17 x 21 x 13 in)
UF1 Series Isometric Transducers, see page I7
Weight
22 kg (48 lb)
BS4 50-7293
1,016.00 0 to 25 g
BS4 50-8036
939.00 0 to 55 g
BS4 50-8044
939.00 0 to 110 g
BS4 50-8051
939.00 0 to 220 g
BS4 50-8069
939.00 0 to 450 g
BS4 50-8077
939.00 0 to 900 g
BS4 50-8093
289.00 Finger Plethysmograph
BS4 50-8028
770.00 Pneumograph with Transducer
Power Output
0.1 W, max.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Recorders
Flatbed Recorders
•
15 voltage ranges 1 mV to 50 V
•
Single chip hybrid technology
•
16 chart speeds 0.1 to 20 mm/sec/min
•
Manual and electric paper advance/rewind
•
Optional monitor input signal, counter voltage, temperature
controller types
Specifications
This series of laboratory strip chart recorders have been updated with the
latest in mechanical and electrical design. Mechanical features include on
board pen storage holders to extend the life of the pens, exposed feed
paper for easy monitoring and loading. Electrical features include single
chip hybrid technology, easy access calibration ports, easy push button
design. Both the economy and deluxe series are available in three different chart sizes: 120 mm, 200 mm, 250 mm Common features on both
series include; individual electric pen lift, mV and Volt ranges, 16-speed
chart drive, fiber tip disposable pens, and a manual chart position knob.
The deluxe series offers these additional features: external chart drive control, chart paper repeat function, chart advance to next grid, forward
reverse recording, and 5 – 1000 mA recording ranges.
Flatbed Recorders
Number of Channels
1 or 2
Chart Width
120, 200 or 250 mm
Input Ranges:
Economy
Deluxe
1, 2, 6, 10, 20, 60, 100, 200 mV
0, 5, 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 25, 50 V
1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 mV
0.5, 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 25, 50 V
5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 250, 500, 1000 mA
Zero Setting
Chart width plus 200% suppression
Accuracy:
Economy
Deluxe
0.5%
±0.35% or ±10 µV
Linearity:
Economy
Deluxe
±0.35%
±0.25%
Full Scale Deflection Time
> 0.12, > 0.18 or > 0.2 sec
lnput Impedance:
DC mV Ranges
DC V Ranges
DC mA Ranges*
> 30 MΩ
2 MΩ
<1Ω
Deluxe
Chart Width
1-Channel 2-Channel
1-Channel 2-Channel
120
$
BS4 72-2982 BS4 72-2985
1,447.00
2,048.00
BS4 72-2988 BS4 72-2991
1,853.00
2,382.00
Source Impedance:
Economy
Deluxe
< 6 KΩ
5 KΩ
200
$
BS4 72-2983 BS4 72-2986
BS4 72-2989 BS4 72-2992
Overload Protection
Electronic
Range Expansion
Continuously adjustable up to 250% of selected range
Cut-Off Frequency
> 3.6 Hz sine wave / -3 dB
CMRR
> 130 dB
Counter Voltage*
±100, 200, 300 and 400%
Pen-Lift
Separate for each channel
Monitor Output Signal
0 to 1 V
Chart Speeds
0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20 mm/s and mm/min
Resolution:
Economy
Deluxe
0.08 mm
0.05 mm
250
$
BS4 72-2984 BS4 72-2987
2,167.00
2,648.00
BS4 72-2990 BS4 72-2993
2,249.00
2,911.00
Catalog No.
$
Description
BS4 72-7678
26.00 Ink Set for Flatbed Recorder, Blue, includes Filling
Syringe and 30 cc Ink
BS4 72-3533
26.00 Ink Set for Flatbed Recorder, Green, includes
Filling Syringe and 30 cc Ink
BS4 72-3534
26.00 Ink Set for Flatbed Recorder, Red, includes Filling
Syringe and 30 cc Ink
Operating Conditions
10° to 40°C
Humidity Range
< 80% relative humidity
BS4 72-3535
26.00 Ink Set for Flatbed Recorder, Black, includes Filling
Syringe and 30 cc Ink
Safety
Protection class 1, built according to VDE 0411, EMV
according to DIN/VDE O843/IEC
BS4 72-7679
34.00 Repl. Pens for Flatbed Recorder, Blue, pkg. of 5
FCC Rating
VDE O871 class B
34.00 Repl. Pens Pens for Flatbed Recorder, Green,
pkg. of 5
Power Supply
115/230 V, 50/60 Hz, user selectable
Dimensions, W x D x H:
L120
L200
L250
261 x 350 x 127 mm (10.3 x 13.8 x 5 in)
340 x 350 x 127 mm (13.4 x 13.8 x 5 in)
390 x 350 x 127 mm (15.4 x 13.8 x 5 in)
BS4 72-3528
BS4 72-3529
34.00 Repl. Pens for Flatbed Recorder, Red, pkg. of 5
BS4 72-3530
34.00 Repl. Pens or Flatbed Recorder, Black, pkg. of 5
BS4 72-2994
109.00 Replacement Paper, 120 mm, 16 M L, pkg. of 10
Weight
Approx. 3 kg
BS4 72-2995
120.00 Replacement Paper, 200 mm, 16 M L, pkg. of 10
Options*
BS4 72-2996
124.00 Replacement Paper, 250 mm, 16 M L, pkg. of 10
Linearized temp. input for 4 temp. controllers and Pt100
time offset compensation
BS4 72-2997
155.00 Replacement Paper, 250 mm, 25 M L, pkg. of 10
Physiology
Economy
* Deluxe models only.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I65
Recorders
Modular Universal Oscillographs
BS4 50-9315 4-Channel Modular
Universal Oscillograph
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 50-8630 2-Channel Modular
Universal Oscillograph
•
Curvilinear or rectilinear recording
•
Available in two sizes:
— 2 channels for one or two writing channels
— 4 channels for one, two, three or four writing channels
•
For use with Harvard Apparatus Amplifier Interfaces, see
pages I60 to I62, which plug in directly to the oscillograph
•
Accept inputs from freestanding amplifiers or transducers
via BNC connector (For Harvard Apparatus Research Grade
Blood Pressure Transducer, see page J2, for Isotonic and
Isometric Transducers, see pages I2 to I8)
•
Output via BNC connectors for use with data acquisition
systems, see pages I80 to I146, while simultaneously
recording
•
Modular, compact systems
•
Ten chart speeds from a fast 100 mm/sec to a slow
0.1 mm/sec (100, 50, 25, 10, 5, 2.5, 1, 0.5, 0.25
and 0.1 mm/sec)
•
Built-in event channel
•
‘Monitor’ socket on pen amplifier for amplified signal
output to BS4 50-8895 Cardiotach Interface,
see page I61, FM tape recorder, A/D converter, etc.
•
Pen amplifiers and pens with disposable ink cartridges
in 4 colors: black, blue, red and green
•
Built-in, crystal-controlled, adjustable time channel
of 1, 5, 10, 30 and 60/min
•
Removable panels for interface units and meters
•
Pen lifter bar
•
Plastic pen guard
These oscillographs are designed around a pen amplifier module
which contains the circuits to power the pen and operate the various
amplifier interface modules on the following pages. The oscillographs
are supplied with 2 or 4 factory-installed pen amplifier modules with
either curvilinear or rectilinear writing.
Each pen amplifier has an input toggle switch which is used to select
‘Direct’, ‘Interface’ or ‘Off’.
When on ‘Direct’, the input is taken from the ‘Direct Input’ BNC socket
which connects to self-powered transducers such as the Harvard
Apparatus Research Grade Blood Pressure Transducer, see page J2, the
Harvard Apparatus Research Grade Isotonic Transducers, see page I3
and the Harvard Apparatus Research Grade Isometric Transducers, see
page I2, or Freestanding Amplifiers, pages I60 to I62.
When on ‘Interface’, the pen amplifier input is from the plug-in Amplifier
Interface, see following pages, located next to the pen amplifier.
‘Off’ is selected when the amplifier is not in use.
To use the amplifier, the input is selected and a selector switch is set
to either AC or DC depending on the type of signal to be recorded. With
the switch in the ‘Off’ position, the pen is then set by turning the ‘Pen
Zero’ knob either to the center of the chart (for ECG measurements)
or to the bottom of its swing (for isotonic, isometric and blood pressure measurements). ‘Direct’ or ‘Interface’ is next selected and the
Gain is increased until the pen starts moving. If necessary, the pen
position can be further adjusted using the DC level control on the
Interface Adapter.A calibration switch provides a 0.1 volt signal. Each
pen amplifier has a ‘Monitor’ (analog) output BNC socket.
An ‘Event’ button supplied with the Oscillograph is useful for noting
the occurrence of drug additions, etc. When the ‘Event’ button is
momentarily pressed and then released, a ‘tick’ is marked on the chart
paper. When the ‘Event’ button is pressed for a longer period, the output signal is held constant at either the high or low side of its range.
These oscillographs are for use with Harvard Apparatus’s amplifier
interfaces for processing signals from transducers, electrodes, sensors, thermistors, etc. Each Interface is tailored to convert its unique
input into a voltage suitable for the pen amplifier of the Modular
Universal Oscillograph. These interface modules are easily inserted,
removed or exchanged.
These modular oscillographs are supplied complete with dust cover,
one black ink cartridge per channel, one roll of paper, remote event
push-button and operating instructions.
I66
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Recorders
Modular Universal Oscillographs
BNC connector for remote
monitoring on oscilloscope
or computer, ±3 V maximum
Electronically
positions pen
Adjusts pen
amplitude
Inverts
write-out
Momentary switch
provides 0.1 V
calibration signal
BNC connector for signal
input from auxiliary units such
as Harvard Apparatus
Research Grade Transducers
Selector switch permits Three position switch to
recording of AC or DC
select either direct input,
signals
interface unit or off
Modular Universal Oscillograph
Oscillographic Recording Applications
Curvilinear Recording
•
•
•
Higher frequency response (70 Hz); greater trace width
Waveforms are commensurate with a curved trace
More suitable for teaching and demonstrations
Rectilinear Recording
•
Pen Amplifier Module:
Maximum Gain
Input Impedance
Frequency Response:
Curvilinear
Rectilinear
30 mV/cm
> 100 KΩ
(Single Ended)
DC to 70 Hz ±3 dB
DC to 40 Hz ±3 dB
Trace Width:
Curvilinear
Rectilinear
5 cm (2 in)
4 cm (1.6 in)
Dimensions, H x W x D:
2-Channel Recorders
4-Channel Recorders
195 x 508 x 205 mm (7-1/3 x 20 x 8 in)
195 x 508 x 305 mm (7-1/3 x 20 x 12 in)
Weight:
2-Channel Recorders
4-Channel Recorders
10 kg (22 lb)
14.5 kg (32 lb)
230 VAC,
50 Hz
$
Curvilinear
2-Channel
BS4 50-8630
4-Channel
BS4 50-9315
8,173.00
BS4 50-9307
BS4 50-8622
8,173.00
2-Channel
BS4 50-8655
5,673.00
BS4 50-8648
5,673.00
4-Channel
BS4 50-9331
Rectilinear
Catalog No.
Specifications
$
$
BS4 50-9323
Product
BS4 50-8978
1,130.00 Pen Amplifier Module for Curvilinear Oscillograph
BS4 50-8986
1,223.00 Pen Amplifier Module for Rectilinear Oscillograph
BS4 50-9091
78.00 Replacement Pen for Curvilinear Oscillograph
BS4 50-9083
78.00 Replacement Pen for Rectilinear Oscillograph
BS4 50-9018
Physiology
•
•
Produces straight-line, pen tip travel that is easy to calibrate and measure
Reduced frequency response; (40 Hz) and pen travel
More suitable for analytical-type recordings, such as ECG
Power
115 VAC,
Recording Method 60 Hz
9.00 Black Ink Cartridge
BS4 50-9174
7.00 Blue Ink Cartridge
BS4 50-9182
11.00 Red Ink Cartridge
BS4 50-9190
11.00 Green Ink Cartridge
BS4 50-9034
49.00 Paper, 91 m (300 ft) for 2-Channel, Curvilinear
Oscillograph
BS4 50-9026
39.00 Paper, 91 m (300 ft) for 2-Channel, Rectilinear
Oscillograph
BS4 50-9372
78.00 Paper, 91 m (300 ft) for 4-Channel, Curvilinear
Oscillograph
BS4 50-9364
78.00 Paper, 91 m (300 ft) for 4-Channel, Rectilinear
Oscillograph
For a complete description and specifications
of amplifier modules for these recorders,
see pages I60 to I62.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I67
Recorders
Student Oscillographs
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
•
This versatile, compact, 2-Channel
Student Oscillograph is available
with curvilinear or rectilinear
recording and features. Unlike the
Modular Universal Oscillograph,
see preceding pages, which supplies power to operate its amplifier interfaces, the Student Oscillograph requires freestanding AC
or battery operated amplifiers or
transducers.
Eight crystal-controlled
chart speeds from 25
mm/sec down to 0.1
mm/sec
•
Built-in event marker
•
AC or DC switched input
•
Pen amplifier gain
control; pen zero control
•
Gain calibration switch
•
Versatile
The Student Oscillograph furnishes power to the freestanding BS4 50-9513 Isolated AC/DC
Preamplifier and BS4 50-9505 Isolated GSR Amplifier, see page I62.
All other amplifiers must be self-powered. This oscillograph is supplied with chart paper, ink cartridges, pens and a plastic dust cover.
Sensitivity
30 mV/cm
Maximum Direct Input
10 V
Chart Speeds
Frequency Response:
Curvilinear
Rectilinear
0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5, 10, and 25 mm/sec
BS4 50-8150
3,550.00 Student Oscillograph, Curvilinear, 230 VAC, 50 Hz
BS4 50-8184
3,287.00 Student Oscillograph, Rectilinear, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
BS4 50-8176
3,287.00 Student Oscillograph, Rectilinear, 230 VAC, 50 Hz
Amplifiers and Transducers for Use With Student Oscillograph
BS4 50-9513
1,246.00 Isolated AC/DC Preamplifier for all biological signals,
ECG, EEG, EMG, including lead selector, see page
I62 For appropriate Electrodes, see pages I71 to I74
BS4 50-9505
825.00 Isolated GSR Amplifier for human demonstration,
see page I62
BS4 50-7970
881.00 Freestanding Transducer Interface, see page I60, for
interfacing with all Harvard Apparatus Isometric and
Isotonic Transducers, see pages I2 to I8
BS4 50-5131
760.00 Battery-Powered AC/DC Preamplifier for animal use,
see page I62
723.00 Battery-Powered Isotonic Transducer, see page I8
1,850.00 Student Spirometer, see page F52
DC to 70 Hz ±3 dB
DC to 25 Hz ±3 dB
Trace Width:
Curvilinear
Rectilinear
45 mm (1.75 in)
37 mm (1.5 in)
Input Connectors
7-pin DIN and BNC connectors
Chart Paper, L x W
100 m x 127 mm (328 ft x 5 in) (available in curvilinear or rectilinear)
Weight
Product
3,550.00 Student Oscillograph, Curvilinear, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
BS4 50-1676
Specifications
$
BS4 50-8168
BS4 50-6378
Dimensions, H x W x D 150 x 410 x 210 mm (6 x 16 x 8 in)
I68
Catalog No.
6 kg (13.2 lb)
Harvard Apparatus has nitric oxide
sensors that have 100 times the sensitivity of any existing nitric oxide sensors. See pages M2 to M4 in the Cell
Biology Section of this catalog for complete details.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Recorders
1- and 4-Channel Interface Adapter
BS4 50-4028 4-Channel
Interface Adapter with
Signal Conditioning
BS4 50-4027 4-Channel
Interface Adapter without
Signal Conditioning
These Adapters have integral power supplies and allow up to four Harvard
Apparatus Modular Amplifier Interfaces to be used directly with computer data acquisition systems, see pages I80 to I146, or other recording
devices.
The various amplifiers and accessories that can be used with these
Adapters are as follows:
Three Interface Adapters are available:
BS4 50-8861
702.00 Transducer Interface, see page I60, for interfacing
with Isotonic, Isometric, and Blood Pressure
Transducers, Pneumograph with Transducer, and
Finger Plethysmograph
BS4 50-8879
581.00 AC/DC Preamplifier Interface, see page I60, for ECG
and EMG; Electrodes are Available as Accessories
BS4 50-8903
541.00 Thermistor Interface, see page I61; Assorted
Temperature Probes are Available as Accessories,
see pages D16 to D29
Interface Adapters
Catalog No.
Interface Adapter
Dimensions, H x W x D
Weight
BS4 50-4028
$ 3,402.00
4-Channel With
Signal Conditioning
27.3 x 31.8 x 19.1 cm
(10-3/4 x 12-1/2 x 7-1/2 in)
5.4 kg
(12 lb)
BS4 50-4027
$
4-Channel Without
Signal Conditioning
27.3 x 17.1 x 19.1 cm
(10-3/4 x 6-3/4 x 7-1/2 in)
3.2 kg
(7 lb)
BS4 50-9620
1-Channel Without
Signal Conditioning,
115 VAC, 60 Hz
6.5 x 13.2 x 20 cm
(2.6 x 5.2 x 7.9 in)
1.25 kg
(2.8 lb)
1-Channel Without
Signal Conditioning,
230 VAC, 50 Hz
6.5 x 13.2 x 20 cm
(2.6 x 5.2 x 7.9 in)
1.25 kg
(2.8 lb)
$
486.00
BS4 50-9638
$
BS4 50-8895
$
Amplifier Interfaces*
791.00 Cardiotach Interface, see page I61
BS4 50-9513
1,246.00 Isolated AC/DC Preamplifier, see page I62;
Electrodes are Available as Accessories
BS4 50-9505
825.00 Isolated GSR Amplifier with 2-Lead Finger
Electrodes, see page I62
BS4 50-5966
404.00 Isolator Interface, see page I61, for Interfacing
BS4 50-9505 Isolated GSR Amplifier and BS4 509513 Isolated AC/DC Preamplifier with the Modular
Universal Oscillograph, see pages I66 and I67, and
these One and Four-Channel Amplifiers
Physiology
• The 4-Channel Interface Adapter with Signal Conditioning
provides amplification and signal conditioning resulting in
outputs ranging from 0 to ±5 volts. Rotary control knobs
are used to adjust the gain and offset and toggle switches
to choose between positive or negative polarity, AC or DC
amplification and a calibration signal of 0.1 volts
• The 4-Channel Interface Adapter without Signal Conditioning
delivers analog signals in the 1 volt range via four BNC output
connectors
• The 1-Channel Interface Adapter without Signal Conditioning
delivers analog signals in the 1 volt range via four BNC output
connectors
The same amplifiers and accessories that are used with the Modular
Universal Oscillographs, see listing to right, can now be powered by
these Interface Adapters. Power required is 115/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
These Adapters are supplied with one BNC to BNC cable per channel.
Catalog No.
* For a complete description and specifications of these amplifier modules, see pages
I60 to I62.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I69
Recorders
Harvard Apparatus TR2 Chart Recorder
Output Signal
In addition to providing a printed trace, the Recorder has 2 direct signal
output sockets. These sockets permit the signal to be transferred to a data
acquisition system or oscilloscope. The maximum output signal is ±1 volt.
Simple Controls and Displays
The clear 2 line alpha numeric display is easy to read and provides detailed
information. Simple LED indicators are provided for Power, Run/Stop, Set,
Paper, Marker Channel, and Direct/Indirect Input. With the display, these
LEDs provide information at a glance. Other parameters are set by simple
push button controls. Only the offset control is via simple knobs.
Specifications
•
•
•
Ideal for recording
physiological signals
2 independent recording
channels
2 event marker channels
•
Accepts either direct or
indirect input signals
•
Clear and easy to read
traces
2 Independent
Recording Channels
This Recorder has two independent channels that will accept an
input signal from BS4 40-2010 and
BS4 40-2020 Signal Conditioners or directly from other devices such as
our Research Grade Blood Pressure, Isometric, and Isotonic Transducers,
see pages J2, I2, and I3). A simple push button control permits selection
of direct or interface input. An LED indicator displays which type of input
signal is being used.
•
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Harvard Apparatus introduces its
NEW TR2 Chart Recorder. This
thermal array Recorder is well
suited for recording physiological
signals. The rectilinear method of
printing provides a precise trace of
the input signal.
Easy to use
2 Event Marker Channels
Each of the event marker channels may be independently set to an automatic timed marker, manual event, remote event, or no event. 14 different
timed markers are available. Select from seconds or minutes. For a manual event, simply press the front panel push button. This Recorder will also
accept a short circuit or 5 volt logic pulse applied to the rear event socket which will cause an event marking. If being used with a timed marker,
the corresponding LED on the front panel of the Recorder will illuminate.
Input Channels
2
Event Channels
2, selectable in any combination of time and/or event
Channel Width
50 mm
Linearity
Better than 1% full scale
Frequency Response
Flat from DC to 40 Hz ±3 dB
Input Types
2 analog inputs either direct or via plug in interface
Input Level
±1 V to provide full scale trace deflection max.
Direct Input
Single ended BNC (rear panel), max. input ±2.5 V
Rise Time
<10 msec
Gain
1:1 or dependant on signal conditioner
A/D Converter
8 bit
Chart Speeds:
Minimum
Maximum
35 selectable speeds, ranges: mm/hrs, mm/min, and mm/sec
1 mm/hr
100 mm/sec
Chart Wander
±0.5 mm max. per 10 sec
Chart Paper, L x W
Fanfold, 150 x 110 mm
Print Head
104 mm direct thermal linear array
Resolution:
Vertical
Horizontal
8 dots/mm
32 dots/mm for chart speeds up to 25 mm/sec
16 dots/mm for charts speeds from >25 mm/sec to 50 mm/sec
8 dots/mm for charts speeds from >50 mm/sec to 100 mm/sec
Time Markers
14 user selectable settings; 1, 5, 10, 30, 45, or 60 sec/min
Event Markers
Front panel push button or remote via BNC: either short circuit
or +ve 5 V logic pulse
Power
110 or 230 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 40 W max., 1 A 20 mm fuse
Dimensions, H x W x D
225 x 313 x 350 mm (8.9 x 12.3 x 13.8 in)
Weight
8.0 kg (17.5 lb)
Catalog No.
BS4 40-2000
$
Product
5,455.00 Harvard Apparatus TR2 Chart Recorder, 110/230
VAC, 50/60 Hz
BS4 40-2010
This Recorder provides clear, easy to read traces that are 50 mm wide.
It uses simple fanfold thermal paper. When the Recorder runs out of
paper the Paper LED will illuminate.
759.00 Transducer Interface for Use with Harvard Apparatus
Transducers: UF1 Series Isometric, Standard
Isometric, and Isotonic Transducers,
see pages I7 and I8
BS4 40-2020
759.00 Isolated Interface for Use with Isolated Amplifiers to
Permit Recording of GSR, ECG, EEG, and EMG
Signals
Variety of Chart Speeds
BS4 40-2001
Clear, Easy to Read Traces
29.00 Replacement Fan Fold Chart Paper, 300 Sheets
This Recorder provides three different speed ranges for the ultimate in
versatility. Ranges available are mm/hours, mm/minute, and mm/seconds.
35 selectable speeds are provided. The minimum speed is 1 mm/hour.
The maximum speed is 100 mm/sec.
I70
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Electrodes & Cables
3-Lead Input Cables and Surface Electrodes
The different size plugs connect to different types of Ag/AgCl electrodes offered,
see below. To use Disposable Electrodes, BS4 50-9570 or BS4 50-9554 Snap
Fastener (press stud) Connectors are required. These Input Cables and
Electrodes are for use with the BS4 50-8879 AC/DC Preamplifier for animal
use, see page I60, or the BS4 50-9513 Isolated Preamplifier for human or
animal use, see page I62.
•
For ECG, EMG, EEG, ENG/EOG and skin potentials from humans or animals
•
Two 3-lead input cables are offered:
- 3-pin DIN to three 4 mm plugs
- 3-pin DIN to three 1 mm plugs
•
Four types of surface electrodes are offered:
- A range of disposable biopotential electrodes
are offered, see pages I73 and I74
- Small nondisposable Ag/AgCl cup electrodes
- Plate electrodes with straps
- Suction electrode
Catalog No.
BS4 50-9570
4 mm Socket to Snap Fastener
(Press Stud) Connector
BS4 59-8437
Disposable
Foam
Electrodes
for Active
Subjects
BS4 50-5297
Plate Electrode and Strap
BS4 50-9539
Plate Electrodes and Straps
BS4 50-8937
3-Lead Input Cable with
4 mm Plugs
BS4 50-8937
77.00 3-Lead Input Cable with 4 mm Plugs;
3-Pin DIN to three 4 mm Plugs, 1 m
(3.3 ft) long
BS4 50-9570
99.00 4 mm Socket to Snap Fastener
(Press Stud) Connector, set of 5
BS4 50-5297
64.00 Plate Electrode and Strap, pkg of 1
BS4 50-9539
197.00 Plate Electrodes and Straps, set of 4
BS4 50-9604
BS4 72-7095
3-Lead Input Cable with 4 mm Plugs
The 4 mm plugs on this Input Cable connect to either Snap Fastener Connectors
for use with Disposable Bipotential Electrodes, or directly to Plate Electrodes or
Suction Electrodes.
BS4 50-9554
1 mm Socket to Snap Fastener
(press stud) Connector
BS4 50-9547
3-Lead Input Cable with
1 mm Plugs
BS4 50-9265
Nondisposable Ag/AgCl Cup
Electrodes
BS4 59-8437
Disposable
Foam
Electrodes
BS4 50-9273
Small DoubleSided Adhesive
Discs
3-Lead Input Cable with 1 mm Plugs
The 1 mm plugs on this Input Cable connect to either Snap Fastener Connectors
for use with Disposable Biopotential Electrodes, or directly to Small NonDisposable Cup Electrodes.
Product
751.00 3-Lead Surface Electrode Set. Consists
of one of each of Cables, Connectors,
Electrodes and Adhesive Discs whose
catalog numbers are shaded, plus BS4
50-5313 Tube of Electrode Gel and
BS4 50-8309 Syringe with Blunt
Needle for applying gel
93.00 Suction Electrode
151.00 Disposable Foam Electrodes for Active
Subjects, 38 mm (1-1/2 in), pkg of 50,
(for additional Disposable Electrodes,
see pages I73 and I74)
For BS4 50-8309 Syringe with Blunt Needle
and BS4 50-5313 Tube of
Electrode Gel, see page I74.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-9547
99.00 3-Lead Input Cable with 1 mm Plugs;
3-Pin DIN to three 1 mm Plugs, 1 m
(3.3 ft) long
BS4 50-9554
55.00 1 mm Socket to Snap Fastener
(Press Stud) Connector, set of 3
Physiology
BS4 50-9604
Suction Electrode
$
BS4 50-9836
Product
BS4 50-9265
100.00 Nondisposable Ag/AgCl Cup
Electrodes, pkg of 3
BS4 72-7095
151.00 Disposable Foam Electrodes for Active
Subjects, 38 mm (1-1/2 in), pkg of 50,
(for additional Disposable Electrodes,
see pages I73 to I74)
BS4 50-9273
49.00 Small Double-Sided Adhesive Discs to
hold Nondisposable Ag/AgCl Cup
Electrodes, roll of 100
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I71
Electrodes & Cables
Multi-Lead Cables and Electrodes
BS4 50-9570
4 mm Socket to Snap Fastener
(press stud) Connectors
BS4 59-8437
Disposable
Foam
Electrodes
•
For clinical ECG measurement for human use only
•
Use only with the BS4 50-9513 Isolated
Preamplifier, see page I62
•
Four surface electrodes are offered:
- A range of disposable biopotential electrodes
are offered, see pages I73 to I74
- Plate electrodes with straps
- Suction electrode
BS4 50-5297
Plate Electrode and Strap
BS4 50-9539
Plate Electrodes and Straps
BS4 50-9562
ECG Limb Cables
Catalog No.
BS4 50-9604
Suction Electrode
BS4 50-9562
90.00 ECG Limb Cables, color-coded,
1 m (3.3 ft) leads, 2 mm plug to
4 mm plug connectors, set of 5
BS4 50-9570
90.00 4 mm Socket to Snap Fastener (press
stud) Connectors, set of 5
BS4 50-5297
64.00 Plate Electrode and Strap, pkg of 1
BS4 50-9539
197.00 Plate Electrodes and Straps, set of 4
BS4 50-9604
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 72-7095
93.00 Suction Electrode
151.00 Disposable Foam Electrodes for Active
Subjects, 38 mm (1-1/2 in), pkg of 50,
(for additional Disposable Electrodes,
see pages I73 to I74)
•
For recording GSR from palm of hand and from
other parts of body
•
Two input cables are available:
- 2-lead cable with attached finger electrodes
BS4 50-9521
2-Lead Input Cable with Finger Electrodes
BS4 50-9828
2-Lead Input Cable with 4 mm Plugs
Product
573.00 5-Lead Clinical ECG Electrode Set.
Complete Set of all items whose
catalog numbers are shaded
5-Lead Clinical ECG Cables and Electrodes
A Set of 5 color-coded ECG Limb Cables, labelled RA, LA, RL, LL and C, are offered.
Each cable is 1 m (3.3 ft) long. One end has a 2 mm plug for connecting to the
BS4 50-9513 Isolated Preamplifier, see page I62. The other end has a 4 mm plug
that connects directly to Plate and Suction Electrodes or to a Snap Fastener
Connector for use with Disposable Electrodes. These Electrodes, Cables and
accessories are available individually or as a complete set BS4 50-9844.
$
BS4 50-9844
- 2-lead cable with two 4 mm plugs to attach to
BS4 50-9570 Snap Fastener Connectors for
use with disposable electrodes
BS4 50-9570
4 mm Socket to Snap Fastener
(press stud) Connectors
BS4 59-8437
Disposable
Foam
Electrodes
for Active
Subjects
GSR Palm Input Cables and Electrodes
Both Input Cables are 1 m (3.3 ft) long and have a 3-pin DIN connector for
directly connecting to the BS4 50-9505 Isolated GSR Amplifier, see page I147.
One BS4 50-9521 2-Lead Input Cable with Finger Electrodes is supplied with this
GSR Amplifier. These GSR Electrodes, Cables and accessories are available individually or as complete GSR Palm Disposable Electrode Set BS4 50-9810.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-9810
$
Product
339.00 GSR Palm Disposable Electrode Set.
Complete set of all items whose catalog
numbers are shaded
BS4 50-9521
87.00 2-Lead Input Cable with Finger
Electrodes*
BS4 50-9828
55.00 2-Lead Input Cable with 4 mm Plugs*
BS4 50-9570
99.00 4 mm Socket to Snap Fastener (Press
Stud) Connectors, set of 5
BS4 72-7095
151.00 Disposable Foam Electrodes for Active
Subjects, 38 mm (1-1/2 in), pkg of 50,
(for additional Disposable Electrodes,
see pages I73 to I74)
*Note: Pin 1 and 2 internally shorted.
I72
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Electrodes & Cables
Disposable Electrodes
BS4 72-7093
BS4 72-7095
BS4 72-7092
BS4 72-7094
•
Suitable for all types of studies
•
Available in two adhesives types
NEW
General Purpose
Disposable Electrodes
These General Purpose Disposable EKG
Electrodes are the ideal choice for cardiac
monitoring and diagnostic applications. Each
Electrode is designed to work in all procedures: Stress Test, Long Term Monitoring,
Short Term Monitoring or Resting EKG.
Cat. No.
$
Product
BS4 72-7093 109.00 Solid Gel Adhesive General
Purpose Electrodes,
pkg. of 60
BS4 72-7094 185.00 Wet Gel Adhesive General
Purpose Electrodes,
pkg. of 60
BS4 60-2394
BS4 60-2395
55.00 Alligator Clip, Connects to
an 4 mm Banana Plug,
pkg. of 10
17.00 Preparatory Pads,
individually packaged, 5.1 x
2.5 cm (2 x 1 in) Textured
Cloth Pads soaked in 70%
Isopropanol Solution with
Pumice, prepares skin surface to accept Electrodes,
pkg. of 1000
•
Ag/AgCl, high chloride, wet gel
electrodes hydrate the skin and
produce fast, clear traces
•
Conductive adhesive gel
•
Specially designed strain relief tab
•
Aggressive adhesive keeps
electrodes on the subject, no motion
artifact or repeat testing
•
Single use (eliminates cross
contamination)
•
Pliable substrate conforms to body
•
Hypoallergenic adhesive
•
Solid gel requires minimal clean-up
•
Latex Free
•
Ultra-low impedance (< 100 Ω) promotes rapid baseline stabilization
•
Repositionable
•
Packaged in convenient, re-sealable
pouches
NEW Disposable Foam
Electrodes for
Active Subjects
These Disposable Foam Electrodes are ideal
for withstanding the physical abuse of special
procedures such as stress testing. In critical
diagnostic situations, use of these electrodes
insures quality readings, zero artifact and no
repeat procedures. These Disposable Foam
electrodes are available in two sizes, have a
stainless steel metal snap, and are supplied 5
per strip and 60 per package. These electrodes attach with an Alligator Clip or standard snap connector lead wire.
Cat. No.
$
Product
BS4 72-7095 151.00 Disposable Foam
Electrode, 38 mm (1 1/2 in)
diameter, pkg of 60
BS4 72-7096 151.00 Disposable Foam
Electrode, 48 mm (1 7/8 in)
diameter, pkg. of 60
BS4 60-2394
BS4 60-2395
55.00 Alligator Clip, Connects to
an 4 mm Banana Plug, pkg.
of 10
17.00 Preparatory Pads, individually packaged, 5.1 x 2.5 cm
(2 x 1 in) Textured Cloth
Pads soaked in 70%
Isopropanol Solution with
Pumice, prepares skin surface to accept Electrodes,
pkg. of 1000
NEW Disposable Diagnostic
Resting EKG
Tab Electrodes
The Diagnostic Resting EKG Tab Electrode
provides excellent adhesion and quality
traces. The silver/silver chloride coating and
conductive adhesive gel provide an electrode
that meets or exceeds the AAMI standard for
disposable pre-gelled EKG electrodes. The
specially designed strain relief tab is pliable,
allowing electrode to remain secure. They are
supplied as 10 electrodes per strip in a package of 100 electrodes. Attachment requires
the use of an alligator clip available below.
Cat. No.
$
Physiology
These General Purpose Disposable Electrodes
are available in two adhesive materials, a Solid
or a Wet gel, to satisfy your preference. The
adhesive Solid Gel has a specially formulated
solid gel that improves adhesion and ease of
application, while reducing the need for
clean-up. The optional Wet Gel adhesive
Electrodes are quick reading and more stabile. Both electrodes are available in a 48 mm
(1 7/8 in) diameter breathable tape with a
stainless steel snap and are Latex-Free. They
attach to an alligator clip or a standard connector lead wire.
BS4 72-7096
Product
BS4 72-7092 156.00 Ag/AgCl Adhesive Solid
Gel Tab, pkg. of 100
BS4 60-2394
55.00 Alligator Clip, Connects to
an 4 mm Banana Plug,
pkg. of 10
BS4 60-2395
17.00 Preparatory Pads,
individually packaged, 5.1 x
2.5 cm (2 x 1 in) Textured
Cloth Pads soaked in 70%
Isopropanol Solution with
Pumice, prepares skin
surface to accept
Electrodes, pkg. of 1000
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I73
Electrodes & Cables
Disposable Electrodes and Accessories
BS4 72-7090
BS4 72-7091
BS4 50-8309
NEW
•
Small size for easy placement on difficult locations
•
Optional aggressive
adhesive
•
Solid gel is repositionable
and easy clean-up
•
Hypoallergenic for long
term use with no irritation
•
Cloth base is comfortable
and conforming
•
Silver/Silver Chloride
sensor gives a clear signal
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
These Small Disposable Cloth
Electrodes are for use in EMG,
NCS and EP studies and are
latex-free. They meet or exceed
AAMI specifications and are also
suitable for use with EKG monitors. All Small Disposable
Electrodes are supplied as 3
electrodes per strip with 60 electrodes per package. They attach
with an alligator clip or standard
connector lead wire.
The Small Disposable 2.5 cm2
(1.0 in2), aggressive adhesive
electrode is designed for easy
placement and superior adhesion. A specially formulated adhesive solid gel ensures full sensor
contact and excellent readings.
•
I74
Small Disposable Electrodes
Syringe with Blunt Needle
For dispensing small quantities of Electrode Gel, see below.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-8309
10.00 Syringe with Blunt Needle
Multipurpose use for EMG
or EKG
The Small Disposable 2.2 cm (0.88 in ) gentle adhesive electrodes
are designed with a gentle adhesive for use in sensitive areas.
2
2
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-7090
80.00 Aggressive Adhesive Small Disposable Electrode,
pkg. of 60
Product
BS4 72-7091
146.00 Gentle Adhesive Small Disposable Electrode, pkg.
of 60
BS4 60-2394
55.00 Alligator Clip, Connects to an 4 mm Banana Plug,
pkg. of 10
BS4 60-2395
17.00 Preparatory Pads, individually packaged, 5.1 x 2.5
cm (2 x 1 in) Textured Cloth Pads soaked in 70%
Isopropanol Solution with Pumice, prepares skin
surface to accept Electrodes, pkg. of 1000
BS4 50-5313
Tube of Electrode Gel
Provides good electrical contact for BS4 50-9297 Plate Electrodes,
BS4 50-9604 Suction Electrodes and BS4 50-9265 Nondisposable
Ag/AgCl Cup Electrodes.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-5313
29.00 Tube of Electrode Gel
Product
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Electrodes & Cables
3-Lead Surface Electrodes
BS4 50-8242
Needle Electrodes
BS4 50-9612
Spring Clip
Electrodes
BS4 50-9224
Alligator Clip
Electrodes
3-Lead Surface Electrodes
Three different types of 3-Lead
Electrodes are offered: Alligator
Clip, Spring Clip and Needle
Electrodes. These can either be
purchased individually or together as a complete 3-Lead Electrode
• For ECG, EMG and EEG
from humans, use any of
Set. The 22 G Needle Electrodes
the Spring Clip Electrodes
are for inserting into tissues and
or BS4 50-9224 Alligator
are removable from the lead for
Clip Electrodes to
hold Disposable ECG
sterilizing. The Alligator Clip
Electrodes, see page I73
Electrodes will securely grip the
snap fastener of a Disposable
Biopotential Electrode or the tab on BS4 72-7092 Electrodes for Resting
Subjects, see page I73. The Spring Clip Electrode can attach directly to
the skin or tissue for rapid, low resistance applications such as stimulation, ECG, EEG and EMG. The electrodes have a 1 m (3-1/4 ft) cable.
The electrodes with a 3-pin DIN connector plug directly into either the
BS4 50-8879 AC/DC Preamplifier for animal use, see page I62, or the
BS4 50-9513 Isolated Preamplifier for human or animal use, see page
I62. The Spring Clip Electrode is also available with a 14-pin DIN connector for use with other equipment. A third version has three separate
Spring Clips with plain wire connectors for use with the BS4 50-6002
and BS4 50-6012 Stimulators, see page I26.
•
For ECG, EMG and EEG
from a variety of animals
including frogs, rats,
mice, guinea pigs, rabbits,
cats and dogs
$
BS4 50-8242
86.00 3-Lead Surface Electrode with Needle Electrodes
and 3-Pin DIN Connector
Physiology
Catalog No.
Product
BS4 50-9224
121.00 3-Lead Surface Electrode with Alligator Clip
Electrodes and 3-Pin DIN Connector
BS4 50-9612
148.00 With Spring Clip Electrodes with 3-Pin DIN Connector
BS4 50-9613
191.00 With Spring Clip Electrodes with 14-Pin DIN Connector
BS4 50-6808
112.00 With Spring Clip Electrodes with 3 Separate Spring
Clips with 3 Plain Wires
BS4 50-9802
339.00 3-Lead Electrode Set, Consists of one each of BS4
50-9224 Alligator Clip, BS4 50-9612 Spring Clip and
BS4 50-8242 Needle Electrodes
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I75
Electrodes & Cables
Macro and Micro Metal Electrodes
Tip Profiles
General Profile
Standard Style with 3 or 1 mm of
Parlyene-C Insulation on the Shaft
25:1 taper
3µ
Heat Tapered Profile
Standard Style with Addition of
Polymide Tubing on the Shaft
25:1 taper
3µ
Extra Fine Profile
50:1 taper
1µ
Stereotrode/Biopolar Style
Bullet Profile
25:1 taper
3µ
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Metal Macro Electrodes
•
Excellent for stimulation, lesions, and recording
evoked responses
•
Parylene-C insulation makes these Electrodes
ideal for chronic applications
•
Select from tungsten or stainless steel metals
These Macro Electrodes are similar in construction to our
Metal Micro Electrodes except they are larger in size.
Their shaft diameters range from 0.009 inches (229 µm)
to 0.02 inches (508 µm). The same unique manufacturing process is use to create these electrode tips so they
provide consistent, repeatable, superior performance.
They are 3 inches (76.2 µm) long and are constructed of
either stainless steel (elgiloy) or Tungsten. The electrode
shaft has a 3 mm coating of Parylene-C insulation. They
are supplied in a box of 10.
Metal Macro Electrodes
Catalog No.
$
Shaft OD
in (mm)
Tip
Impedance
at 1 kHz
0.1 µm
125 kΩ
Stainless Steel (Elgiloy)
BS4 72-0416
0.009 (229)
BS4 72-0417
219.00 0.009 (229)
0.25 µm
13 kΩ
219.00 0.010 (254)
0.1 µm
100 kΩ
Tungsten
BS4 72-0418
BS4 72-0419
0.010 (254)
BS4 72-0420
219.00 0.020 (508)
BS4 72-0421
0.020 (508)
0.25 µm
10 kΩ
0.1 µm
75 kΩ
0.25 µm
7 kΩ
Note: Concentric Electrodes available, please call for details.
I76
Metal Microelectrodes
These Metal Micro Electrodes
are ideal for a multitude of
applications including singleand multi-unit studies, stimulation, lesioning, and evoked
response studies. Four metals
are available depending on
the application:
•
Outstanding for extracellular recording
and micro-stimulation
•
Unique, precision manufacturing
process provides consistent repeatable
tip profiles for superior performance
•
Select from 4 metals, 3 styles, and 4 tip
profiles to meet almost any application
•
Gold-plated connector pins for superior
• Tungsten
electrical connections
• Stainless Steel
• Custom made probes readily available
(Elgiloy metal)
• Platinum/Iridium Mix
(80/20%)
• Pure Iridium
Tungsten is the most versatile and widely used type of probe. It is ideal for
demanding recording situations and most stimulation protocols.
The Stainless Steel (Elgiloy) Electrodes are widely used as the primary component for the ‘vibrating probe’ electrode. It is vibrated at a fairly high frequency and
is used to record very small DC potentials. It is also use for Prussian blue staining
around the tip by passing a small anodal current.
The Platinum/Iridium mix Electrodes have a lower concomitant impedance
value than tungsten or stainless steel for the same exposure, therefore they are
ideal for recording. They are also superior for stimulation studies because they are
less likely to erode during intense stimulation protocols. This metal mixture is also
excellent for chronic implants because it is very biocompatible.
The Pure Iridium Electrodes are ideal for improved stimulation and recording.
Pure Iridium is extremely stiff and has a much lower concomitant tip impedance
than any other noble metal. It is extremely inert and very resistant to corrosion.
Consequently, it is much less likely to erode during stimulation and can be activated using cyclic voltametery for increased charge storage capacity to lower tip
impedance values.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Electrodes & Cables
Macro and Micro Metal Electrodes
Metal Micro Electrodes
Electrode
Catalog No.
$
Electrode Style
Parylene Coated
BS4 72-0395 156.00 Parylene Coated
• General Profile with a 25:1 taper
ending in a sharp point which is good
for most applications.
• Heat Tapered Profile with a 25:1
taper ending in a sharp point with
“toughened” Parylene-C near the
exposed tip providing more rigidity.
This tip is ideal for penetrating tough
tissues.
• Extra Fine Profile with a 50:1
taper ending in a sharp point which
is good for small cells and near
surface work. This profile only has 1
mm of Parylene-C insulation on the
metal shaft.
• Bullet Profile with a 25:1 taper
ending in a rounded point which is
ideal for stimulation due to reduced
neuron penetration.
These Electrodes are supplied in a box of 10.
BS4 72-0396
Length
Tip Profile Shaft
Insulation Tip Imped. Diameter Tungsten
BS4 72-0375 406.00 Stereotrode/Biopolar 127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
1
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0376
Stereotrode/Biopolar 127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
1.5
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0377 416.00 Stereotrode/Biopolar 127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
0.5
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0378
Additional Polymide 127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
2
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0379 240.00 Additional Polymide 127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
BS4 72-0380
1
General
127 µm
Parylene Coated
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
2
Tapered
127 µm
BS4 72-0381 181.00 Parylene Coated
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
2
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0382
Parylene Coated
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
1
Tapered
127 µm
BS4 72-0383 181.00 Parylene Coated
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
1
Bullet
127 µm
BS4 72-0384
Parylene Coated
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
1
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0385 181.00 Parylene Coated
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
1
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0386
Parylene Coated
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
0.5
Bullet
127 µm
BS4 72-0387 181.00 Parylene Coated
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
0.5
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0388
127 mm (5 in) 3 µm
0.5
General
127 µm
127 µm
Parylene Coated
BS4 72-0389 365.00 Stereotrode/Biopolar 76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
1
General
BS4 72-0390
Stereotrode/Biopolar 76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
0.5
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0391 191.00 Additional Polymide 76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
2
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0392
Additional Polymide 76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
1
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0393 203.00 Additional Polymide 76 mm (3 in)
1 µm
5
X-Fine
127 µm
BS4 72-0394
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
2
General
127 µm
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
2
General
127 µm
Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
1.5
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0397 156.00 Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
1
General
254 µm
BS4 72-0398
Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
1
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0399 156.00 Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
0.5
General
254 µm
BS4 72-0400
Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
0.5
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0401 156.00 Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
0.1
General
254 µm
BS4 72-0402
Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
1 µm
5
X-Fine
127 µm
BS4 72-0403 156.00 Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
1 µm
2
X-Fine
127 µm
BS4 72-0404
Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
1 µm
1
X-Fine
127 µm
Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
7
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0406 156.00 Parylene Coated
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
2
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0407
76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
1
General
127 µm
Physiology
Three Electrode Styles are Available:
• Standard style with 3 mm or 1 mm of
Parylene-C insulation on the metal
shaft.
• Standard style with the addition of
polymide tubing on the shaft which
provides additional reinforcement for
easy electrode insertion. The additional insulation also minimizes signal
attenuation making this an ideal
electrode for deep brain penetrations.
• Stereotrode/Biopolar style for micro
bipolar stimulation. These Electrodes
are ideal where the current injection
needs to be confined to a small, localized part of the nervous system. They
are also used for enhanced isolation
of single neural elements by simultaneously recording from multiple units
of two closely spaced microelectrodes.
All of the Microelectrodes are sharpened
electrochemically and their tips are individually exposed under a microscope. Each is
inspected to assure reproducible tip exposures and profile. Four different tip profiles
are created using a unique process to remove
the insulation from the electrode tip:
Stainless Steel
BS4 72-0405
Parylene Coated
Platinum/20% Iridium
BS4 72-0408
Additional Polymide 51 mm (2 in)
3 µm
2
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0409 331.00 Additional Polymide 51 mm (2 in)
3 µm
1
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0410
Parylene Coated
51 mm (2 in)
3 µm
2
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0411 309.00 Parylene Coated
51 mm (2 in)
3 µm
1
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0412
51 mm (2 in)
3 µm
0.5
General
127 µm
Additional Polymide 76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
2
General
127 µm
Parylene Coated
Iridium (Pure)
BS4 72-0413
BS4 72-0414 410.00 Additional Polymide 76 mm (3 in)
3 µm
1
General
127 µm
BS4 72-0415
3 µm
0.5
General
127 µm
AdditionalPolymide
76 mm (3 in)
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I77
Electrodes & Cables
Nerve Electrodes and Accessories
Dastre Electrode
•
For reaching deep-seated nerves
through a small incision
The end of the white plastic Electrode body is
curved into a 5 x 6.5 mm (3/16 x 1/4 in)
hook, which forms the nerve grip. The two
pole wires are exposed within the hook
radius. A white plastic plunger can be forced
down into the inside of the hook, so that the
desired securing tension can be brought on
the tissue. The plunger can be locked in place
by a knurled screw. Plain wire connector.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-6873
$
Product
Subminiature Electrode
Miniature Electrode
The inside jaw grip of this miniature
Electrode is a half-circle, 2 mm (1/16 in) in
diameter. The two wires of the stimulating circuit are brought down through the Electrode
shank and exposed in the half-circle base.
A plunger holds the nerve tightly against the
Electrode and can be locked in place. The
end of the Electrode has an over-all dimension of 2 x 6.5 mm (1/16 x 1/4 in). This size
is maintained for 20 mm (3/4 in) before it
enlarges into the regular electrode shank.
Plain wire connector.
The two Electrode pole wires are set in a channel cut through a white plastic block, 6.5 mm
(1/4 in) wide and high. A plastic locking clamp
is adjusted over the nerve or tissue. The proper
gripping tension is applied with a knurled head
screw. This electrode has plain wire connectors.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-1650
$
Product
125.00 Subminiature Electrode
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-6865
93.00 Miniature Electrode
Bipolar Electrode Set
Contains one each of BS4 50-4118 Dastre Electrode and BS4 50-4119 Subminiature Electrode.
Catalog No.
133.00 Dastre Electrode
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 50-6881
Simple Electrode
Bipolar Electrode
The stainless steel wire poles are fed back
through a plastic molding and are secured to
the leads.
Two 9.5 mm (3/8 in) stainless steel
Electrodes are attached to two sheathed, stout
brass wires. The wires are bound together for
92.1 mm (3-5/8 in) and then split into two
leads each of which is fitted with a terminal.
Each terminal has a small hole and thumbscrew that permits a wire to pass through and
be secured for connection to a stimulator.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-6824
44.00 Simple Electrode
Product
Catalog No.
BS4 50-6816
I78
$
Product
101.00 Bipolar Electrode
Product
$
Product
208.00 Bipolar Electrode Set
Finkelman Electrode for
Phrenic Nerve
The pole wires of this Electrode are sealed into
a clear plastic, 6.5 mm (1/4 in) diameter, 15
cm (6 in) rod. At the end of the rod, each pole
wire is formed into a small coil of three turns.
These coils are seated in a 6.5 mm (1/4 in)
plastic knob. The plastic surrounding the coils,
as well as the coils themselves, is pierced by a
2 mm (0.08 in) hole that exposes the wires.
The nerve is passed through the hole and
brought in contact with the electrodes.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-6857
81.00 Finkelman Electrode
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Product
Electrodes & Cables
Nerve Electrodes and Accessories
BS4 50-0561 Phrenic Nerve Electrode with
Oxygen Bubbler
Phrenic Nerve Electrode
•
Available with or without oxygen
bubbler
•
For use primarily with rat diaphragm
preparations
The short horizontal foot of this plastic body
Electrode, to which the costal segment is
attached, carries a single-pole wire. A stainless steel latch is pivoted on the end of the
foot and clamps the costal segment against
the indirect-stimulation electrode wire. The
latch is secured by a knurled screw located at
the end of the Electrode body. The diaphragm
tendon is connected to the transducer or writing lever by a piece of fine stainless steel wire,
which then acts as the second electrode for
direct stimulation.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-0561
245.00 Phrenic Nerve
Electrode with Oxygen
Bubbler
BS4 50-6972
271.00 Phrenic Nerve
Electrode without
Oxygen Bubbler
•
Double poles
•
This Electrode has a 6.5 mm (0.25 in) diameter, 17.5 cm (6.9 in) nickel-plated brass tube
that carries two 0.5 mm (0.02 in) diameter, 4
cm (15 in) silver wires. The electrode has 1 m
(3.3 ft) screened leads (screening connects to
the outer metal tube) and terminate in a 3-pin
DIN for connection to the BS4 50-8259
Electrophysiological Teaching Unit, see pages
I63 and I64, and the BS4 50-5131 BatteryPowered AC/DC Preamplifier, see page I62.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-7004
Nerve Conduction Chamber
$
Product
198.00 Screened Electrode
For the measurement of the speed
of electrical impulses in an isolated
nerve preparation
This unit consists of a clear plastic chamber, electrodes and a plastic cover. Fifteen electrode wires
extend from side-to-side. All are 5 mm (0.2 in)
apart and may be used for stimulation and for
receiving impulses. Each electrode terminates in
a socket for use with 2 mm plugs. The inside
dimensions of the chamber are, H x W x D,
2.5 x 7.9 x 3.2 cm (1 x 3-1/8 x 1.25 in). The
Chamber has a 6.5 mm (0.25 in) diameter, 10
cm (4 in) stainless steel mounting handle.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-7020
$
Product
391.00 Nerve Conduction
Chamber
Electrode Holder
Electrode Clamp
The two spring clips on this Electrode Holder
hold electrodes with diameters up to 6.5 mm
(1/4 in). The 12.7 mm (1/2 in) long
Electrode Holder head can be swiveled until
the electrode is in the desired position. A friction device passes through the 9.5 mm (3/8
in) diameter, 132 mm (5.2 in) handle of the
Holder and is operated by a knurled knob at
the end. When the knob is rotated a half-turn,
the ball and socket joint is locked and the
electrode is held securely in place.
See photo above. This ball and socket Clamp
permits the precise positioning of electrodes
with diameters up to 6.5 mm (0.25 in). The
electrode snaps into two spring clips which are
mounted on a ball that is precisely positioned
and locked in a socket by a knurled screw. This
clamp can be mounted either vertically or horizontally on a standard 9.5 mm (3/8 in) rod.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-1643
$
Catalog No.
BS4 50-4530
$
Physiology
The nerve grip, located on the Electrode shank,
consists of a plunger and a U-shaped piece of
plastic. The plunger pushes down and locks the
nerve ending against the two electrode wires
that are exposed in the base of the “U”. Once
set, the plunger can be locked in place. The
entire nerve holder can be moved along a 25
mm (1 in) portion of the Electrode to maintain
proper tension on the nerve. Once adjusted, the
entire unit can be locked in place. The
Electrode assembly is mounted on a 6.5 mm
(1/4 in) diameter rod. This electrode is available with and without an oxygen bubbler. The
Electrode with Oxygen Bubbler.
Screened Electrode
Product
272.00 Electrode Clamp
Product
226.00 Electrode Holder
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I79
Data Acquisition Hardware
HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware for HSE-HA Software
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 73-0161 Data Acquisition Hardware, PLUGSYS Version
I80
BS4 73-0235 Data Acquisition Hardware, Stand Alone Version
•
Data Acquisition Hardware, PLUGSYS Version:
Central connection for output signals of PLUGSYS modules
to data acquisition board installed in computer
•
Data Acquisition Hardware, Stand Alone Version:
To connect input signals from any instrument to the data
acquisition board installed in the computer for using HSE-HA
software
•
BS4 73-3330 Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand Alone
Data Acquisition Hardware, PLUGSYS Version
In this version, the 16 signals of the PLUGSYS bus system are connected to the PCI A/D converter board via the module ROM-DL
(Recording Output - Direct Link) a built-in board, the DIM (Data
Interface Module) and an appropriate cable. The ROM-DL and the
DIM Modules are installed on the rear side of the PLUGSYS
Mainframe. The PCI A/D board is installed in the computer. The DIM
and the A/D board are connected by the data cable. If controlling
modules such as the PSM or PPCM are requested, the DIM must be
extended with the DIM-D Option.
Suitable for all HSE-HA data acquisition software
Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand Alone Version
In this version, any Windows NT / 2000 / or XP based computer or
laptop with a USB port can connect to any amplifier, flowmeter, or
other instrument to run HSE-HA Software. Up to 16 input signals can
be connected to the USB Input Box from the PLUGSYS system case or
independent manufactures via BNC cables. The USB Input Box is
connected to the USB port on the desktop or laptop computer.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, PLUGSYS
Version
BS4 73-0235
2,569.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, Stand Alone
Version
BS4 73-3330
3,090.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand
Alone Version
Data Acquisition Hardware, Stand Alone Version
This version is used to connect any amplifier, flowmeter or other
instruments of several different manufacturers to the HSE-HA software. Up to 16 signals can be connected to the BNC connector block.
The connector block is connected to the PCI A/D converter board.
The A/D board is installed in the computer.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA Data Acquisition Software Packages
All Software packages have a maximum of 16 channels allowing
acquisition of up to 16 different raw signals. The assignment of the signals to the individual channels is determined in the configuration files.
The sample rate, the type of signals and algorithm used for analysis are
also defined in the configuration file. The arrangement of the graphic
detail (raw signals) and trend (calculated parameters) is defined in
the menu. Prior to the experiment, the user chooses the available signals to acquire and display, which of the possible parameters to evaluate and display, enter the experimental protocol and finally calibrate
the instruments. All packages include storage of raw data with the possibility for replay. Complete experiments can be replayed. An indication of the measured signals and parameters occurs online in numerical tabular form or graphical detail and trend windows. Monitoring
Catalog No.
$
Product
of the experimental sequence is done by placing event markers and/or
concentration information. Very easy graphical selection of specific
data points by markers for evaluation, data reduction, and export.
Raw data can be easily exported in ASCII delimited format.
Hardware Requirements:
Computer
RAM
Operating System
Hard Disk Space
Floppy Drive
CD-ROM Drive
Monitor
PENTIUM III PC, 500 MHz or more with one free PCI-slot
128 MB or more of RAM
Windows NT 4.0, WIN 2000 or XP
at least 20 GB
1.44 MB
Required
Color SVGA graphic board with 19” standard or 17 – 18” flat
panel monitor
CD burner or DVD RAM/RW
Backup Media
Catalog No.
$
Product
BDAS Basic Data Acquisition Software
PULMODYN® Pulmonary Mechanics Data Acquisition
BS4 73-1712
BS4 73-1692
3,164.00
For analyzing smooth, slow moving signals such as mean
pressure, mean flow, temperature, pH, PO2, PCO2, pK+ and
smooth muscle contractions.
Software calculates maximum, minimum, and mean values
for: Pressure, Flow, Tension (force), Displacement,
Temperature, Concentrations, pO2, pCO2, and pH
ACAD® Isolated Tissue Data Acquisition
BS4 73-1688
4,022.00
For isolated tissue studies such as smooth muscle, and
beating or electrically stimulated tissues. Can control electrical stimulation, pre-tension adjustment and flushing.
Evaluates isometric or isotonic tissue contractions.
Software calculates Resting Tension for smooth muscles
Optional software modules are available for calculating specific values:
BS4 73-1715
BS4 73-2900
2,194.00
1,344.00
Option to ACAD® Software for evaluation of free
Beating Tissues
Amplitude, Rate, +dF/dt
5,277.00
From LVP signal
From all PRESSURES
From all FLOWS
From DISTANCE
From ELECTROGRAM
From pO2, pCO2, & pH
From all PULMONARY
PRESSURES
From BLOOD PRESSURE
Respiration Rate, maximum Inspiratory Flow,
maximum Expiratory Flow, Tidal Volume, dynamic
Resistance, Conductance, dynamic Compliance
From PERFUSION FLOW
Maximum, minimum, mean pressure
Systolic, diastolic, mean\pressure, non-pulsatile mean,
Heart Rate
Maximum, minimum, mean flow, non-pulsatile mean
From pO2, pCO2, pH
& TEMPERATURE
Mean value
Optional software modules are available for calculating specific values:
Option to ACAD® Software for Advanced Evaluation of
Stimulated Beating Tissues
Amplitude, Rate, +dF/dt, Contraction time, Relaxation time,
Response duration, Peak duration, Latency period
BS4 73-2705
735.00
Advanced Pulmonary Flow Module
Inspiratory time, Expiratory time, Apnea time, Total Time
BS4 73-2706
586.00
ECG Advanced Module
RR-I, HR
Strip Chart Print Option for HSE-HA DAQ Software
HAEMODYN® Cardiovascular Data Acquisition
ISOHEART® Isolated Heart Data Acquisition
BS4 73-0162
From PULMONARY AIR
FLOW
For Respiratory Studies. Evaluates online most of the standard respiratory parameters such as airflow, intrapleural
pressure, blood pressure and flow signals, tidal volume,
respiration rate, resistance, and compliance. Software calculates the following parameters online:
For Isolated Heart Studies. Evaluates online most of the
standard parameters in Isolated Heart experiments such
as left ventricular pressure, blood pressure, blood flow,
pO2, pCO2, pH and length measurement. Software calculates the following parameters online:
LVPsys, LVPdia, LVPEDP, dLVP/dtmin, dLVP/dtmax, heart
rate,mean pressure
Systolic, diastolic, mean pressure, heart rate
Mean, maximum, minimum flow
Maximum, minimum, amplitude (max – min)
Heart rate
Mean value
BS4 73-1690
4,935.00
From LVP signal
From all PRESSURES
From all FLOWS
From DISTANCE
From ELECTROGRAM
From pO2, pCO2, & pH
For Cardiovascular Studies. Evaluates online most of the standard Hemodynamic parameters such as left ventricular pressure, blood pressure, blood flow, pO2, pCO2, pH and distance
signals. Software calculates the following parameters online:
LVPsys, LVPdia, LVPEDP, dLVP/dtmin, dLVP/dtmax,
heart rate, mean pressure
Systolic, diastolic, mean pressure, heart rate
Mean, maximum, minimum flow
Maximum, minimum, amplitude (max – min)
Heart rate
Mean value
Optional software modules are available for calculating specific values:
BS4 73-0237
734.00
LVP Advanced Module
Tau, Time to Peak, Relaxation Time, Contractility Index
CI=dp/dtmax/P, Ejection Time
BS4 73-0238
586.00
Flow Advanced Module
End Systoloic Flow, End Diastolic Flow
BS4 73-0239
1,102.00
Respiration Module
Respiration Rate, maximum Inspiratory Flow, maximum
Expiratory Flow, Tidal Volume
BS4 73-2715
2,562.00
Monophasic Action Potential (MAP) Module
Max, Min, Plateau, Amp, Rate, +dv/dt, duration at 10% of MAP
Optional software modules are available for calculating specific values:
BS4 73-0237
734.00
LVP Advanced Module
Tau, Time to Peak, Relaxation Time, Contractility Index
CI=dp/dtmax/P, Ejection Time
BS4 73-0238
586.00
Flow Advanced Module
End Systoloic Flow, End Diastolic Flow
BS4 73-2715
2,562.00
BS4 73-2716
735.00
Dimensions Module
End-systolic length, end-diastolic length, +dL/dt, - dL/dt
BS4 73-2716
735.00
Dimensions Module
End-systolic length, end-diastolic length, +dL/dt, - dL/dt
BS4 73-2799
641.00
PV-Loop Module
Conductance Signal, LVP Signal: Acquire and view PV loops
real time and during experiment replay. Select and export PV
loop segments to Millar PVAN software for further analysis.
BS4 73-2799
641.00
PV-Loop Module
Conductance Signal, LVP Signal: Acquire and view PV loops
real time and during experiment replay. Select and export PV
loop segments to Millar PVAN software for further analysis.
BS4 73-2900
1,344.00
Strip Chart Print Option for HSE-HA DAQ Software
BS4 73-2900
1,344.00
Monophasic Action Potential (MAP)
Module Max, Min, Plateau, Amp, Rate, +dv/dt, duration at
10% of MAP
Physiology
BS4 73-1703
1,463.00
5,482.00
Strip Chart Print Option for HSE-HA DAQ Software
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I81
Data Acquisition Software
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
HSE-HA BDAS W for Data Acquisition
I82
•
16-channels basic data acquisition
software
•
For Windows® NT, 2000, and XP
•
To measure slow signals such as:
mean perfusion pressures or flows,
smooth muscle contractions, pO2,
pCO2, pH, temperature etc.
•
Easy to use, reduced settings by
using configuration files
•
Storage of raw data with possibility
for replay; complete experiments can
be replayed
•
Indication of the measured signals
and parameters online in numerical
tabular form or graphical detail and
trend windows
•
Data exchange interface by converting
the data into the ASCII delimited format
•
Monitoring of the experimental
sequence by placing event markers
and concentration information
•
Very easy graphical selection of specific
data points by cursors for evaluation,
data reduction and export
•
Export of a raw data sequence into
ASCII delimited format
The HSE-HA-BDAS software is an easy data acquisition software for measuring relatively slow
moving signals where only a mean value is of interest such as temperature, pH, pO2, pCO2, pK+,
mean flow, mean pressure, smooth muscle contraction... under Microsoft® Windows® NT/2000/
or XP operating system. The software is very flexible and user-friendly. It saves the digitized raw
signals on the hard disk and calculates online the mean values of these signals.
The HSE-HA BDAS software can be adapted to virtually any experimental investigation where
slow signals are measured, eg. measuring oxygen consumption of cells in a cell chamber with
a Clark electrode, measuring of up to 16 temperatures, measuring up to 16 pH
values, measuring pH, pO2, pCO2, K+ concentrations in isolated organ experiments, measuring
of static pressures, measuring contraction forces of smooth muscles... During data acquisition
all acquired signals and derived parameters are displayed on the screen.
The configuration of the system is defined in configuration files to reduce the amount of
necessary settings and to ensure a stable and secure system. The user only has to calibrate the
signals and to fix the graphics scaling, all the hardware definitions and the algorithms used are
defined in these configuration files. This reduces the amount of information necessary in the
SOP's and the possibilities of wrong settings. The configuration files can of course be changed
and the software can be used in combination with a set of different configuration files to match
the different experiments.
*BDAS - Basic Data Acquisition System
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA BDAS W for Data Acquisition
The HSE-HA-BDAS software has a maximum of 16 channels, i.e. up to
16 different raw signals can be handled. The assignment of the signals
to the individual channels is determined in the configuration files. The
sample rate, the type of signals and the algorithm used for analysis are
also defined in the configuration file. The arrangement of the graphic
detail (raw signals) and trend (calculated parameters) is defined in
the menu. The user has only to set up which of the available signals he
wants to acquire and display, which of the possible parameters he
wants to evaluate and display; to enter the experimental protocol and
finally to calibrate before he starts the data acquisition.
The HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware for BDAS Software is available
in three versions:
• PLUGSYS Version BS4 73-0161
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301, ROM-DL,
DIM and the cable for connecting to a DIM Data Interface
Module installed in the PLUGSYS basic system case, see
page I28.
• Stand Alone Version BS4 73-0235
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301, cable
and a BNC input box where signals from external amplifiers
can be connected.
• Stand Alone USB Version BS4 73-3330
Signals processed by BDAS:
P
Pressure
Fl
Flow
F
Tension (force)
D
Displacement
T
Temperature
K
Concentrations
pO2
Oxygen partial pressure
pCO2
Carbon dioxyd partial pressure
pH
pH
BDAS is able to calculate from these signals the following parameter.
The standard version includes:
maximum, minimum, mean value
Additionally, formulas can be defined to calculate new parameters
from the parameters above
Hardware Requirements for BDAS:
Both the PLUGSYS and Stand Alone versions require the following
computer hardware:
PC Pentium at least 500 MHz with one free PCI-slot
RAM
128 MB of RAM
Operating System
Windows NT/2000/XP or 64 MB RAM Windows NT
Hard Disk Space
At least 3.2 Gigabytes
Floppy Drive
1.44 MB
CD-ROM Drive
Required
Monitor
17 or 19 in
Backup Media
MO drive, CD recorder or ZIP drive
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
Physiology
Computer
I83
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA BDAS W for Data Acquisition
Menu Description
The BDAS software has an intuitive pull-down menu. The main menu has five items with the corresponding pull-down sub-menus.
Menu ‘File’
Allows you to select an experiment, define a new one, convert and export data into
different formats, and print data and protocol.
Menu ‘Setup’
For calibrating the system, setting up the screens and defining the experimental
protocol and all the parameters necessary for controlling the experiment.
Menu ‘Experiment’
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Starts the data acquisition according to the selected settings, and is used to replay
an experiment stored on disk, recalculate all the parameters of a stored experiment, to view and select data.
I84
Menu ‘Window’ and ‘Help’
In this menu the user can define the different windows used (details,
trend, parameters...) and set the arrangement.
If the user selects the ‘Help’ menu, the software automatically launches
Adobe Acrobat which displays the user’s manual.
Protocol
The user can enter several experimental protocol parameters such as
experimenter’s name, drug used, type of animal used, experiment numbers, SOP
number... The set of parameters to enter is defined in a configuration file.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA BDAS W for Data Acquisition
Signal Calibration
For each signal a two-point calibration must be performed. After reading of the
lower and upper calibration value, the software automatically calculates the resolution and the available measuring range in physiological units.
Signal Scaling
For each signal the user can define whether the signal is used, displayed, on which
graphic page it is displayed, the position on the page, the color and the scaling
(scaling can be modified during acquisition).
Parameter Scaling
Physiology
Similar to the signal presentation, the user can define whether a parameter is
evaluated, displayed, on which graphic page it is displayed, the position on the
page, the color and the scaling (scaling can be modified during acquisition). An
alarm condition can also be defined.
General Settings
Here the user can enter definitions for events, concentrations, cursors and markers. Events and concentrations are used for marking the data recording during the
experiment to report the procedure and to simplify the data reduction after the
experiment. Cursors are used to measure times and amplitudes in the detail screen.
Markers are used for evaluation to select specific points (maxima, minima) in
the trend window.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I85
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA BDAS W for Data Acquisition
Data Acquisition Mode
This is a typical window arrangement for data acquisition.
This screen configuration appears if the user selects “base
adjustment” in the menu ‘Window’. This screen shoot is
representative for an experiment measuring force contraction on smooth muscles.
The Detail screen displays the raw signals for the contraction force.
The Trend screen shows the evolution of the mean contractile force. In this screen we can also see the event lines
which are set before each test drug injection.
The Parameter screen reproduces the actual measured
values in numerical form.
In the Control screen the data acquisition can be held
(paused) or stopped, and the event markers and concentration markers can be set.
Detail Screen
Trend Screen
Parameter Screen
Control Screen
Replay Mode
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
After the experiment the stored signals can be replayed to
analyze single portions of the experiment using cursors or
markers. Cursors can be placed in the detail screen.
I86
Markers can be placed in the trend screen. Here the
markers can be used to permit an easy data reduction e.g.
for dose response curves several markers are set (control
value, dose1, dose2 ...). The calculated values at these
markers can be exported. Data reduction can therefore be
performed very easily.
If a marker is placed, the detail screen shows the raw signal for the corresponding time point. This permits checking the raw signal for a specific event in the trend graph
and correlating both for a better analysis. It is easy to verify whether an event in the trend graph correlates with the
real drug action or with any artifact.
Possible screen configuration during replay.
The screen configuration during replay is the same as during data acquisition, except the control screen which is
not displayed. Due to the Windows operating system it is
possible to create an individual arrangement.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA BDAS W for Data Acquisition
Events, Concentrations, Cursors and Markers
Events and concentration information can be set during the experiment for documentation. To measure manually specific levels or time
values on the raw signals, cursors can be placed in the detail screen.
Markers can be placed in the trend screen for data reduction. For
example, if a dose response experiment has to be evaluated, at least a
control value and one value per concentration are necessary. By setting markers in the trend screen the specific points of interest can be
marked very quickly and easily e.g. one control value and the maximum effect of each concentration. For further statistical evaluation the
values at these marker lines can be exported into an ASCII file which
is suitable for any statistical software or spreadsheet program like
EXCEL® or Quattro Pro®, Origin® or GraphPad®. If a preset marker is
selected, the detail screen shows the raw signal at the same instant.
This permits checking the raw signal for each marker in the trend
graph to correlate both for better analysis. Because of this feature it is
easy to verify if a marker in the trend graph correlates with the real
drug action or with any artifact.
Using Cursors in the Detail Screen
In the screen shown to the left a cursor has been placed. The time and
the values of all acquired signals at the cursor point are displayed in
the small window in the centre. These values also can be exported and
stored in a separate data file. In the trend screen on the right side the
events set during the experiment before a test substance has been
added can be seen.
The main feature of this software is the possibility of data reduction by
placing markers in the replay trend screen. There are two different
marker types available: markers for line selections and markers for
evaluation.
Markers for Line Selection: The marker is placed in the trend
screen. By selecting ‘Experiment’ ‘Selection’ ‘select all with markers’
each data line associated to such a marker is transferred to the selected data set. This allows to define graphically a reduced data set consisting only of the data lines marked by line selection markers.
A new window is
opened. It shows the
exact time where the
marker will be placed.
The marker type to
place is selected or a
new one is defined by
typing in the text on
the keyboard.
The mouse cursor is
placed in the trend
screen exactly on the
location where the
marker should be
located and the left
mouse button is
pressed.
Physiology
Data Reduction or ‘How to Get the Important Data
Lines Out of the Long Data File’
Markers for Evaluation: A set of evaluation marker pairs (Start and
End) for Mean, Maximum and Minimum evaluation are available. A
marker pair defines an area in which the evaluation will take place for
mean, maximum or minimum depending on the pair selected. The
result is a data line containing for each parameter the mean, maximum
or minimum in the defined area. This allows to analyze non synchronized parameters.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I87
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA* BDAS W for Data Acquisition
How to Perform the Data Reduction
In the menu items ‘Experiment Select’ all parameters are displayed in tabular form in the
Window ‘Experiment Data’. With specific commands it is possible to jump in the data set to a
specific marker or time point and select data lines manually. The lines are selected in the
‘Experimental Data’ window and automatically transferred to the lower ‘Selected Data’ window
which only contains the pre-selected data lines. The more common data reduction is realized
by selecting the lines having a marker which have been placed in the trend screen in the replay
mode. By pressing the right mouse button a new window opens. If you choose ‘Select markers’ the data lines where the predefined markers are set will be added to the ‘Selected data’
window. The selected data lines can be exported to spreadsheet software, graphics or statistical software and are processed there.
All selected lines
will be transferred
into the new table.
Selection window
Available Selection Commands:
Select All
All data lines are selected
Select None
All data lines in the ‘Selected data’ Window are erased
Select all With Events
All data lines containing an event are selected
Select all With Markers
All data lines at the instants where markers have been placed in the trend window are
picked out and displayed in the selected data window
Select all With Concentrations All data lines where concentration markers have been set are transferred and displayed in
the selected data window
All selected data lines can be exported for evaluation into statistical programs or spreadsheet
programs such as EXCEL®, Quattro Pro®, Origin® or GraphPad®.
Exporting Data
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
To export experiment data several possibilities are provided using the menu item ‘File’ ‘Export’
On selecting ‘Export’ ‘All data’ all data lines of the experiment with the defined logging rate are
exported into an ASCII file. You are asked for the file name and the folder where you would like to
store your data file.
Selected Data
Using menu item ‘Export’ ‘Selected data’ converts all data lines of the experiment selected under
menu ‘Experiment’ ‘Select’ into a ASCII file. You are asked for the file name and the folder where
you would like to store your data file.
Reduced Data
Using menu item ‘Export’ ‘Reduced data’ converts all data lines of the experiment selected by
the Mean, Maximum and Minimum evaluation into a ASCII file. You are asked for the file name
and the folder where you would like to store your data file.
Cursors
Using menu item ‘Export’ ‘Cursors’ converts all data at the timepoint where a cursor is set in the
detail window into a ASCII file. You are asked for the file name and the folder where you would
like to store your data file. This works only on cursors set in the detail window.
Logfile
Exports the logfile with the timepoints where markers, concentration markers and cursors have
been set into an ASCII file. You are asked for the file name and the folder where you would like to
store your data file
Raw Data
This menu item exports a segment of the raw data file into an ASCII file, for example if you intend
to export five cardiac beats. Before you use this menu item you have to set two cursors named
‘Start_raw’ and ‘End_raw’ at the beginning and at the end of your segment in the replay mode in
the detail screen.
Printout
As in all WINDOWS programs each window can be captured and imported into any text editor
for further documentation and printout. It is also possible to print the experimental protocol
together with the selected data lines
Generating a Report
To generate a report use the menu item ‘File’ ‘Report’. The report is generated as an HTML file,
the Internet explorer is automatically opened. The report contains the experimental protocol
and the selected data.
Example of exported data to Excel
I88
All Data
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE Data Acquisition Hardware PLUGSYS Version
BS4 73-0235
2,569.00 HSE Data Acquisition Hardware Stand Alone Version
BS4 73-3330
3,090.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand Alone Version
BS4 73-1712
3,164.00 Software HSE-HA BDAS
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
PULMODYN® Pennock W
The formula according to Pennock et al. (1979) is as follows:
tan Θ = ω x R x C
Θ = Phase Displacement
ω = 2π x Respiration Rate f
R x C = Time Constant of the Respiratory System
C = V/p = Thoracic Gas Volume (V) / (Patm – 47 mmHg)
The specific airway resistance is therefore obtained as:
Data acquisition software for the investigation of bronchospasmolytically
active substances on conscious animals in the double chamber plethysmograph box, type 855.
From the phase shift between nasal and thoracic flow the following
parameters are calculated: phase shift and specific airway resistance.
During data acquisition all acquired signals and derived parameters
can be displayed on the screen.
The system covers eight channels. This makes it possible to experiment simultaneously on 4 plethysmograph boxes. All 8 signals are
sampled at 1 kHz. This means that each channel is measured 1000
times per second, or measurements on each channel are made once
every millisecond. This permits measuring phase shifts of some milliseconds and calculate from this delay the specific airway resistance.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-1702
6,576.00 Software PULMODYN ‘PENNOCK’
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE Data Acquisition Hardware PLUGSYS Version
BS4 73-0235
2,569.00 HSE Data Acquisition Hardware Stand Alone Version
BS4 73-2705
735.00 Algorithm Advanced Pulmonary Flow IT, ET, AT, TT
BS4 73-2706
586.00 Algorithm ECG RR-I, HR
BS4 73-3409
586.00 Option Blood Pressure Module
The phase displacement is measured at the end of inspiration on the steep
change over to the expiratory phase.
The Software Receives the Following Signals from up to
4 Plethysmograph Boxes:
• Airflow from the Nasal Chamber
• Airflow from the Thoracic Chamber
Optional:
• Blood Pressure
• ECG
From these signals the software calculates the following
parameters online:
From the Pulmonary Air Flow signals:
• Respiration Rate (RR)
• Peak Inspiratory Flow (PIF), Peak Expiratory Flow (PEF)
• Tidal Volume (TV)
Physiology
This software was especially developed for the investigation of bronchospasmolytically active substances on conscious animals. In this
experiment the awake animal is placed into a double chamber plethysmograph box Type 855 (see page F75) and is restricted so that the
head protrudes into the front chamber. The neck is sealed with a soft
diaphragm. The nasal air flow is measured in the front chamber, the
thoracic respiratory flow in the rear chamber. Both measurements are
made with wire-mesh measuring screens and differential pressure
transducers. There is a phase shift between the two respiratory flows
from which the PULMODYN PENNOCK software calculates the specific
airway resistance according to PENNOCK. Data acquisition covers the
following signals: pulmonary air flow in the nasal chamber, pulmonary
air flow in the thoracic chamber. From the flow signal of the thoracic
chamber the following parameters are calculated: respiration rate,
tidal volume, maximal inspiratory flow, maximal expiratory flow.
tan Θ
R x V = (Patm – 47) x 13.6 x –––––
ω [mmH2O x s]
Optional:
• IT (Inspiratory Time), ET (Expiratory Time), AT (Apnea
Time), TT (Total Time), TB (Time of brake), TP (Time of
pause), Airflow at 0.5VT
From the Phase Shift between Nasal and Thoracic
Airflow:
• Phasic Shift in msec (PenSift)
• Specific Airway Resistance (Res)
Optionally from Blood Pressures:
• Systolic, Diastolic, Mean Pressure
• Heart Rate
Optionally from the ECG:
• Heart Rate
• RR-I
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I89
Data Acquisition Software
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
HSE-HA PULMODYN® W for Respiratory Studies
•
16 channel data acquisition software for in vivo or in vitro
respiration experiments
•
For Windows® 98, ME, 2000, XP and NT
•
Derives and presents online the standard parameters for
respiratory studies (TV, Resp. Rate, Resistance,
Conductance, Compliance)
•
possibility of combination with circulatory signals
(e.g. LVP, aortic pressure,aortic flow)
•
In vivo:
- Bronchodilation test and bronchospasmolytic test on
anesthetized animals
- Antiasthmatics test according to Konzett-Roessler
(bronchial overflow measurement) or according to
Einthoven (tracheal pressure measurement)
- Pulmonary air flow
- Tracheal pressure or esophageal pressure
- Arterial pressure or venous pressure
- pO2, pCO2, pH, temperature etc.
•
In vitro:
- Bronchodilation test and bronchospasmolytic test on the
isolated lung
The HSE-HA PULMODYN W software can be adapted to virtually any experimental investigation in respiratory experiments. Acquisition can cover signals such as pulmonary air flow, tracheal pressure or oesophageal pressure, arterial pressure or venous pressure, pO2, pCO2, pH, temperature etc.
Various parameters can be derived from these signals, e.g. tidal volume,
respiration rate, peak inspiratory flow, peak expiratory flow, maximal and
minimal tracheal pressure, resistance, compliance, systolic, diastolic and
mean values for pressures, etc. During data acquisition all acquired signals
and derived parameters can be displayed on the screen.
The HSE-PULMODYN software is available in a basic version which includes
the minimal necessary algorithms for pulmonary mechanics evaluation. It
can be upgraded to a more complex system including all the available algorithms. The configuration of the system is defined in configuration files to
reduce the amount of settings necessary and to ensure a stable and secure
system. The user has only to calibrate the signals and to fix the graphics scaling, all the hardware definitions and the algorithms used are defined in the
configuration files. This reduces the amount of information necessary in the
SOP’s and the possibilities of wrong settings. The configuration files can of
course be changed and the software can be used in combination with a set
of different configuration files to match the different experiments. PULMODYN is a menu-controlled software and employs special algorithms to calculate the standard pulmonary mechanics parameters.
- Pulmonary-vascular studies on the isolated lung
I90
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA PULMODYN® W for Respiratory Studies
The HSE-HA PULMODYN software has a maximum of 16 input channels, i.e. up to 16 different raw signals can be handled. The assignment of the signals to the individual channels is determined in the
configuration files. The sample rate, the type of signals and the algorithm used for analysis are also defined in the configuration file. The
arrangement of the graphic detail (raw signals) and trend (calculated parameters) is defined in the menu. The user has only to set up
which of the available signals he wants to acquire and display, which
of the possible parameters he wants to evaluate and display; to enter
the experimental protocol and finally to calibrate before he starts the
data acquisition.
The HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware for PULMODYN W Software is
available in two versions:
• PLUGSYS Version BS4 73-0161
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and the cable
for connecting to a DIM Data Interface Module installed in the
PLUGSYS basic system case, see page I28
• Stand Alone Version BS4 73-0235
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and a BNC input
box where signals from external amplifiers can be connected.
• Stand Alone USB Version BS4 73-3330
Hardware Requirements for PULMODYN:
Both the PLUGSYS and Stand Alone versions require the following
computer hardware:
Pentium PC at least 500 MHz with one free PCI-slot,
RAM
128 MB of RAM
Operating System
Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT
Hard Disk Space
Floppy Drive
CD-ROM Drive
Required
Monitor
17-19”
Backup Media
MO drive, CD recorder or ZIP drive
Pulmonary Air Flow
Intrapleural Pressure
Perfusion Pressure, venous pressure
Perfusion Flow
pO2, pCO2, pH
Temperature
Lung Weight
The Basic PULMODYN Calculates the Following
Parameters On-Line:
From Pulmonary Air Flow
RespRate, maxInspFl, maxExpFl, TV, dynResistance,
Conductance, dynCompl.
From all Pulmonary Pressures
Maximum, minimum, mean pressure
From Blood Pressures
Systolic, diastolic, mean pressure, npmn, Heart Rate
From Perfusion Flows
Maximum, minimum, mean flow, npmn
From the Pulmonary airflow
Inspiratory time, Expiratory time, Apnea time, Total time
From pO2, pCO2, pH
Mean value
From Temperature & Lung Weight
Mean value
Note: npmn = non pulsatile mean
It is also possible to calculate specific values from these parameters by
writing a formula e.g. the difference between the oesophageal and the
tracheal pressure.
Additional Software Modules:
Algorithm Advanced Pulm Flow
IT (inspiratory time), ET (expiratory time), AT (apnea time),
TT (total time), TB (Time of brake), TP (Time of pause),
Airflow at 0.5VT
With at least 3.2 GB
Module for Blood Pressure
Systolic, diastolic, mean pressure, npmn, Heart Rate
1.44 MB
Module for LVP
LVPsys, LVPedp, dP/dtmax, dP/dtmin, heart rate
Algorithm ECG
RR-I, HR
Commonly Used Signals for In-Vivo Respiratory
Experiments are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Pulmonary Air Flow
Intrapleural Pressure
Tracheal Pressure or Oesophageal Pressure
Arterial Blood Pressure or Venous Blood Pressure (option)
ECG (option)
Temperature
Specific parameters which are not mentioned in this list are available
upon request.
Catalog No.
$
Physiology
Computer
Signals in Isolated Lung Experiments are:
Product
BS4 73-1692
5,482.00 Software HSE-HA PULMODYN W
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE Data Acquisition Hardware PLUGSYS Version
BS4 73-3330
3,090.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand
Alone Version
BS4 73-0235
2,569.00 HSE Data Acquisition Hardware Stand Alone
Version
BS4 73-2705
735.00 Option Advanced Pulmonary Flow Module
BS4 73-3409
586.00 Option Blood Pressure Module
BS4 73-3462
586.00 Option LVP Module
BS4 73-2706
586.00 Option ECG Module
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I91
Data Acquisition Software
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
HSE-HA ISOHEART® W for Isolated Heart Studies
I92
•
16 channel data acquisition software for isolated
heart experiments
•
For Windows® NT, 2000, and XP
•
To measure signals such as: perfusion pressure,
perfusion flow, left ventricular isovolumetric
pressure, aortic pressure, aortic flow, atrial pressure, atrial flow, coronary flow, length measurement, pO2, pCO2, pH, temperature, etc.
•
Easy to use, reduced settings by using configuration files
•
Storage of raw data with possibility for replay.
Complete experiments can be replayed
•
Indication of the measured signals and parameters online in numerical tabular form or graphical
detail and trend windows
•
Data exchange interface by converting the data
into the ASCII delimited format
•
Monitoring of the experimental sequence by
placing event markers and concentration information
•
Very easy graphical selection of specific data
points by cursors for evaluation, data reduction
and export
•
Export of a raw data sequence into ASCII
delimited format
The HSE-HA ISOHEART software for Windows can be adapted to virtually any
experimental investigation of isolated hearts (according to Langendorff or
Working Heart). Acquisition can cover signals such as perfusion pressure, perfusion flow, left ventricular pressure, aortic pressure, aortic flow, atrial pressure,
atrial flow, coronary flow, segment length or wall thickness measurement, pO2,
pCO2, pH, temperature, etc. Various parameters can be derived from these signals,
(e.g., systolic, diastolic, mean and rate (frequency) values for pressures); dP/dt;
contractility index CI; minimal, maximal, and mean flows, etc. During data acquisition all acquired signals and derived parameters are stored on the hard disk and
can be displayed on the screen.
The HSE-HA ISOHEART software is available in a basic version which includes the
minimal necessary algorithms. It can be upgraded to a more complex system
including all the available algorithms. The configuration of the system is defined
in configuration files to reduce the amount of settings necessary and to ensure a
stable and secure system. The user has only to calibrate the signals and to fix the
graphics scaling. All the hardware definitions and the algorithms used are defined
in the configuration files. This reduces the amount of information necessary in the
SOP's and the possibilities of wrong settings. The configuration files can of course
be changed and the software can be used in combination with a set of different
configuration files to match the different experiments. ISOHEART is a
menu-controlled software and employs special algorithms to calculate the
standard parameters.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA ISOHEART® W for Isolated Heart Studies
The HSE-HA ISOHEART W software has a maximum of 16 channels, i.e.
up to 16 different raw signals can be handled. The assignment of the signals to the individual channels is determined in the configuration files.
The sample rate, the type of signals and the algorithm used for analysis
are also defined in the configuration file. The arrangement of the graphic detail (raw signals) and trend (calculated parameters) is defined in
the menu. The user has only to set up which of the available signals he
wants to acquire and display, which of the possible parameters he wants
to evaluate and display; to enter the experimental protocol and finally to
calibrate before he starts the data acquisition.
HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware for ISOHEART Software is
available in three versions:
• PLUGSYS Version BS4 73-0161
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and the cable
for connecting to a DIM Data Interface Module installed in the
PLUGSYS basic system case, see page I28.
• Stand Alone Version BS4 73-0235
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and a BNC input
box where signals from external amplifiers can be connected.
• Stand Alone USB Version BS4 73-3330
Hardware Requirements for ISOHEART:
Both the PLUGSYS and Stand Alone Versions require the following
computer hardware:
From all pressures:
systolic, diastolic and mean pressure
From all flows:
mean, maximum and minimum flow
From distance:
maximum, minimum and amplitude (max - min)
From electrogram:
heart rate
From pO2, pCO2 and pH: mean value
For Specific Applications, Software Modules with More
Parameters are available:
Advanced LVP:
Tau, Time to Peak, Relaxation Time, Contractility Index
CI=dp/dtmax/P, Ejection Time
Advanced flow:
End Systolic Flow ESFL, End Diastolic Flow EDFL
MAP module:
Max, Min, Plateau, Amp, Rate, ±dv/dt, duration at 10% of
monophasic action potentials
Dimension module:
end-systolic length ESL, end-diastolic length EDL, +dL/dt, -dL/dt
Software Options for Controlling External Devices:
Control of programmable stimulator PSM
Control of pretention using electrical controlled verniers
Triggering of an external stimulator
Catalog No.
$
Product
2,569.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware Stand
Alone version
BS4 73-3330
3,090.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand
Alone Version
17-19”
BS4 73-0162
5,277.00 Software HSE-HA ISOHEART W
MO drive, CD recorder or ZIP drive
BS4 73-0237
734.00 Option LVP Advanced Module
BS4 73-0238
586.00 Option Flow Advanced Module
128 MB of RAM
Operating System
Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT
Hard Disk Space
With at least 3.2 GB
Floppy Drive
1.44 MB
CD-ROM Drive
Required
Monitor
Backup Media
Commonly Used Signals for Langendorff Preparation are:
isovolumetric LVP or contraction force
perfusion pressure
coronary flow
WT
wall thickness or left ventricle diameter
EG
electrogram
pO2a /e
oxygen partial pressure in the affluent / effluent
pH
pH in the effluent
Commonly Used Signals for Working Heart Preparation are:
PrP
preload pressure
AoP
aortic pressure (afterload)
LVP
left Ventricular Pressure, measured with tip catheter
AF
aortic flow
CO
cardiac output (flow into left atrium)
WT
wall thickness or left ventricle diameter
EG
electrogram
pO2a / e
oxygen partial pressure in the affluent / effluent
pH
pH in the effluent
BS4 73-2715
BS4 73-2716
2,562.00 Option Monophasic Action Potential Module
735.00 Option Dimensions Module
BS4 73-0224
BS4 73-2799
1,102.00 Option Stimulator Control Module
641.00 PV-Loop Module
Conductance Signal, LVP Signal: Acquire and view PV
loops real time and during experiment replay. Select
and export PV loop segments to Millar PVAN software
for further analysis.
BS4 73-2900
1,344.00 Strip Chart Print Option for HSE-HA DAQ Software
Physiology
BS4 73-0235
RAM
CF
LVPsys, LVPdia, LVPEDP, dLVP/dtmin, dLVP/dtmax, heart rate, mean
pressure
1,999.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware
PLUGSYS version
Pentium PC at least 500 MHz with one free PCI-slot,
PP
From LVP signal:
BS4 73-0161
Computer
LVP
Standard ISOHEART Software is able to Calculate Following
Parameters Online:
It is also possible to acquire other signals (e.g., temperature);
maximum is 16 signals.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I93
Data Acquisition Software
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
HSE-HA HAEMODYN® W for Haemodynamic Studies
I94
•
16-channel data acquisition software for haemodynamic
experiments
•
For Windows® NT, 2000, and XP
•
To measure signals such as left ventricular pressure, aortic
pressure, aortic flow, atrial pressure, atrial flow, coronary
flow, length measurement, pO2, pCO2, pH, temperature, etc.
•
Easy to use, reduced settings by using configuration files
•
Storage of raw data with possibility for replay — complete
experiments can be replayed
•
Indication of the measured signals and parameters online in
numerical tabular form or graphical detail and trend windows
•
Allows data exchange interface by converting the data into
the ASCII delimited format
•
Monitors the experimental sequence by placing event
markers and concentration information
•
Very easy graphical selection of specific data points by
cursors for evaluation, data reduction and export
•
Export of a raw data sequence into ASCII delimited format
The HSE-HA HAEMODYN software can be adapted to virtually any
experimental investigation for haemodynamic experiments.
Acquisition can cover signals such as left ventricular pressure, aortic
pressure, aortic flow, atrial pressure, atrial flow, coronary flow, segment length and wall thickness measurement, pO2, pCO2, pH, temperature, etc. Various parameters can be derived from these signals, e.g.
systolic, diastolic, mean and rate (frequency) values for pressures,
dp/dt, contractility index CI, minimal, maximal, and mean flows, etc.
During data acquisition, all acquired signals and derived parameters
are stored on the hard disc and can be displayed on the screen.
The HSE-HA HAEMODYN software is available in a basic version which
includes the minimal necessary algorithms that can be upgraded to a
more complex system including all the available algorithms. The configuration of the system is defined in configuration files to reduce the
amount of settings necessary and to ensure a stable and secure system.
The user only needs to calibrate the signals and fix the graphics scaling. All the hardware definitions and algorithms used are defined in
the configuration files. This reduces the amount of information necessary in the SOP's and the possibility of wrong settings. The configuration files can be changed and the software used in combination with a
set of different configuration files to match the different experiments.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA HAEMODYN® W for Haemodynamic Studies
HAEMODYN is a menu-controlled software and employs special
algorithms to calculate the standard haemodynamic parameters.
The HSE-HA HAEMODYN software has a maximum of 16 channels, i.e.
up to 16 different raw signals can be handled. The assignment of the signals to the individual channels is determined in the configuration files.
The sample rate, the type of signals and the algorithm used for analysis
are also defined in the configuration file. The arrangement of the
graphic detail (raw signals) and trend (calculated parameters) is
defined in the menu. The user has only to set up which of the available
signals he wants to acquire and display, which of the possible parameters he wants to evaluate and display, enter the experimental protocol,
and finally calibrate before he starts the data acquisition.
The HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware for
HAEMODYN W software is available in two versions:
• PLUGSYS Version BS4 73-0161
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and the cable
for connecting to a DIM Data Interface Module installed in the
PLUGSYS basic system case, see page I28.
• Stand Alone Version BS4 73-0235
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and a BNC
input box where signals from external amplifiers can be connected.
• Stand Alone USB Version BS4 73-3330
Hardware requirements for HAEMODYN:
Both the PLUGSYS and stand alone versions require the following
computer hardware:
Pentium PC at least 500 MHz with one free PCI-slot,
RAM
128 MB of RAM
Operating System
Windows 2000/XP or Windows NT
Hard Disk Space
With at least 3.2 GB
Floppy Drive
1.44 MB
CD-ROM Drive
Required
Monitor
17-19 in
Backup Media
MO drive, CD recorder or ZIP drive
Commonly used signals on haemodynamic
experiments are:
LVP
Left Ventricular Pressure
AP
Arterial Pressure
VP
Venous Pressure
CF
Coronary Flow
AF
Arterial Flow
WT
Wall Thickness or Left Ventricle Diameter
ECG
Electrocardiogram
pO2
Oxygen Partial Pressure
pCO2
Carbon Dioxide Partial Pressure pH
From LVP Signal
LVPsys, LVPdia, LVPEDP, dP/dtmin, dP/dtmax, Heart Rate, Mean Pressure
From All Pressures
Systolic, Diastolic and Mean Pressure, Heart Rate
From All Flows
Mean, Max. and Min. Flow
From Distance
Max., Min. and Amplitude (Max-Min)
From Electrogram
Only the Heart Rate
From pO2 Signals
Mean Value
From pCO2 Signals
Mean Value
From pH Signals
Mean Value
It is also possible to calculate specific values from these parameters
by writing a formula (e.g., the ratio of dP/dtmin / dP/dtmax or LVPEDP /
heart weight, etc.).
Optional software modules are available for:
LVP Advanced
Tau, Time to Peak (Contractility Time), Relaxation Time and
Contractility Index CI = dP/dtmax / P
Flow Advanced
Endsystolic Flow, Enddiastolic Flow
Respiration Module
Respiratory Rate, Max. Inspiratory Flow, Max. Expiratory Flow,
Tidal Volume
MAP Module
Max, Min, Plateau, Amp, Rate, +dv/dt, duration at 10% of
MAP
Dimensions Module End-systolic length, end-diastolic length, +dL/dt, - dL/dt
Specific parameters which are not mentioned in this list are available
by special order. Please call Harvard Apparatus Technical Customer
Service for more details.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-1690
4,935.00 Software HSE-HA HAEMODYN W
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware
PLUGSYS Version
BS4 73-0235
2,569.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware
Stand Alone Version
BS4 73-3330
3,090.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand
Alone Version
BS4 73-0237
BS4 73-0238
BS4 73-0239
BS4 73-2715
BS4 73-2716
BS4 73-2799
BS4 73-2900
Physiology
Computer
The basic version of HAEMODYN calculates the
following parameters online:
734.00 Optional LVP Advanced Software Module
586.00 Optional Flow Advanced Software Module
1,102.00 Optional Respiration Software Module
2,562.00 Monophasic Action Potential (MAP) Module
Max, Min, Plateau, Amp, Rate, +dv/dt, duration at 10%
of MAP
735.00 Dimensions Module
End-systolic length, end-diastolic length, +dL/dt,
-dL/dt
641.00 PV-Loop Module
Conductance Signal, LVP Signal: Acquire and view PV
loops real time and during experiment replay. Select
and export PV loop segments to Millar PVAN software
for further analysis.
1,344.00 Strip Chart Print Option for HSE-HA DAQ Software
It is also possible to acquire other signals such as temperature.
The maximum number of signals is 16.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I95
Data Acquisition Software
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
HSE-HA ACAD® W for Isolated Tissue Studies
I96
The HSE-HA ACAD software can be adapted to virtually any experimental investigation in tissue
bath experiments. It is possible to acquire signals from isotonic (displacement) or isometric
(force) measurements. The isotonic displacement measurement is used on smooth muscles,
for example on ileum, ductus deferens, lung strips, also bladder... Isometric force measurement is used with tracheal muscle, atrium, papillary muscle, aortic rings, veins or other vessel
rings. Experiments on spontaneously beating or electrically stimulated tissues are also possible. Various parameters can be derived from these signals depending on the model used.
During data acquisition all acquired signals and derived parameters are stored on the hard disc
and can be displayed graphically on the screen.
The HSE-HA ACAD software is available in a basic version which includes the minimal necessary algorithms to evaluate the resting tension. This version can be upgraded to a more complex system including all the available algorithms. The configuration of the system is defined in
configuration files to reduce the settings necessary and to ensure a stable and secure system.
The user has only to calibrate the signals and to fix the graphics scaling, all the hardware definitions and the algorithms used are defined in the configuration files. This reduces the amount
of information necessary in the standard operating procedures and the possibilities of wrong
settings. The configuration files can of course be changed and the software can be used in combination with a set of different configuration files to match the different experiments.
The ACAD software can control preload adjustment and flushing as well as data acquisition and
calculation. It was developed for use with our universal setup for isolated organ studies. It can
also be used with any existing manually-operated tissue bath setup. It is possible to use ACAD
only for data acquisition without controlling or with full controlling in order to automate all
routine operations and provide full processing and printing facilities for the results.
The HSE-HA ACAD software has a maximum of 16 channels, i.e. up to 16 different raw signals
can be handled. The assignment of the signals to the individual channels is determined in the
configuration files. The sample rate, the type of signals and the algorithm used for analysis are
also defined in the configuration file. The arrangement of the graphic detail (raw signals) and
trend (calculated parameters) is defined in the menu. The user has only to set up which of the
available signals he wants to acquire and display, which of the possible parameters he wants to
evaluate and display; to enter the experimental protocol and finally to calibrate before he starts
the data acquisition. The ACAD software operates with the PLUGSYS hardware only!
•
16-channel data acquisition software
for isolated tissue studies
•
For Windows® NT, 2000, XP
•
To measure isometric or isotonic
tissue contractions
•
Can handle smooth muscle as well
as beating or electrically stimulated
muscle
•
Possibilities of controlling electrical
stimulation, pretension adjustment
and flushing
•
Easy to use, reduced settings by
using configuration files
•
Storage of raw data with possibility
for replay; complete experiments
can be replayed
•
Indication of the measured signals
and parameters online in numerical
tabular form or graphical detail and
trend windows
•
Data exchange interface by
converting the data into the ASCII
delimited format
•
Monitoring of the experimental
sequence by placing event markers
and concentration information
•
Very easy graphical selection of
specific data points by cursors for
evaluation, data reduction and
export
•
Export of a raw data sequence into
ASCII delimited format
The HSE-HA Data Acquisition
Hardware for ACAD Software is
available in three versions:
• PLUGSYS Version
This version consists of the PCI A/D
board DT301 and the cable for connecting to a DIM Data Interface
Module installed in the PLUGSYS
basic system case, see page I28
• Stand Alone Version
This version consists of the PCI A/D
board DT301 and a BNC input box
where signals from external amplifiers can be connected
• USB Stand Alone Version
This version consists of the 16 channel USB A/D converter box with BNC
inputs and USB cable
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA ACAD® W for Isolated Tissue Studies
Hardware Requirements for ACAD:
Both the PLUGSYS and Stand Alone versions require the following
computer hardware:
Computer
PC Pentium, at least 500 MHz with one free PCI-slot
RAM
128 MB of RAM
Operating System
Windows 2000/XP, 64 MB RAM NT
Hard Disk Space
At least 3.2 GB
Floppy Drive
1.44 MB
CD-ROM Drive
Required
Monitor
17-19”
Backup Media
MO drive, CD recorder or ZIP drive
For computer-controlled applications it is necessary to have a
PLUGSYS Maincase and the PLUGSYS Version of the Data Acquisition
Hardware with DIM-D extension. The PLUGSYS Maincase can receive
the Transducer Amplifiers TAM-A. The housing takes also the
Programmable Stimulator Modules PSM or the PPG Module for triggering an external Stimulator. In addition to these modules an Output
Driver Module ODM is used to control the pumps and valves via an
Extension Unit. This Extension Unit contains the electronics to switch
pumps, valves and automatic vernier controls.
• Manual Control Box MCB for manual draining or refilling of
the organ bath or to adjust preload manually
• HSE-HA Flushing Unit with pumps and valves to drain and
refill the organ bath
• Motor Vernier Control Type 850/E for isometric measurements for each organ can be used to set preload automatically
• Resting tension
Catalog No.
$
Latency Period LP
Response Duration RD
Peak Duration PD
Product
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware PLUGSYS
Version
BS4 73-0235
2,569.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware Stand Alone
Version
BS4 73-3330
3,090.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand
Alone Version
BS4 73-1688
4,022.00 Software HSE-HA ACAD W
BS4 73-1715
1,463.00 Option Beating Tissue Module
BS4 73-1703
2,194.00 Option Beating and Stimulated Tissue Module
BS4 73-0224
1,102.00 Software Module to HSE-HA Software for PSM and
PPG Control
BS4 73-1705
1,828.00 Option Resting Tension (Preload) Module
BS4 73-1687
1,828.00 Option Flushing Control Module
The option for beating tissues additionally calculates the
following parameters:
• Amplitude, Rate, ±dF/dt
Physiology
The basic version of HSE-ACAD for smooth muscles calculates
the following parameter:
dF/dtmin
Contraction Time CT
Relaxation Time RT
Resting Tension
Amplitude
dF/dtmax
The advanced version for stimulated beating tissues additionally calculates the following parameters:
• Amplitude, Rate, ±dF/dt, Contraction time CT, Relaxation
time RT, Response duration RD, Peak duration PD, Latency
period LP
This version can be used for beating tissues and stimulated beating
tissues such as atrium or papillary muscle. To calculate the Latency
Period computer-controlled stimulation of the tissue is necessary. It is
possible to use the HSE-HA Programmable Stimulator PSM or to trigger an external stimulator using a PPG module.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I97
Data Acquisition Software
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
NEW
I98
HSE-HA NEURODYN for Neurologic Studies
Description
•
16-channel data acquisition software for Neurologic
experiments For Windows®
•
To measure and evaluate signals such as EEG, aortic and
venous blood pressure, aortic blood flow, pO2, pCO2, pH,
temperature, etc.
•
Can be extended to other haemodynaic and respiratory
parameters
•
Analysis of somatosensory evoked potentials and cerebral
autoregulation as option available
•
Easy to use, reduced settings by using configuration files
•
Storage of raw data with possibility for replay — complete
experiments can be replayed
•
Indication of the measured signals and parameters online in
numerical tabular form or graphical detail and trend windows
•
Allows data exchange interface by converting the data into
the ASCII delimited format
•
Monitors the experimental sequence by placing event
markers and concentration information
•
Very easy graphical selection of specific data points by
cursors for evaluation, data reduction and export
•
Export of a raw data sequence into ASCII delimited format
The HSE-HA NEURODYN software can be adapted to virtually any
experimental investigation for neurologic experiments. Acquisition
can cover signals such as EEG, aortic and venous blood pressure,
aortic flow, pO2, pCO2, pH, temperature, etc. It can be extended to
many other circulation or respiratory signals. Various parameters
can be derived from these signals, e.g. systolic, diastolic, mean and
heart rate, minimal, maximal, and mean flows, etc. During data
acquisition, all acquired signals and derived parameters are stored
on the hard disc and can be displayed on the screen. EEG analysis
using FFT is done in the replay mode.
Dedicated options for controlling and evaluating somatosensoric evoked
potentials as well as cerebral autoregulation (or both) are available.
The HSE-HA NEURODYN software is available in a basic version which
includes the minimal necessary algorithms that can be upgraded to a
more complex system including all the available algorithms. The configuration of the system is defined in configuration files to reduce the
amount of settings necessary and to ensure a stable and secure system.
The user only needs to calibrate the signals and fix the graphics scaling.
All the hardware definitions and algorithms used are defined in the configuration files. This reduces the amount of information necessary in the
SOP's and the possibility of wrong settings. The configuration files can
be changed and the software used in combination with a set of different
configuration files to match the different experiments.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Software
HSE-HA NEURODYN for Neurologic Studies
NEURODYN is a menu-controlled software and employs special algorithms to calculate the standard parameters. The HSE-HA NEURODYN
software has a maximum of 16 channels, i.e. up to 16 different raw
signals can be handled. The assignment of the signals to the individual channels is determined in the configuration files. The sample
rate, the type of signals and the algorithm used for analysis are also
defined in the configuration file. The arrangement of the graphic
detail (raw signals) and trend (calculated parameters) is defined in
the menu. The user has only to set up which of the available signals
he wants to acquire and display, which of the possible parameters he
wants to evaluate and display, enter the experimental protocol, and
finally calibrate before he starts the data acquisition.
The HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware for NEURODYN
software is available in two versions:
• PLUGSYS Version BS4 73-0161
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and the cable
for connecting to a DIM Data Interface Module installed in the
PLUGSYS basic system case, see page I28
• Stand Alone Version BS4 73-0235
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and a BNC input
box where signals from external amplifiers can be connected.
• Stand Alone USB Version BS4 73-3330
Hardware requirements for NEURODYN:
Both the PLUGSYS and stand alone versions require the following
computer hardware:
Optional software modules are available for:
• Somatosensory stimulation control and evaluation
• Cerebral autoregulation control and evaluation
• Other cardiovascular signals
- LVP module: LVPsys, LVPdia, LVPEDP, dP/dtmin,
dP/dtmax, Heart Rate, Mean Pressure
- LVP Advanced module: Tau, Time to Peak
(Contractility Time), Relaxation Time and Contractility
Index CI = dP/dtmax / P
- Flow Advanced module: Endsystolic Flow,
Enddiastolic Flow
• Respiration Module: Respiratory Rate, Max. Inspiratory Flow,
Max. Expiratory Flow, Tidal Volume
Specific parameters which are not mentioned in this list are available
by special order. Please call Harvard Apparatus Technical Customer
Service for more details.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-3004
8,788.00 Software HSE-HA NEURODYN
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware PLUGSYS
Version
BS4 73-0235
2,569.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware Stand Alone
Version
BS4 73-3330
3,090.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand
Alone Version
BS4 73-3526
call
Optional SEP Control and Evaluation Module
BS4 73-3527
call
Optional Cerebral Autoregulation Control and
Evaluation Module
BS4 73-3462
BS4 73-0237
BS4 73-0238
BS4 73-0239
1,398.00 Optional LVP Module
734.00 Optional LVP Advanced Software Module
586.00 Optional Flow Advanced Software Module
Physiology
• PENTIUM III PC, 500 MHz or more with one free PCI slot
• RAM 128 MB or better 256 Mbytes
• Hard disk space – at least 20 GB
• 19 inch standard monitor or 17-18 inch flat panel monitor
• Floppy Drive 1.44 Mbytes, CD-ROM drive
• Operating System Windows® NT/2000 or XP
• For data backup a CD-recorder (burner)
Commonly used signals on neurologic
experiments are:
• EEG Electroencephalogram
• AP Arterial Pressure
• VP Venous Pressure
• AF Arterial Blood Flow
It is also possible to acquire other signals such as temperature. The
maximum number of signals is 16.
- Bandpass Filter display and evaluation for Alpha, Beta,
Theta and Delta wave activity
1,102.00 Optional Respiration Software Module
The basic version of NEURODYN calculates the
following parameters:
online:
• From All Pressure signals: Systolic, Diastolic and Mean
Pressure, Heart Rate
• From All Flows signals: Mean, Max. and Min. Flow
After the experiment in replay mode:
• From EEG:
- FFT evaluation with power spectrum
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I99
Data Acquisition Software
NEW
EPES Electrophysiology Evaluation Software
Acquired signals: Intracellular Action Potential, Contraction Force.
Various parameters can be derived from these
signals:
Calculated Parameters from AP:
•
•
•
•
•
CT Conduction Time
TOP Take Off Potential
AMP amplitude, dV/dtmax maximum rate of depolarisation
EOP Potential after the end of action potential
APD90, APD75, APD50, APD25, APD10 (Signal duration @
90, 75, 50, 25, 10%)
Calculated parameters from contraction
force are:
Two channel data acquisition software for electrophysiologic studies
on papillary muscles or purkinje fibres in a horizontal tissue bath
(e.g. HSE Steiert papillary bath).
The HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware for EPES software is available in three versions:
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
• PLUGSYS Version BS4 73-0161
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and the cable
for connecting to a DIM Data Interface Module installed in the
PLUGSYS basic system case, see page I28
I100
• Stand Alone Version BS4 73-0235
This version consists of the PCI A/D board DT301 and a BNC
input box where signals from external amplifiers can be connected.
• Stand Alone USB Version BS4 73-3330
Hardware requirements for EPES:
Both the PLUGSYS and stand alone versions require the following
computer hardware:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PENTIUM III PC, 500 MHz or more with one free PCI slot
RAM 128 MB or better 256 Mbytes
Hard disk space – at least 20 GB
19 inch standard monitor or 17-18 inch flat panel monitor
Floppy Drive 1.44 Mbytes, CD-ROM drive
Operating System Windows® NT/2000 or XP
For data backup a CD-recorder (burner)
• LP Latency period
• RT Resting Tension
• DevF Developed Force
• dF /dtmax and dF/dtmin
• RD Response Duration
Stimulator control can be added
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 73-3004
8,788.00 Software HSE-HA NEURODYN
BS4 73-0161
1,999.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware PLUGSYS
Version
BS4 73-0235
2,569.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware Stand Alone
Version
BS4 73-3330
3,090.00 HSE-HA Data Acquisition Hardware, USB Stand
Alone Version
BS4 73-3318
BS4 73-3497
call
HSE-HA EPES Software
651.00 Software STIMULUS for PSM and PPG Control
(requires Hardware extension)
MEA Module, see page I42, and Steiert Bath, see
page K14, are required for a complete system.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems–RatPaak
NEW
RatPaak Biotelemetry System
The 50 foot range allows animals to be in larger cages that more closely resemble their natural environment. The remote monitoring and realtime data viewing capabilities of the RatPaak offer new opportunities for
researchers and scientists in the wireless monitoring of lab animals. A
flexible research tool by design, the RatPaak offers a new, low cost monitoring solution for unrestrained animals, simplifying traditional monitoring applications.
Specifications
•
Monitors EEG, EMG,
ECG, EOG or PSG in small
rodents
•
Wireless 50 ft range
allows animals to remain
unteathered during data
acquisition
•
Monitors animals during
activities such as
treadmill, metabolic cages
and rota-rods
The RatPaak is a new low noise
two-channel wireless data acquisition system used to monitor physiological parameters such as electroencephalogram (EEG), electromyogram (EMG), electrocardiogram (ECG), electrooculogram
(EOG), or polysomnography
(PSG) in small laboratory animals
that weigh 100 grams or more.
Self-contained system
with steel spring strain
reliefs/cable protectors –
no special cages needed
The receiver provides real-time viewing of signal data by sending data
to a receiver attached to the serial port of a personal computer. Data
can be viewed using BioCapture software and simultaneously saved to
the PC hard drive. ASCII conversion tools can be utilized to provide data
analysis in software packages such as MATLAB®, LabVIEW™, and Excel.
The RatPaak biotelemetry system can take advantage of multiple sensor
technologies to monitor up to two channels of EEG, EMG, and ECG, or
EOG. Please specify which signals you desire to monitor.
Programmability at the time of manufacture allows various applications
to be integrated into one system, allowing for customization for the number of input channels, sampling rates, filters, gains and RF frequencies
according to your research needs.
The RatPaak’s submicrovolt noise level allows accurate EEG recording.
The radio transmitter means that your animals no longer need to be tethered. This allows behaviors such as feeding, nesting, sleeping, and sexual activity to be observed, without having the animal wired to a cage.
34 g (1.2 oz)
Data Transmission Range
Stationary: ~up to 15 m (50 feet)
Operating Conditions:
Humidity
Temperature
25% to 95% (non-condensing)
10 to 50 °C (50 to 122 °F)
Rodent Vest
Nylon-lycra
Receiver:
Dimensions, (without antenna)
Weight
Antenna
Power Supply
Power Consumption
Cable Interface
Case Material
Receiver Cable
8.9 x 5.1 x 2.4 cm (3.5 x 2.0 x 1.0 in)
77 g (2.7 oz)
7.6 cm (3.0 in) flexible
2 pin AC/DC adapter plug, 6 ft cord length -or9 V Alkaline Battery
52 mA @ 9.0 V
9-pin jack connects directly to PC RS232 port
via serial cable
ABS
3 ft 9-pin serial port cable
Transmitter:
Dimensions, (without antenna)
Weight, (without batteries)
Number of Input Channels
Resolution
Noise
Sampling Rate
Transmitter RF Band
Transmitter Power
Power Source
Power Consumption
Input Impedance
Case Material
3.3 x 2.3 x 0.76 cm (1.3 x 0.9 x 0.3 in)
12 g (0.42 oz)
2
12 bits
< 1 µV RMS
960 Samples per second on each channel
902 to 928 MHz (ISM band)
≤ 1 mW
Batteries (see Battery Choice)
~15 mA @ 3.0 V
10 MΩ
Silicone
Input Selection:
Application
EEG
EKG
EMG
Range
±1 mV
±5 mV
±50 mV
Bandwidth
0.1 to 70 Hz
0.1 to 150 Hz
1.0 to 480 Hz
Battery Choice:
Battery
CR2
PR3355
675 (3 cells)
NH 500
Type
Lithium
Zinc-Air
Zinc-Air
Nickel
Hours
~ 33
~ 35
~ 14
~8
Software:
Compatibility
Estimated Recorded File
RatPaak Components
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7160
Size (OD x L)
~ 1.6 x 3.2 cm
~ 3.3 x 0.64 cm
~ 2.9 x 0.48 cm
~ 3.5 x 0.64 cm
Physiology
The system consists of a small
compact integrated transmitter
with a form factor that it can be
used on rats and other small ani• Submicrovolt noise level
mals. The device, which includes
is excellent for EEG
a state-of-the-art analog to digital
(A/D) converter, miniature
MicroSynth™ RF radio transmitter, and a microprocessor, weighs
about one-quarter of an ounce and can transmit signals to a nearby
receiver up to a distance of 50 feet.
•
Weight (all parts & accessories)
Weight
11.0 g
14.8 g
5.1 g
19.4 g
PC with Pentium/MMX 200 MHz or higher
processor (or equivalent); requires RS-232 serial
port, Microsoft Windows 95, 98, NT, Me, 2000 or
XP (32 MB installed memory), 50 MB free hard
disk space (100 MB recommended)
~172.8 KB/min/channel
The RatPaak System includes the following
components: Transmitter, Receiver, Software, User
Guide, Battery (Coin Cell 1.4 V 600 mAH), 9 V
Battery Adapter, 3 ft Serial Data Cable, 6 ft Serial
Extension Cable, AC Power Adapter, Rodent
Vest/Harness, 9 Volt Battery and Configuration File.
$
Product
3,100.00 RatPaak Biotelemetry System
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I101
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Which system is best for you?
NEW
MP150 Starter System
The NEW MP150 High-speed data acquisition system utilizes the very latest in Ethernet technology. The MP150 is compliant with any Ethernet
(DLC) ready PC or Macintosh. This next generation product takes full
advantage of cutting edge technology. Access multiple MP150 devices
located on a local area network and record data to any computer connected to the same LAN. Record and analyze your data at an aggregate
sample rate of 400,000 samples per second. Use variable sample rates
to maximize storage efficiency and to guarantee you won’t miss a thing.
See what the MP150 and AcqKnowledge software can do for you!
Performance
Function
MP150 system
MP100 System
Recording Speed
High
Medium
Aggregate Sampling Rate
10kHz or greater
10kHz or less
Cardio-Pulmonary
Measurements
Excellent
Excellent
Neuro-Physiology
Measurements
Excellent
Good (contact
BIOPAC for details)
Direct LAN Operation
Yes (Ethernet)
No (USB)
Interactive Measurements
during recording
Excellent
Good (contact
BIOPAC for details)
Running multiple applications Excellent
Excellent
On-line Analysis
Excellent
Excellent
Macintosh OS
8.6 or better
8.6 or better
Windows OS
98, 98SE, NT 4.0,
2000
98, 98SE, 2000
The new MP150 offers Ethernet-ready data acquisition and analysis.
Record multiple channels with differing sample rates. Record at
speeds up to 400kHz (aggregate). Place one or more MP150
Systems in a local area network (LAN). Use any PC in the LAN to
record from any MP150 System in the LAN. Includes:
• MP150ACE
• ETHSW1
• AC150A
• UIM100C
• CBLETH1 (2) ACKv3.7 for PC (Windows) or Macintosh
Recommended configuration: MP150 System and local network connected to the computer’s Ethernet port via the ETHSW1 Ethernet
Switch. This configuration provides optimal performance when connecting both an MP150 System and a network to the computer. In
cases where the computer has no Ethernet port, an industry standard
PCI Ethernet card or adapter is required.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specifications
Analog Inputs:
Number of Channels
Input Voltage Range
A/D Resolution
Accuracy (% of FSR)
Input Impedance
16
±10 V
16 Bits
±0.003
1.0 MΩ
Analog Outputs:
Number of Channels
Output Voltage Range
D/A Resolution
Accuracy (% of FSR)
Output Drive Current
Output Impedance
2
±10 V
MP150: 16 bits, MP100: 12 Bits
MP150: ±0.003, MP100: ±0.02
±5 mA maximum
100 Ω
Device Specific Specs MP150
Max Sample Rate:
MP Internal Memory
PC Memory/Disk
200K samples/sec (400K aggregate)
200K samples/sec (400K aggregate)
Internal Buffer Size
6M samples
Serial Interface Type/Rate
Ethernet: DLC type II (10M bits/sec)
Transmission Type
Ethernet (10/100 Base T)
Maximum Cable Length
100 m (Ethernet cable)
Power Requirements
12 VDC @ 2 amp (uses AC150A)
Dimensions
10 x 11 x 19 cm
Weight
1.0 kg
Compatibility:
Mac
PC
Ethernet Interface
System 8.6 or better
Windows 98, 98SE, 2000, NT 4.0
Catalog No.
I102
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-3732
4,995.00 MP150WSW MP150 Systems for PC
BS4 72-3733
4,995.00 MP150WS
MP150 Systems for Macintosh
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
AcqKnowledge Software & Site
Licenses for MP Systems
One copy of AcqKnowledge software is included with each MP Starter
System. The software can be used with other programs and includes
extensive on-screen help. The Site License program permits the purchase of a Site License for a specified number of software copies. Each
Site License includes one software operations manual and software
media. Purchase of a BIOPAC Site License does not obviate the requirement to purchase the appropriate software package for each computer
on which BIOPAC hardware is installed. For network installations, the
relevant number of copies required is the number of machines upon
which the software will be used. The Site License program is for educational institutions only and is subject for qualification.
Use the AcqKnowledge software to analyze and display data recorded
from third-party data acquisition products. Open the data in a Text
format, set the horizontal axis to the desired units and analyze
your results.
MP100 Starter System
The MP100 system offers USB-ready data acquisition and analysis.
Record multiple channels with differing sample rates. Record at
speeds up to 70 kHz (one-shot) or 16 kHz (aggregate to disk).
Includes:
• 2-9
• 10-24
• 25-99
• 100-249
Please call for current pricing on site licenses.
• MP100ACE
• CBLS100
• USB1W (PC) or USB1M (Mac) • ACKv3.7 for PC (Windows)
or Macintosh
• UIM100C
•
AC100A
• CBLSERA
Recommended configuration: MP100 System connected to the computer’s USB port via the USB1W (PC) or USB1M (Macintosh)
Adapter. In cases where the computer has no USB port, an industry
standard USB card or adapter is required.
Specifications
Specifications
Site Licenses Quantities Available:
20 digit double precision real
Storage Accuracy
16 digit double precision real
Storage Formats
AcqKnowledge, text (ASCII), PICT (Macintosh), WMF (Windows)
Digital Filters:
Post-Processing
Mode
Real-Time Mode
FIR or IIR based
IIR based
Window Functions
Rectangular, Bartlett, Hamming, Hanning, Kaiser-Bessel
Maximum File Length
Limited only by available space
Number of Channels
Displayed
60 maximum
Memory Requirements 64 MB RAM recommended minimum
System Requirements
PC
Mac
Catalog No.
BS4 72-3731
BS4 72-3730
$
Windows 98, 98SE, 2000 Workstation, NT4.0 Workstation
System 8.6 or better
Model
595.00 ACK100W
595.00 ACK100M
Product
AcqKnowledge Software for PC *
AcqKnowledge Software for Macintosh*
BS4 72-7415
995.00 ACK100W-9
AcqKnowledge Software for PC*
BS4 72-7416
995.00 ACK100M-9
AcqKnowledge Software for Macintosh*
BS4 72-7417 1,495.00 ACK100W-24
AcqKnowledge Software for PC*
BS4 72-7418 1,495.00 ACK100M-24
AcqKnowledge Software for Macintosh*
BS4 72-7419 1,995.00 ACK100W-99
AcqKnowledge Software for PC*
BS4 72-7420 1,995.00 ACK100M-99
AcqKnowledge Software for Macintosh*
BS4 72-7421 2,495.00 ACK100W-249 AcqKnowledge Software for PC*
BS4 72-7422 2,495.00 ACK100M-249 AcqKnowledge Software for Macintosh*
*Note: If Purchased Separately from MP150 and MP100 Starter Systems
Digital I/O
Number of Channels
Voltage Levels
Output Drive Current
External Trigger Input
16
TTL, CMOS
±20 mA (max)
TTL, CMOS compatible
Time Base
Min Sample Rate
Trigger Options
2 samples/hour
Internal, External or Signal Level
Power
Amplifier Module Isolation
CE Marking
Leakage Current
Fuse
Provided by the MP data acquisition unit
EC Low Voltage and EMC Directives
<8 µA (Normal), <400 µA (Single Fault)
2A (fast blow)
Physiology
Operational Accuracy
Device Specific Specs MP100
Max Sample Rate:
MP Internal Memory
PC Memory/Disk
70 K samples/sec (70 K aggregate)
11 K samples/sec (16 K aggregate)
Internal Buffer Size
16K samples
Serial Interface Type/Rate
SERIAL: RS422 (800K bits/sec)
Transmission Type
USB (via USB1W or USBIM)
Maximum Cable Length
7 m (USB + SERIAL cable)
Power Requirements
12 VDC @ 1 amp (uses AC100A)
Dimensions
7 x 29 x 25 cm
Weight
1.8 kg
Compatibility:
Mac
PC
USB Interface
System 8.6 or better
Windows 98, 98SE, 2000
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7258
3,495.00 MP100WSW MP100 Systems for PC
BS4 72-7259
3,495.00 MP100WS
MP100 Systems for Macintosh
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I103
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
I104
Universal Interface Module
UIM100C
Isolated Power Supply Module
IPS100C
The UIM100C is used to connect 100-series amplifier modules and
signal cables to the system and is included in the MP Starter System.
Sixteen analog input channels plus 2 analog output channels are provided via standard 3.5mm phone jacks on the front panel. The back
panel provides access to 16 digital I/O lines and an external trigger
input via screw terminals. Amplifier modules snap onto the side of
the UIM100C for signal routing to the MP data acquisition unit. The
output of any amplifier module snapped to the UIM100C can be
monitored, during acquisition, via the corresponding 3.5mm analog
channel phone jack. The UIM100C also provides a direct link to the
analog and digital I/O lines of the MP device when collecting or sending data to external equipment. See page 88 for cables to interface
your equipment to the UIM100C.
Not for use with an MP data acquisition module.
The IPS100C is used to operate 100-series amplifier modules independent of an MP data acquisition unit. The IPS100C module couples
the 100-series amplifier outputs directly to any other data acquisition
system, oscilloscope or chart recorder. Amplifier modules snap onto
the side of the IPS100C to receive the necessary isolated power and
to direct the modules’ output to the front panel of the IPS100C. The
IPS100C allows you to operate up to 16 amplifiers on a stand-alone
basis. The analog channel outputs are provided via 3.5mm phone
jacks on the front panel. The IPS100C is generally used with animal
or tissue preparations. When collecting data from electrodes
attached to humans, use the HLT100C module with INISO and OUTISO signal isolators to couple signals to mains powered external laboratory equipment.
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE
Mains powered external laboratory equipment should be connected
to an MP System through Signal Isolators when the system also connects to electrodes attached to humans. For analog signals, use the
INISO or OUTISO isolator (with the HLT100C) to couple external
equipment to an MP System. For digital signals, use the STP100 (with
the UIM100C) to couple external equipment to an MP System.
Contact BIOPAC for details.
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE
Do not use the IPS100C with an MP based system. For a fully isolated recording system using the IPS100C, couple signal inputs and
outputs through the HLT100C module and INISO and OUTISO
adapters, respectively. Contact BIOPAC for details. Includes In-line
Transformer (AC100A) and MP System Guide. Specify USA or EURO
power cord.
Specifications
Specifications
Analog I/O Access
16 channels (front panel) – 3.5mm phone jacks
Amplifier Output Access 16 channels (front panel) – 3.5mm phone jacks
D/A Outputs
2 channels (front panel) – 3.5mm phone jacks
Isolated Power Access
±12 V, +5 V @ 100 ma (back panel) – screw terminals
16 channels (back panel) – screw terminals
Weight
610 g
1 channel (back panel) – screw terminal
Dimensions, H x W x D
19 x 7 11 cm
Power Source
12VDC @ 1 amp (uses AC100A transformer)
Digital I/O Access
Ext. Trigger Access
Isolated Power Access ±12 V, +5 V @ 100 ma (back panel) – screw terminals
Weight
520 g
Catalog No.
Dimensions, H x W x D 19 x 7 x 11 cm
BS4 72-7261
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7260
$
Model
495.00 UIM100C
Product
$
Model
795.00 IPS100C
Product
Isolated Power Supply Module
IPS100C
Universal Interface Module UIM100C
(if purchased separately)
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
High Level Transducer Module
HLT100C
Signal Isolators
•
For digital (TTL compatible) isolation to the MP digital I/O
ports, use the STP100 optical interface (see page I115).
•
If the MP System does not electrically connect to human
subjects, signal connections to external laboratory
equipment can be made through the UIM100C module and
the respective analog or digital connection cable (see pages
I138 and I140).
These analog signal isolators are used to connect mains powered
external laboratory equipment to the MP System when the system
also connects to electrodes attached to humans. Use the INISO to
connect external equipment outputs to MP analog input channels.
Use the OUTISO to connect MP analog signal outputs (amplifier and
D/A) to external equipment inputs. Each signal isolator comes with
an RJ11 cable for connection to the HLT100C module.
•
To provide the maximum in subject safety and isolation,
use signal isolators to connect mains powered external
equipment (i.e. chart recorders, oscilloscopes, etc.) to the MP
System. Use the INISO isolator to connect to MP analog
system inputs and the OUTISO isolator to connect to analog
system outputs.
All high level output transducers interface to an MP System via the
HLT100C module. Up to 16 transducers can be connected to a single
HLT100C. The HLT100C is similar in function to the UIM100C, but
also provides power to the transducer when making a connection.
High level output transducers and adapters connect to the HLT100C
via standard 6-pin RJ11 type connectors. Transducers and adapters
that presently require the HLT100C module are:
TSD109C/F - Tri-axial Accelerometers
TSD150A/B - Active Electrodes
TSD111 - Heel/Toe Strike Transducer
INISO - Input Signal Isolator
OUTISO - Output Signal Isolator
TSD115 - Variable Assessment Transducer
Specifications
Transducer Inputs
16 channels (front panel) – RJ11 jacks
System D/A Outputs
2 channels (front panel) – RJ11 jacks
Isolated Power Access ±12 V, +5 V @ 100 ma (via all RJ11 jacks)
Weight
540 g
The INISO plugs directly into any of the 16 input channels on the
HLT100C module and incorporates a 3.5mm phone jack for signal
input connections. Select the appropriate analog connection cable
(see page I140) to connect to your external equipment’s output.
Output Signal Isolated Adapter - OUTISO
The OUTISO plugs directly into any of the 16 signal output channels,
plus the two D/A outputs, on the HLT100C module and incorporates
a 3.5mm phone jack for signal output connections. The OUTISO is
very useful when the biopotential amplifier output signal requires
routing to external laboratory equipment while being sampled by the
MP System. Select the appropriate analog connection cable
(see page I140) to connect to your external equipment’s input.
Specifications
Isolator Type
Analog
Isolation Capacitance
30 pF
Bandwidth
DC to 50 kHz
Input Connector
Input/Output Range
±10 V
INISO: 3.5 mm
mono phone jack
Input Resistance
200 KΩ
Output Connector
Output Resistance
120 Ω
OUTISO: 3.5 mm
mono phone jack
Weight
50 g
Output Current
±5 mA
Offset Voltage
±20 mV (nominal)
Temperature Drift
200 µV/°C
(nominal)
Noise
2.5 mV (rms)
Isolation Voltage
1500 VDC
Catalog No.
$
Physiology
Alternatively, the HLT100C module can be used to connect mains
powered external laboratory equipment to the MP System when the
system also connects to electrodes attached to humans.
Input Signal Isolated Adapter - INISO
Dimensions, H x W x L 2.6 x 2.6 x 7.6 cm
Model
Included Cable
2.1 m (straight
thru, M/M, 6 pin,
RJ11)
Interface
HLT100C—
see left
Product
BS4 72-7263
195.00 INISO
Input Signal Isolated Adapter
BS4 72-7264
195.00 OUTISO
Output Signal Isolated Adapter
Dimensions (W x D x H) 7 x 11 x 19 cm
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7262
$
Model
495.00 HLT100C
Product
High Level Transducer Module
HLT100C
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I105
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
General-Purpose Transducer
Amplifier DA100C
Transducer Connector Interfaces
The DA100C is a very low noise and drift differential bridge amplifier that will operate with a wide variety of transducers, including:
pressure, force, strain, displacement, thermocouplers, piezo sensors, light sensors, microphones and nearly any other active or passive sensor or transducer. The DA100C provides variable gain settings, offset control for baseline zeroing and adjustable voltage references for activating passive transducers (see pages I121 to I132).
The transducer connector interfaces (TCIs) adapt a variety of
transducer types to the DA100C module. The TCIs match the DA100C
to the transducer brands listed. If no existing connector matches
your equipment, we will build a special TCI for you, or you can use
the TCIKIT. Please call or write BIOPAC with your specific needs.
Compatible Transducers
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-3679
99.00 TCI113
Model
Hugo Sachs Transducer
Product
BS4 60-1073
99.00 TCI100
Grass/Astromed transducers – 6 pin
Model
Description
Page No.
BS4 60-3777
99.00 TCI101
Beckman transducers – 5 pin
TSD104A
Precision Pressure
Page I121
BS4 60-3778
99.00 TCI102
TSD105A
Variable Range Force
Page I121
World Precision Instrument
transducers – 8 pin
TSD107B
High Flow Pneumotach
Page I122
BS4 60-1070
99.00 TCI103
Lafayette Instrument transducers
– 9 pin
TSD108
Physiological Microphone
Page I122
BS4 60-3779
99.00 TCI104
Honeywell transducers – 6 pin
TSD117
Medium Flow Pneumotach
Page I125
BS4 60-3780
99.00 TCI105
TSD120
Noninvasive BP Cuff
Page I125
Modular phone jack connector
– 4 pin
TSD121C
Hand Dynamometer
Page I126
BS4 60-3781
99.00 TCI106
Beckman transducers – 12 pin
99.00 TCI107
Nihon Koden transducers – 5 pin
TSD125
Fixed Range Force
Page I127
BS4 60-3782
TSD127
Low Flow Pneumotach
Page I128
BS4 60-3783
99.00 TCI108
Narco transducers – 7 pin
TSD130
Goniometers
Page I128
BS4 60-3784
99.00 TCI109
Fukuda transducers – 8 pin
Page I129
BS4 60-3785
99.00 TCI110
Gould transducers – 12 pin
Page I132
BS4 72-7265
99.00 TCI111
Liquid metal transducers – two 2mm
sockets
BS4 72-7266
99.00 TCI112
Hokansen transducers – 4 pin
BS4 72-7267
99.00 TCIPPG1
Geer photo-electric (IR) for
PPG100C only – 7 pin
TSD137
Very Low Flow Pneumotach
TSD160
Catalog No.
BS4 60-1036
Differential Pressure
$
Model
545.00 DA100C
Product
General Purpose Transducer
Amplifier
Create a custom interface with the TCIKIT
(page I107) or check out www.foggsystem.com
for additional interface options.
I106
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Custom Interface Kit
Calibration Cables for the DA100C
or 100B-Series Amplifiers
Build your own customized adapter to
the DA100C. The
do-it-yourself TCI
kit includes housing, PC board with 7
attached PIN plugs
(2mm) and instructions. Mount your
connector to the
housing and solder
wires to the pins.
Specifications
Gain
50, 200, 1000, or 5000
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
Low Pass Filter
10 Hz, 300 Hz, 5000 Hz
High Pass Filter
DC, 0.05 Hz
Input Voltage (max)
±200 mV (protected)
Noise Voltage
0.11 µV rms - (0.05 – 10 Hz)
Temperature Drift
0.3 µV/°C
Used to verify the signal calibration of the DA100C. This cable
(1.8m) connects between the DA100C input and the UIM100C D/A
output 0 or 1. To verify the DA100C’s frequency response and gain
settings, create a stimulus signal with AcqKnowledge and monitor the
DA100C’s output. The CBLCAL incorporates a precision 1/1000 signal attenuator. You can also use the CBLCAL for 100B-series
Biopotential amplifier calibration. (Amplifier specification tests are
performed at the factory before shipping, but your own Calibration
Cable can ensure peace of mind by permitting precise frequency
response and gain calibrations for exact measurements.)
2 MΩ (Differential)
90 dB min
CMIV
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground) ±1500 VDC (referenced
to mains ground)
Catalog No.
$
Voltage Reference
-10 to +10 V infinitely adjustable @ 20ma (max) (Factory preset
to 2 volts excitation)
BS4 72-7269
99.00 CBLCAL
Signal Source
Variety of transducers
Weight
350 g
Vin (mV)
±200
±50
±10
±2
Catalog No.
$
BS4 60-3786
99.00 TCIKIT
Model
Product
Custom Interface Kit
Reference Calibrator
for the DA100C
Used to check and adjust the DA100C’s reference voltage used for transducer excitation. The REFCAL plugs directly into the DA100C and operates with the DA100C Gain set to 50. The exact reference voltage setting
will be indicated on the DA100C output. The REFCAL makes it very easy
to adjust the reference voltage of the DA100C to suit your transducer.
Catalog No.
$
Model
BS4 72-7268
99.00 REFCAL
Product
Calibration Cables for the DA100C or
100B Series Amplifiers
Calibration Cable for
Biopotential Amplifiers
Dimensions, H x W x D 19 x 11 x 4 cm
Input Voltage Range:
Gain
50
200
1000
5000
Model
Used to verify the calibration of any of the 100C-series Biopotential
amplifiers. This cable (1.8m) connects between the amplifier input
and the UIM100C D/A output 0 or 1. Create a stimulus signal using
AcqKnowledge and monitor the output of the amplifier connected to
the Calibration Cable. This procedure can verify the amplifier’s frequency response and gain settings. The Calibration Cable incorporates a precision 1/1000 signal attenuator. (Amplifier specification
tests are performed at the factory before shipping, but your own
Calibration Cable can ensure peace of mind by permitting precise
frequency response and gain calibrations for exact measurements.)
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-7270
99.00 CBLCALC
Model
Physiology
Z (input)
CMRR
Product
Calibration Cables for Biopotential
Amplifiers
Additional DA100C Interface Cables
Product
For CBL106, see page I40.
Reference Calibrator for the DA100C
For CBL202, see page I38.
For JUMP100, see page I39.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I107
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Electrocardiogram Amplifier
Electroencephalogram Amplifier
The EEG100C amplifies bio-electric potentials associated with neuronal
activity of the brain and can be used to perform unipolar or bipolar EEG
measurements. The amplifier output can be switched between normal
EEG output and Alpha wave detection. The Alpha detection mode outputs a smoothed wave with a peak indicating maximal alpha activity
(signal energy in the 8-13 Hz frequency range).
Specifications
Gain
5000, 10000, 20000, 50000
Output Selection
Normal, Alpha Wave indicator
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
Low Pass Filter
35 Hz, 100 Hz
High Pass Filter
0.1 Hz, 1.0 Hz
Notch Filter
50 dB rejection @ 50/60 Hz
Noise Voltage
0.1 µV rms - (0.1 – 35 Hz)
Z (input)
2 MΩ (Differential) 1000 MΩ (Common mode)
CMRR
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
CMIV
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
Input Voltage Range:
Gain
5000
10000
20000
50000
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Catalog No.
The ECG100C records electrical activity generated by the heart and
will reliably record ECG from humans, animals and isolated organ
preparations. The amplifier output can be switched between normal
ECG output and R-wave detection. The R-wave mode outputs a
smoothed pulse with the occurrence of each R-wave. The exact
timing of the R-wave is detected even under conditions of extreme
signal artifact. The amplifier also includes a user-switchable baseline
stabilizer.
Specifications
$
Model
545.00 EEG100C
Product
Electroencephalogram Amplifier
Electrogastrogram Amplifier
The EGG100C amplifies the electrical signal resulting from stomach
and intestinal smooth muscle activity. The amplifier monitors the DC
potential on the skin surrounding, or surface of, the intestine and
stomach, which is indicative of the degree of slow wave contraction.
The amplifier permits DC coupling to electrodes for signal amplification and presentation without discernible decay.
Gain
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
Output Selection
Normal, R-wave indicator
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
Specifications
Low Pass Filter
35 Hz, 150 Hz
Gain
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
High Pass Filter
0.05 Hz, 1.0 Hz
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
Notch Filter
50 dB rejection @ 50/60 Hz
Low Pass Filter
0.1 Hz, 1 Hz
0.1 µV rms (0.05 – 35 Hz)
High Pass Filter
DC, 0.005 Hz, 0.05 Hz
2 MΩ (Differential)
Notch Filter
50 dB rejection @ 50/60 Hz
1000 MΩ (Common mode)
Noise Voltage
0.1 µV rms - (0.005 - 1.0 Hz)
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
Z (input)
2 MΩ (Differential) 1000 MΩ (Common mode)
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
CMRR
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
CMIV
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
Vin (mV)
±20
±10
±5
±2
Input Voltage Range:
Gain
500
1000
2000
5000
Noise Voltage
Z (input)
CMRR
CMIV
Input Voltage Range:
Gain
500
1000
2000
5000
Catalog No.
BS4 60-1037
I108
BS4 60-1038
Vin (mV)
±2
±1
±0.5
±0.2
$
Model
545.00 ECG100C
Product
Electrocardiogram Amplifier
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7271
Vin (mV)
±20
±10
±5
±2
$
Model
545.00 EGG100C
Product
Electrogastrogram Amplifier
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Electromyogram Amplifier
Evoked Response Amplifier
The EMG100C amplifies general and skeletal muscle electrical activity. The amplifier functions directly with AcqKnowledge to perform
real-time EMG integration and, as it incorporates fast response and
settling time characteristics, can also be used to monitor single-fiber
EMG, motor unit and peripheral nerve action potentials.
The ERS100C is an extremely low noise differential amplifier that
accurately amplifies very small potentials, such as those associated
with stimulus/response, signal-averaged recordings. Selectable gain
and bandwidth options make the module useful for a variety of
evoked response testing modes. The ERS100C is intended for use in
applications such as auditory brainstem response, startle response,
somatosensory evoked response or nerve conduction velocity
recording.
Specifications
Gain
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
Low Pass Filter
500 Hz, 5000 Hz
Specifications
High Pass Filter
1.0 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz
Gain
5000, 10000, 20000, 50000
Notch Filter
50 dB rejection @ 50/60 Hz
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
Noise Voltage
0.2 µV rms (10 – 500 Hz)
Low Pass Filter
3 kHz, 10 kHz
Z (input)
2 MΩ (Differential) 1000 MΩ (Common mode)
High Pass Filter
1.0 Hz, 20 Hz, 100 Hz
CMRR
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
Notch Filter
50 dB rejection @ 50/60 Hz
CMIV
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
Noise Voltage
0.5 µV rms (100 - 3000 Hz)
Z (input)
2 MΩ (Differential) 1000 MΩ (Common mode)
CMRR
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
CMIV
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
Input Voltage Range:
Gain
500
1000
2000
5000
Catalog No.
BS4 60-1039
Vin (mV)
±20
±10
±5
±2
$
Model
545.00 EMG100C
Product
Electromyogram Amplifier
Electrooculogram Amplifier
Specifications
Gain
500, 1000, 2000, 5000
Output Selection
Normal, Derivative output
Catalog No.
Vin (mV)
±2
±1
±0.5
±0.2
$
BS4 60-1063
Model
545.00 ERS100C
Product
Evoked Response Amplifier
Biopotential 100C Interface Cables
The Biopotential amplifiers connect to
unshielded or shielded electrode leads terminating with Safelead®/Touchproof (1.5mm)
sockets. For best performance, use two shielded
electrode leads and one unshielded electrode
lead per amplifier. See the extensive selection of
electrode leads on page I135. For additional
electrode lead distance, see the Module
Extension Cables on page I139.
Output Range
± 10 V (analog)
Low Pass Filter
35 Hz, 100 Hz
High Pass Filter
DC, 0.05 Hz
Notch Filter
50 dB rejection @ 50/60 Hz
All Biopotential Amplifier Specifications
Noise Voltage
0.1 µV rms (0.05 – 35 Hz)
Signal Source
Z (input)
2 MΩ (Differential) 1000 MΩ (Common mode)
Dimensions
4 cm (wide) x 11 cm (deep) x 19 cm (high)
CMRR
110 dB min (50/60 Hz)
Weight
350 g
CMIV
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
BS4 60-1040
Electrodes (three electrode leads required)
For CBL200, see page I138.
Input Voltage Range:
Gain
500
1000
2000
5000
Catalog No.
Physiology
The EOG100C amplifies the corneal-retinal potential. The amplifier
monitors the DC potential on the skin surrounding the eyes, which is
proportional to the degree of eye movement in any direction. The
amplifier output can be switched between normal EOG output and
Derivative of EOG. In Derivative mode, the amplifier outputs the
measured velocity of eye movement, which is useful for saccade and
nystagmus investigations. The amplifier permits DC coupling to electrodes for X/Y graphing of eye movement without discernible decay.
Input Voltage Range:
Gain
5000
10000
20000
50000
Vin (mV)
±20
±10
±5
±2
$
Model
545.00 EOG100C
For CBL204, see page I138.
For JUMP100C, see page I139.
Product
Electrooculogram Amplifier
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I109
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Electrodermal Response and Photoplethsmogram Amplifier
The Transducer amplifiers work with
specific BIOPAC transducers, as indicated in
the descriptions.
Use any BIOPAC amplifier as a stand alone device
with the NEW IPS100C shown on page I104.
Photoplethysmogram Amplifier
The PPG100C records the pulse pressure wave and, for providing an
indication of blood pressure, blood density or vasoconstriction. The
PPG100C couples to the TSD200 pulse transducer to measure
changes in infrared reflectance resulting from varying blood flow.
Front panel controls allow selection of either absolute or relative
plethysmographic measurements. Each PPG100C requires one
TSD200 photo-electric pulse plethysmogram transducer, shown on
page I133.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specifications
Gain
10, 20, 50, or 100
Electrodermal Response Amplifier
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
The GSR100C measures both the skin conductance level (SCL) and
response (SCR) as they vary with sweat gland (eccrine) activity due to
stress, arousal or emotional excitement. The GSR100C uses a constant
voltage technique to measure skin conductance. The controls allow
selection of absolute (SCL+SCR) or relative (SCR) skin conductance
measurements. Each GSR100C amplifier requires one TSD203 electrodermal response transducer (see page I134). For alternative body
placement, use two of the EL258 lead electrodes (instead of the
TSD203) with the GSR100C. Also required is GEL101 electrode gel
(see page I138) or your preferred isotonic recording gel.
Low Pass Filter
3 Hz, 10 Hz
High Pass Filter
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
Noise Voltage
0.5 µV rms – amplifier contribution
Excitation
6V
Signal Source:
TSD200 Pulse Transducer
Weight
350 g
Dimensions, H x W x D 19 x 4 x 11 cm
Catalog No.
BS4 60-1042
$
Model
545.00 PPG100C
Product
Photoplethysmogram Amplifier
Specifications
Gain
20, 10, 5, 2 micro-mhos/volt (i.e. micro-siemens/volt)
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
Low Pass Filter
1 Hz, 10 Hz
High Pass Filter
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
Sensitivity
0.7 nano-mhos - with MP System
Excitation
Vex = 0.5 VDC (Constant Voltage)
Signal Source
TSD203
Weight
350 g
Dimensions, H x W x D 19 x 4 x 11 cm
Input Signal Range:
Gain
20
10
5
2
Catalog No.
BS4 60-1041
Range (µmhos)
0-200
0-100
0-50
0-20
$
Model
545.00 GSR100C
Product
Electrodermal Response Amplifier
To interface with a photo-electric Geer gauge,
see TCIPPG1 on page I106.
I110
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Respiration Pneumogram
Amplifier
Temperature Amplifier
The RSP100C is designed for direct physical measurement of respiratory effort. The RSP100C works with the TSD201 transducer to
measure abdominal or thoracic expansion and contraction while
breathing. The RSP100C permits DC coupling to the TSD201 for the
recording of respiratory effort signals of arbitrarily low frequency.
Front panel controls allow selection of absolute or relative expansion/contraction measurements. Each RSP100C amplifier requires
one TSD201 respiratory effort transducer, shown on page I133.
The SKT100C measures surface, core or air temperature. The
SKT100C, with a TSD202 series temperature probe, can record temperature changes to 0.0001°C resolution. Front panel controls allow
selection for either absolute or relative temperature measurements.
The SKT100C operating temperature range is 40°F to 140°F (5°C to
60°C). Use the AcqKnowledge software to calibrate the SKT100C’s
output in °F or °C. Each SKT100C amplifier will need one TSD202
series temperature probe, shown on page I134. By using CBL203
(see page 86), the SKT100C is also compatible with any YSI® 400
series biomedical temperature probe.
Specifications
Gain
10, 20, 50, 100
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
Specifications
Low Pass Filter
1 Hz, 10 Hz
Gain
5, 2, 1, 0.5 °F/Volt— can also calibrate in °C
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
0.2 µV rms – amplifier contribution
Low Pass Filter
1 Hz, 10 Hz
TSD201
High Pass Filter
DC, 0.05 Hz, 0.5 Hz
350 g
Sensitivity
180 micro °F (100 micro °C)— with MP System
High Pass Filter
Noise Voltage
Signal Source
Weight
Dimensions, H x W x D 19 x 4 x 11 cm
Catalog No.
BS4 60-1043
$
Model
545.00 RSP100C
Product
Respiration Pneumogram Amplifier
Signal Source
TSD202 Series Temperature Probe
Weight
350 g
Dimensions, H x W x D 19 x 4 x 11 cm
Input Signal Range:
Gain
5
2
1
0.5
BS4 60-1044
$
Model
545.00 SKT100C
Range (°C)
5-60
22-43
27-37
30-35
Product
Temperature Amplifier
Physiology
Catalog No.
Range (°F)
40-140
70-110
80-100
85-95
Transducer 100C Interface Cables
For YSI® 400 Probe Interface (for SKT100C),
see CLB203, page I138.
2mm pin to Touchproof Socket Conversion,
see CLB200, page I138.
For additional transducer lead distance, use a
Module Extension Cable, see page I139.
You can also record these signals remotely,
using the TEL100C shown on page I118.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I111
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Electrical Bioimpedance Amplifier
The EBI100C records the parameters associated with cardiac output
measurements, thoracic impedance changes as a function of respiration or any kind of biological impedance monitoring. The EBI100C
incorporates a precision high frequency current source, which injects
a very small (100µA) current through the measurement tissue volume
defined by the placement of a set of current source electrodes. A separate set of monitoring electrodes then measures the voltage developed across the tissue volume. Because the current is constant, the
voltage measured is proportional to the characteristics of the biological impedance of the tissue volume. The EBI100C measures both
impedance magnitude and phase simultaneously. Impedance can be
recorded at four different measurement frequencies, from 12.5kHz to
100kHz. For operation, the EBI100C connects to four unshielded
electrode leads terminating in Touchproof sockets. The EBI100C is
typically used with EL500 paired disposable electrodes, but can function with spot or ring electrodes, reusable electrodes, or needle electrodes. For injecting current and averaging voltage at four pairedelectrode sites (required for cardiac output measurements), use four
CBL204 Touchproof “Y” electrode lead adapters (see page I138) and
eight LEAD110 electrode leads (see page I135) with each EBI100C.
Specifications
Laser Doppler Flow Module
The LDF100C is a laser Doppler tissue perfusion monitor for measuring micro-vascular blood flow in tissue. The LDF100C module
delivers a low power beam of laser light down an optical fiber to the
tissue being studied; typically, the volume of tissue sampled by the
light is in the order of 1mm3. The LDF100C module analyzes the
Doppler shift created by moving red blood cells and outputs a channel indicating blood flow expressed in Blood Perfusion Units (BPU).
On a second channel the LDF100C simultaneously outputs the tissue
remittance (Backscatter) from 0 to 100%. Up to four LDF100C modules can be used with a single MP System. See the extensive range of
TSD140 series laser Doppler flow probes on page I131. If probes are
shipped with the LDF100C, they are factory-calibrated to the module
(except Disposable probes). Otherwise, probes are shipped uncalibrated. The LDF100C requires a Blood Perfusion Unit standard
(LDFCAL) when (re)calibrating new or existing probes. Includes Inline Transformer (AC101). Specify USA or EURO power cord.
Specifications
Primary Measure
Microvascular blood flow
Outputs
Laser Doppler Flow (0-9999 BPU)
Tissue Remittance (0-100%)
Output Range
0 to 5 V (analog)
Laser Type
Laser Diode (Class 1)
(Peltier Temperature Stabilized)
Laser Wavelength
780 nm ±10 nm
Laser Power
0.5 to 1.0 mW (probe dependent)
Doppler Update Rate
187.5 Hz
Processing Bandwidth
10 Hz - 22 kHz
Dynamic Range
116 dB
Linearity
0.35% of full scale
Response Time
100 msec
Stability
1.5% of full scale
Calibration
User set via motility standard of 1000 BPU (LDFCAL)
Probe ID
Cal factors automatically stored
TSD140 Series Laser Doppler Probe
Number of Channels
2 – Magnitude (MAG) and Phase (PHS)
Signal Source
Outputs
MAG of Impedance (0-1000 Ω)
PHS of Impedance (0 to 90°)
Operating Temperature 15°C to 30°C
Output Range
±10 V (analog)
100, 20, 5, 1 Ω/volt
MAG Gain Range
MAG LP Filter
10 Hz, 100 Hz
Weight:
790 g
Dimensions, L x W x H
11 x 7 x 19 cm
Power Source
±12, +5 VDC @ 1 amp (uses AC101A transformer)
The module utilizes Oxford Optronix, Ltd. technology for Laser Doppler
signal processing.
MAG HP Filter
DC, 0.05 Hz
MAG Sensitivity
0.001 Ω @ 10Hz bandwidth
PHS Gain
90°/10 v
Catalog No.
PHS LP Filter
100 Hz
BS4 72-3688
PHS HP Filter
DC coupled
PHS Sensitivity
0.0025 deg @ 10 Hz bandwidth
CMIV
±10 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
$
Model
5,495.00 LDF100C
Product
Electrical Bioimpedance Amplifier
Operational Frequencies 12.5, 25, 50, 100 kHz
Current Output
100 µA (rms)— constant sinusoidal current
Signal Source
Electrodes (four electrode leads required)
Weight
370 g
Dimensions, H x W x D 19 x 4 x 11 cm
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7272
I112
$
Model
995.00 EBI100C
Product
Electrical Bioimpedance Amplifier
For calibration, see LDFCAL on page I140.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
NEW
Micro-electrode Amplifier
The MCE100C is an extremely high input impedance, low noise differential amplifier that accurately amplifies signals derived from microelectrodes. A number of selectable options make the module useful for
general-purpose recording of cortical, muscle and nerve action/resting
potentials or cellular recordings with the optional use of input capacity
compensation and a current clamp.
Cable shield drives for input signals can be configured for voltage following (for reduced input capacitance) or simply grounded (for low
feedback noise). The MCE100C includes manual controls for input
capacity compensation (±100pF) and clamp current zeroing. In addition, the MCE100C incorporates an external voltage control to vary the
clamp current proportionally to the control voltage (100mV/nA). An
MP150 D/A output channel can drive this external voltage control to
change clamp currents automatically during recording. The MCE100C
also includes a clamp current monitor output so the clamp current can
easily be recorded by another MP150 input channel.
For general-purpose recording, without input capacity compensation
or a current clamp, use standard shielded or unshielded electrode
leads terminating in Touchproof sockets. Add input capacity
compensation and current clamp control by connecting the respective
signal ports to the [Vin+] input of the MCE100C using the JUMP100C
jumper connectors. For the best performance and shielding, use the
MCEKITC to interface your micro-electrode lead cable to the MCE100C.
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE
Although the MCE100C will function with an MP100 System, an MP150
system is recommended due to the module’s wide operational
bandwidth. Contact BIOPAC for details.
Gain
±10 V (analog)
Low Pass Filter
3 kHz, 30 kHz
High Pass Filter
DC, 0.5 Hz, 100 Hz
CMRR
92 dB typical
CMIV
±10 V (referenced to isolated ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
Notch Filter
50 dB rejection (50/60 Hz)
Noise Voltage
2.1 µV rms - (DC-3000 Hz)
Noise Current
0.1 fA/√Hz
Z (input)
10 E15 Ω (Differential) 10 E15 Ω (Common mode)
Cap Comp (Neg)
Input capacitance compensation (0-100 pF) – manual control
Current Clamp
Adjustable (±100 nA) – voltage control
I Clamp Control
Input - 3.5 mm phone jack (100 mV/nA)
I Clamp Monitor
Output - 3.5 mm phone jack (100 mV/nA)
Micro-electrodes
350 g
Dimensions W x D x H
4 x 11 x 19 cm
Input Voltage Range
Gain
10
50
200
1000
Vin (mV)
±1000
±200
±50
±10
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7273
$
Model
795.00 MCE100C
Outputs
SpO2, Pulse Rate, Pulse Waveform & Module Status
Output Range
0 to 5 V (analog)
SpO2 Range
0-100%
SpO2 Accuracy
80-100% ±2%, 60-79% ±2.5%, 0-59% unspecified
SpO2 Resolution
1%
Pulse Rate Range
30-250 BPM
Pulse rate Accuracy
1% of full scale
Pulse Rate Resolution
1 BPM
Method of Operation
Lambert-Beers law employing dual wavelengths
Optical Transmission
Red (660 nm) and IR (940 nm)
Signal Source
TSD123 Series SpO2 Transducer
Weight
460 g
Dimensions, W x D x H 4 x 11 x 19 cm
Algorithm Type
BS4 72-3691
Output Range
Weight
Specifications
Catalog No.
10, 50, 200, 1000
Signal Source
The OXY100C measures beat-by-beat, blood oxygen saturation
(SpO2) level in a noninvasive fashion. The OXY100C outputs four
signals simultaneously: SpO2, pulse waveform, pulse rate and module status. These signals are directed to a switchable block of four
different MP System input channels. Up to four OXY100C modules
can be used with a single MP System. The OXY100C has built-in
calibration for a simplified setup procedure. Each OXY100C module
includes a 3-meter transducer extension cable and requires one of
the TSD123 series SpO2 transducers, shown on page I126.
Product
The OXY100C employs Novametrix Medical Systems, Inc.
artifact rejection and averaging algorithms, which utilize an
eight second history of the pulse signal. Abnormal data in this
history buffer (amplitudes and periods) is rejected. Acceptable
data is passed along to an averaging algorithm and is updated
on a beat-by-beat basis.
$
Model
1,995.00 OXY100C
Product
Pulse Oximeter Module
Physiology
Specifications
Pulse Oximeter Module
Build a customized adapter to a Micro-electrode
Shielded Cable — MCEKITC, page I140.
Micro-electrode Amplifier
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I113
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
CO2 and O2 Measurement Module
O2 Measurement Module
The O2100C module records quickly varying oxygen concentration
levels. This fast response analyzer is ideal for monitoring time-averaged O2 levels using mixing chambers or real-time O2 levels for
breath-by-breath measurements. The O2100C module interfaces (via
the AFT20 gas sampling interface kit) with the AFT15A and AFT15B
mixing chambers, the AFT21 and AFT22 non-rebreathing T valves or
the AFT25 mask with integral non-rebreathing T valve.
CO2 Measurement Module
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
The CO2100C module records quickly varying carbon dioxide concentration levels. This fast response analyzer is ideal for monitoring
time-averaged CO2 levels using mixing chambers or real-time CO2
levels for breath-by-breath measurements. The CO2100C module
interfaces (via the AFT20 gas sampling interface kit) with the AFT15A
and AFT15B mixing chambers, the AFT21 and AFT22 non-rebreathing T valves or the AFT25 mask with integral non-rebreathing T valve.
Includes In-line Transformer (AC100A); specify USA or EURO
power cord.
Specifications
O2 Range
0-100% O2
Gain
10, 20, 50, 100 (%O2/V)
The CO2100C module is equipped with a variable speed pump to
adjust the flow over a wide range of sampling conditions. The module employs a single beam, infrared, single wavelength, measurement technique. Sampling line connections for input and output flow
are readily accessible on the front panel of the module.
Output Range
0-10 V
Repeatability
±0.1% O2
Resolution
0.1% O2
Linearity
±0.2% O2
Zero Stability
±0.01% O2/hr
Includes In-line Transformer (AC100A); specify USA or EURO
power cord.
Response Time
160 msec (T10-T90) @ 200 ml/min
500 msec (T10-T90) @ 100 ml/min (factory preset)
1000 msec (T10-T90) @ 50 ml/min
Flow Range
50-200 ml/min
Temp Range
5-50°C
Specifications
CO2 Range
0-10% CO2
Zero Drift
Gain
1, 2, 5, 10 (%CO2/V)
±0.05% O2/°C
Span Drift
Output Range
0-10 V
±0.25% O2/°C
Sampling Port
Male Luer
Repeatability
0.03% CO2
Weight
990 g
Resolution
0.1% CO2
Dimensions, W x D x H 7 x 11 x 19 cm
Linearity
0.1% CO2
Power Source
Zero Stability
0.1% CO2/24 hours
Response Time
90 msec (T10-T90) @ 200 ml/min
100 msec (T10-T90) @ 100 ml/min (factory preset)
130 msec (T10-T90) @ 50 ml/min
Flow Range
50-200 ml/min
Temp Range
10-45°C
Zero Drift
0.01% CO2/°C
Span Drift
0.02% CO2/°C
Warm Up Time
5 minutes @ 25°C
Sampling Port
Male Luer
Weight
740 g
12 VDC @ 1 amp (uses AC100A transformer)
The module measures the partial pressure of O2 so the module output is proportional to
the pressure in the sample cell. Gas sampled must be free of any liquid or condensable
vapors. Gas should be filtered to 5 microns or better. The module utilizes Servomex, Inc.
technology for O2 concentration signal processing.
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7275
$
Model
3,495.00 O2100C
Product
O2 Measurement Module
Dimensions, W x D x H 7 x 11 x 19 cm
Power Source
12 VDC @ 1 amp (uses AC100A transformer)
The module measures the partial pressure of CO2 so the module output is a function of
the pressure in the sample cell. Gas sampled must be free of any liquid or condensable
vapors. Gas should be filtered to 5 microns or better. The module utilizes Servomex, Inc.
technology for CO2 concentration signal processing.
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7274
I114
The O2100C module is equipped with a variable speed pump to
adjust the flow over a wide range of sampling conditions. The module employs an analysis technique based on the parametric oxygen
measurement principle. Sampling line connections for input and
output flow are readily accessible on the front panel of the module.
$
Model
3,495.00 CO2100C
Product
CO2 Measurement Module
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
NEW
Stimulus Presentation
System (SuperLab™)
The STP100W is a stand-alone system that measures subject responses to visual or auditory stimuli. It can present visual stimuli on a
computer screen, or auditory stimuli via headphones or speakers,
and simultaneously (1ms resolution) send trigger signals to an MP
System for data synchronization and collection purposes. The
STP100W includes a six-pushbutton response box for performing
accurate (1 ms resolution) reaction time measurements. For measuring physiological responses to stimuli, the STP100W includes an
optically isolated interface, permitting up to eight synchronization
signals (input or output) between the STP100W and the MP System.
Isolated Digital Interface
for the UIM100C
If you already have the SuperLab™ and the Digital I/O card with the
Support Pack, you can interface to the MP System using the STP100
optical interface. The STP100 interface connects between the
SuperLab™ Digital I/O card and the UIM100C module.
The STP100 module can also be used to connect digital signals (TTL
compatible) from any mains powered external equipment to the MP
System when the system also connects to electrodes attached to
humans. The STP100 provides 8 lines for digital data inputs and 8
lines for digital data outputs. All lines are optically isolated to 1500
VDC compliance. The STP100 module comes equipped with a 3meter ribbon cable (37 pin F/F) for easy system interfacing.
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7277
$
Model
495.00 STP100
Product
Isoloated Digital Interface for the
UM100C
NOTE: Second PC required— The synchronization signal(s)
coming from the STP100W can be directed to an MP System running
on a Macintosh or PC, but it’s not possible to run the STP100W on
the same computer as the MP System. The STP100W requires that the
SuperLab™ software and a Digital I/O card (PCI slot required) be
placed on a PC running Windows 95, 98, or 98SE.
Physiology
The SuperLab™ software can be used to change the placement of visual stimuli on the screen, change the screen’s background color,
choose from a variety of input and timing options, and provide feedback to subjects based on either response or reaction time. Different
trigger channels can be paired to different visual or auditory stimuli to
perform sophisticated evoked response averaging tests (e.g. P300).
NEW
The STP100W system includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
SuperLab™ Software (Windows 95, 98, or 98SE)
Support Pack for Digital I/O Card (Windows 95, 98, or 98SE)
Digital I/O Card (PCI slot required)
Six-Pushbutton Response Box
Pushbutton Keycap Color Change Kit
STP100 Optical Interface to UIM100C (includes 3-meter
ribbon cable)
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7276
$
Model
1,495.00 STP100W
Product
Stimulus Presentation System
(SuperLab™)
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I115
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Stimulator Module
Electrical Stimulus
Isolation Accessories
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
•
•
OUT101 ear tubephone allows the
STM100C to output a series of clicks
or tone pips for auditory brainstem
response (ABR) testing.
•
OUT102 piezo transducer allows the
STM100C to provide an audible indicator, or alarm, when signal levels
cross pre-defined thresholds.
•
STMISO series stimulus isolation
adapters allows the STM100C to provide high voltage or constant current
stimulus output for nerve conduction,
somatosensory and other types of
stimulus response studies.
• CBL105 and CBL202 allows the
The STM100C module provides
STM100C to drive a low voltage
pulse and waveform stimulus out(±10V) nerve conduction chamber
directly (without a STMISO).
puts for nerve conduction, evoked
response (e.g. ABR studies), audio
stimulus-response (e.g. startle response) and somatosensory response studies. The
Stimulator setup in AcqKnowledge provides easy-to-modify single-, double- or multiple-pulse sequence outputs of any polarity. The Stimulator setup screen also provides
standard sine, triangular and square wave outputs for other kinds of physiological
tests. Create an arbitrary waveform by modifying an existing wave or reading in a
sequence of user-specified numbers (text file). Stimulus duration, repetition, onset
and amplitude are completely programmable. For interactive changes during recording, stimulus amplitude levels can also be controlled manually. Overload and pulse
stimulus indicators are positioned on the module’s front panel for easy viewing. The
50 Ω output port can simultaneously output a trigger or analog signal to piezo transducers, recorders, oscilloscopes, meters, etc. The External Stimulus output port on the
STM100C can be used to drive headphones or tubephones directly.
In addition to providing computer control of stimulus waveforms, the STM100C can
also buffer signals from any Biopotential or Transducer module that has its output
directed to the STM100C input during recording.
Stimulus Isolation Adapter
(Voltage and Current)
The STMISOC can stimulate with pulse, sinusoidal or
arbitrary waveforms and is ideal for nerve conduction,
muscle twitch, somatosensory stimulation, or other
response studies requiring a stimulus. It plugs into the
STM100C to provide either an isolated voltage or constant current stimulus and incorporates a selectable linear voltage multiplier to amplify the voltage signal from
the STM100C. Voltage stimulation can be unipolar or
bipolar, with a maximum voltage output of 200 volts.
Current stimulation is unipolar only, with a maximum
compliance of 200 volts; 12 preset constant current levels are provided.
Specifications
Stimulus Pulse Width
50 µsec to 2 msec (voltage and current)
Stimulus Sine Wave
Range
100 Hz to 5 kHz (voltage only)
Step Up Voltage Ratio
Selectable: (1:5) or (1:10)
Maximum Output
200 V (p-p) into 5 k Ω load
Voltage
Constant Current
Range
0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.0, 0.2, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 5.0,
10.0, 20.0, 50.0 ma (unipolar only)
Current Source
Compliance
200 V maximum
Isolation Capacitance
120 pf
Isolation Voltage
1500 VDC (from amplifier ground)
Cable Length
1.8 m
Weight
190 g
Dimensions (W x D x H) 10 x 5 x 4.5 cm
Interface
Catalog No.
BS4 72-3683
STM100C—see above
$
Model
395.00 STMISOC
Specifications
Stimulus Output
Voltage
Current Output Drive
External Stimulus
Z (out)
Attenuation Resolution 1dB
20 V (p-p) maximum
50 Ω Output: ±100mA (3.5
mm phone jack)
Ext Stim Output: ±1.0 amp
[6.3 mm (1/4") phone jack]
Less than 0.1 Ω
Input Sources
DA0, DA1, PULSE (DIG
I/O 15), CH 16 (Analog)
Polarity Control
Manual or digital control
(DIG I/O 7)
Attenuation Control
Manual or digital control
Attenuation Control
Range
Catalog No.
BS4 60-1064
I116
OUT100 headphones allows the
STM100C module to provide tone or
click output (e.g. startle response) or
can be used to listen to signals from
other module outputs during acquisition
(e.g. EMG or heart sounds signals).
128 dB (Digital I/O 0-6,
LSB-MSB)
$
Model
545.00 STM100C
LED Indicators
Pulse, Current Limit
Uniphasic Pulse Width 10µs (min) with 5µs
resolution
Biphasic Pulse Width
Biphasic Pulse
Resolution
Arbitrary Wave
Resolution
Weight
MP100: 50µs (min),
MP150: 20µs (min)
MP100: 25µs,
MP150: 10µs
MP100: 25µs,
MP150: 10µs
380 grams
Dimensions (W x D x H) 4 x 11 x 19 cm
Product
Stimulator Module
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Product
Stimulus Isolation
Adapter
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Stimulus Isolation Adapters
(Voltage Only)
Auditory Stimulus Accessories
The STMISOD and STMISOE can stimulate with pulse,
sinusoidal or arbitrary waveforms and are suitable for
nerve conduction, muscle twitch, somatosensory stimulation, or other response studies requiring a voltage
stimulus.
Headphones
These monaural
headphones can be
used with the
STM100C stimulator
module to deliver a
tone signal while
recording data for
startle response or
other
stimulusresponse studies.
The headphones
can also be used to
listen to raw signals
(such as EMG), piped through the STM100C from an amplifier output. The
OUT100 is a wide response, high efficiency headphone, weighing 85 grams and
is equipped with a 1.8 meter cord terminated in a 6.3mm (1/4") phone plug.
The STMISOD and STMISOE plug into the STM100C to
provide an isolated voltage stimulus. These stimulus isolation adapters incorporate a linear voltage multiplier to
amplify the voltage signal from the STM100C. Voltage
stimulation can be unipolar or bipolar, with a maximum
voltage output of 100 volts for the STMISOD and 200
volts for the STMISOE.
Specifications
Stimulus Pulse Width
50 µsec to 2 msec (voltage only)
Stimulus Sine Wave
Range
100 Hz to 5k Hz (voltage only)
Step Up Voltage Ratio
STMISOD (1:5)
STMISOE (1:10)
Maximum Output Voltage STMISOD 100 V (p-p) into 5k Ω load
STMISOE 200 V (p-p) into 5k Ω load
Isolation Capacitance
120 pf
Isolation Voltage
1500 VDC (from amplifier ground)
Cable Length
1.8 m
Weight
140 g
Dimensions (W x D x H) 6.5 x 5 x 4.8 cm
Interface
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7278
195.00 STMISOD
Stimulus Isolation
Adapter (100V max)
BS4 72-7279
295.00 STMISOE
Stimulus Isolation
Adapter (200V max)
See pages I135 to I138 for a wide
range of electrode options.
NEW
Piezo Audio Transducer
The OUT102 piezo transducer is typically connected directly to the STM100C
stimulator module. When the stimulator module output rises above 1.5 volts, the
piezo indicator will emit a constant audible signal (3.0 kHz @ 80dB).
Accordingly, the device is very useful for providing an audible stimulus, or alarm,
when a physiological signal passes a certain threshold. As such, the OUT102
makes an excellent audible BPM indicator for ECG, blood pressure or respiration signals. The device can also be used to indicate when temperature or another slowly moving variable (e.g. electrodermal response) passes a certain threshold. The threshold for the OUT102 is determined by adjusting the amplitude control on the STM100C module. The specific Biopotential or Transducer amplifier
signal monitored can be recorded while simultaneously directed through the
STM100C module. The OUT102 also connects directly to the UIM100C digital I/O
ports for operation with Control Channel outputs. The OUT102 measures 2.5cm
(dia) x 1cm (high) and comes equipped with a 1.8m cable terminated in a
3.5mm phone plug. An adapter is included for connecting the OUT102 to the
UIM100C digital I/O ports.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-7280
35.00 OUT100
For CBL200 and CBL204, see page I138.
BS4 72-7281
245.00 OUT101
For CBL102, CBL105 and CBL106,
see page I140.
BS4 72-7282
45.00 OUT101T
BS4 72-7283
55.00 OUT101E
Replacement Foam Ear Inserts, pkg. of 50
BS4 72-7284
95.00 OUT102
Piezo Audio Transducer
Additional STM Series Interface Cables:
Model
Physiology
Catalog No.
STM100C—see page I116
Tubephone Set
Use the OUT101 tubephone with a STM100C stimulator module to deliver clicks
and tones in auditory evoked response applications (i.e. ABR). The Tubephone
design consists of a monaural acoustic transducer attached to a short, flexible,
plastic tube, which fits into the subject’s ear with the aid of a foam tip. Use of the
Tubephone reduces ambient noise and bone conduction problems, which can
interfere with auditory response recordings. Furthermore, because the
Tubephone provides a 1 msec acoustic signal delay (due to plastic tube), it automatically separates true response from electromagnetic artifact resulting from
speaker activation. The OUT101 measures 3.8cm (wide) x 5cm (high) x 1cm
(thick), includes a clip for attachment to fabric or fixtures and comes equipped
with a 1.8m cable terminated in a 6.3mm (1/4") phone plug. The OUT101
Tubephone Set includes one Tubephone, plastic tube and 50 foam ear inserts. The
OUT101 response compares to TDH-39, 49 or 50 audiometric headphones.
Product
Headphones
Tubephone Set
Replacement Plastic Tubes: pkg. of 4
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I117
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Remote Monitoring Module Set
The TEL100M-C requires one 9V alkaline battery (included) for
operation. Expected battery life is approximately 24 hours of continuous operation. A low battery indicator light will flash when the battery needs to be replaced.
Connection Cables
These cables connect the TEL100D-C receiver to the TEL100M-C
transmitter. The lightweight coaxial cables minimize hindrance
caused by multiple heavy cables. The CBL117 is included with the
TEL100C set. For increased operating distance, use CBL118.
Specifications
The TEL100C system offers a way to record data while subjects are
mobile and/or physically distant (up to 60 meters) from the recording system. The TEL100C system includes a portable amplifier/transmitter, which converts up to four channels of data into a modulated
data stream. This data stream travels over a single lightweight coaxial cable to the receiver module. The receiver module demodulates
the data and sends it to the MP System for recording and analysis.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
In keeping with the modular design, the TEL100C will work with your
current MP System and any other standard 100-series amplifiers. Up
to four TEL100C module sets can be used with a single MP System.
I118
Number of Channels
4
Low Pass Filter
30 Hz, 500 Hz
High Pass Filter
DC, 0.05 Hz and 0.5 Hz
Channel Gain Control
10 levels: x50 to x50,000
Output Range
±9 V (analog)
Offset Control
Yes
Input Impedance
2 MΩ (differential)
CMRR
110 dB min (50/60Hz)
CMII
1000 MΩ min (50/60Hz)
CMIV
±7 V (referenced to amplifier ground)
±1500 VDC (referenced to mains ground)
Noise Voltage
0.1 µV rms (0.05-30 Hz)
Transducer Excitation
±5 V (10 V pk) @ 10 ma (max)
Signal/Crosstalk Ratio
(0.05-500 Hz) 65 dB min
Each channel incorporates a switchable, non-distorting 50/60 Hz
interference filter. Gain and bandwidth can be adjusted independently for each channel.
Signal/Noise Ratio
(0.05-30 Hz) 75 dB min, (0.05-500 Hz) 65 dB min
Encoding
TDM-DSB/LC
Signal Transmission
Range
≤ 60 m via coaxial cable
The TEL100C system includes:
TEL100M Weight
290 g (with battery)
• 1 - TEL100D-C receiver module
• 1 - TEL100M-C portable amplifier/transmitter
• 1 - CBL117 10-meter connection cable
• TEL100C system
Four Channel Receiver Module
The TEL100D-C four-channel receiver module connects directly to
an MP System and is included in the TEL100C remote monitoring
module set. The receiver incorporates independent filtering controls
for each recording channel. Up to four TEL100D-C modules can be
used with any MP System. A combination of other 100-series amplifiers, plus one or more TEL100D-Cs, can be used together for a maximum of 16 channels. The TEL100D-C requires a TEL100M-C amplifier/transmitter plus CBL117 or CBL118 for operation.
TEL100M Dimensions,
WxLxH
9 x 15 x 3.3 cm
TEL100D Weight
370 g
TEL100D Dimensions,
WxDxH
4 x 11 x 19 cm
TEL100M Power Source 9 V alkaline battery (24 hrs nominal)
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7286
$
Model
1,495.00 TEL100C
Product
Remote Monitoring Set
BS4 72-7287
795.00 TEL100D-C
BS4 72-7288
795.00 TEL100M-C Four Channel Amplifier/Transmitter
Module
Four Channel Receiver Module
BS4 72-7289
75.00 CBL117
Connection Cable, 10 meter
BS4 72-7290
145.00 CBL118
Connection Cable, 60 meter
Four Channel Amplifier/Transmitter Module
The TEL100M-C amplifies and transmits up to four data channels to
the TEL100D-C and is included in the TEL100C remote monitoring
module set. The transmitter includes independent filtering, offset and
gain controls for each recording channel. The transmitter measures
9cm x 15cm x 3.3cm and needs 5cm clearance on each side for electrode or transducer attachment. A belt clip is attached to the back of
the module so it can be worn at the subject’s waist. The “Smart Sensor”
electrodes and transducers listed on page I119 plug into four 9-pin
connectors (two on each side of the transmitter). Excitation voltages
present on each input channel provide power for transducers.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Electrodes and Transducers for the TEL100C Module Set
No.
Catalog No.
1.
BS4 72-7290
2.
BS4 72-7291
3.
BS4 72-7292
4.
BS4 72-7293
5.
BS4 72-7294
6.
BS4 72-7331
7.
BS4 72-7332
8.
BS4 72-7295
9.
BS4 72-7296
10.
BS4 72-7297
11.
BS4 72-7298
12.
BS4 72-7299
13.
BS4 72-7300
14.
BS4 72-7301
15.
BS4 72-7302
16.
BS4 72-7303
17.
BS4 72-7304
18.
BS4 72-7305
19.
BS4 72-7306
20.
BS4 72-7307
$
95.00
175.00
245.00
125.00
395.00
795.00
795.00
795.00
795.00
295.00
er specifications mirror the characteristics of the respective “TSD”
types listed. Generally, biopotentials and other signals can be recorded for up to 24 hours. All transducers come with a 1.8-meter cable
unless otherwise specified.
Model
Description
TSD Type
Page
SS1A
Unshielded Touchproof Electrode Adapter (10 cm)
—
—
SS2
Shielded Electrode Lead Assembly (1 meter)
—
—
SS3A
Electrodermal Response Transducer
see TSD203
Page I134
SS4A
Pulse Plethysmogram Transducer
see TSD200
Page I133
SS5B
Respiratory Effort Transducer
see TSD201
Page I133
SS6
Fast Response Temperature Probe
see TSD202A
Page I134
SS7
Skin Surface Temperature Probe
see TSD202B
Page I134
SS10
Hand Switch
see TSD116A
Page I124
SS11A
Air Flow (medium) Transducer
see TSD117
Page I125
SS17
Physiological Sounds Microphone
see TSD108
Page I122
SS20
Twin Axis Goniometer, 110mm (requires 2 channels)
see TSD130A
Page I128
SS21
Twin Axis Goniometer, 180mm (requires 2 channels)
see TSD130B
Page I128
SS22
Single Axis Torsiometer, 110mm
see TSD130C
Page I128
SS23
Single Axis Torsiometer, 180mm
see TSD130D
Page I128
SS24
Finger Goniometer, 35mm
see TSD130E
Page I128
SS25
Hand Dynamometer
see TSD121C
Page I126
SS26
Tri-Axial Accelerometer 5G (requires 3 channels)
see TSD109C
Page I123
SS27
Tri-Axial Accelerometer 50G (requires 3 channels)
see TSD109F
Page I123
SS28
Heel/Toe Strike Transducer
see TSD111
Page I123
SS29
Multi-lead ECG Cable (requires 3 channels)
see TSD155C
Page I132
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
Physiology
Smart Sensor (SS) electrodes and transducers connect to the
TEL100M-C amplifier/transmitter. Any Smart Sensor electrode or
transducer can be plugged into any TEL100M-C input. The following
SS series transducers connect to the TEL100C system. The transduc-
I119
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
NEW
Continuous Noninvasive Blood Pressure Measurement System
Specifications
NIBP100A
BP Waveform Output
1 channel (0-500 mmHg)
Output Range
0 – 5 V (analog)
Pressure Ranges
60 – 250 mmHg (Systolic)
45 – 235 mmHg (Mean)
40 – 220 mmHg (Diastolic)
Pulse Rate Range
30 – 180 BPM
Operating Temperature 10 to 40 °C
Storage Temperature
-10 to +60 °C
Weight
7.4 kg
Dimensions, W x D x H 28 x 29 x 14 cm
Protective Class
IEC Class I
Power Consumption
85 VA
Interface
HLT100C—see page I105
UIM100C—see page I104
TSD105A
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
The NIBP100A is a stand-alone system for continuous noninvasive
real-time measurement of human blood pressure. The system
employs a tonometric technique, which records intra-arterial pulse
pressure. The tonometric sensor is placed just distal of the styloid
process with the aid of an included wrist brace. The NIBP100A also
incorporates a built-in oscillometric cuff measurement system to calibrate the relative intra-arterial pressure readings to absolute values.
I120
The NIBP100A system outputs a continuous analog waveform representative of the blood pressure. The oscillometric measurement is
performed at user defined intervals to insure the accuracy of the
blood pressure waveform generated by the NIBP100A. The MP
System can collect this waveform and AcqKnowledge can be used to
extract the systolic, diastolic and mean blood pressure values on a
beat-by-beat basis. The NIPB100A includes a cable and the INISO signal isolator to connect to the HLT100C or UIM100C module.
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE: When using the MP System to record
biopotentials and NIBP from a human subject, use an HLT100C with
the included INISO adapter to connect the NIBP100A to the MP
System.
Rated Output
1 mV/V (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Ranges
50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 g
Noise (rms)
(Range/50) mg @ 10 V excitation, 1 Hz bandwidth
Nonlinearity
<±0.025% FSR
Hysteresis
<±0.05% FSR
Nonrepeatability
<±0.05% FSR
30 minute creep
<±0.05% FSR
Temperature Range
-10°C to 70°C
Thermal Zero Shift
<±0.03% FSR/°C
Thermal Range Shift
<0.03% Reading/°C
Maximum Excitation
10 VDC
Mounting Rod
9.5 mm (dia) – variable orientation
Weight
300 g (with mounting rod)
Dimensions
19 mm (wide), 25 mm (thick), 190 mm (long)
Cable Length
3m
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7308
$
Model
4,995.00 NIBP100A
Product
Continuous Noninvasive Blood
Pressure Measurement System
The NIBP100A includes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Continuous Noninvasive Blood Pressure Monitor
Tonometric Sensor
Oscillometric Cuffs (large adult, adult, small adult)
Cuff Hose
Wrist Brace
CBLNIBP1 (9-pin male DSUB to 3.5mm phone plug —
1 meter)
• INISO Signal Isolator for HLT100C module
• Hospital Grade Power Cord (US plug)
• Operation Manual
IMPORTANT USAGE NOTE: The 100 watt, linear voltage converter
is required when operating the NIBP100A with 240 VAC @ 50 Hz
mains power. Euro power cord included.
For a low-cost alternative to measure
non-continuous, indirect blood pressure,
see the TSD120 on page I124.
For invasive blood pressure,
see TSD104A on page I121.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Precision Pressure Transducer
Variable Range Force Transducer
The TSD104A measures direct arterial or venous blood pressure in
animals or records pressure changes within an in-vitro circuit (e.g.
Langendorff heart preparation). The TSD104A connects to tubing via
standard Luer Lok fittings. The transducer is small and lightweight
and the slotted base, with integral Velcro® strap, permits easy mounting. The TSD104A interfaces with the DA100C general-purpose transducer amplifier. The transducer is supplied non-sterile but can be
cold sterilized. Replacement transducers (RX104A) can be purchased without the cable, making the TSD104A a very economical
solution for pressure sensing applications.
The TSD105A interfaces with the DA100C general-purpose transducer amplifier to measure a wide range of forces (1mg to 1000g) in a
variety of applications, including very fine in-vitro tissue bath work
as well as larger in-vivo applications. Forces are conveyed to the
strain beam via an adjustable pivot, five-position, precision lever arm
to insure accurate measurements. The transducer comes with a versatile mounting rod assembly to support multiple orientations. When
fine tension and position adjustments are required, the mounting
rod can be clamped to an HDW100A.
Catalog No.
BS4 72-3715
Operational Pressure
-50 to 300 mmHg
Overpressure
-400 to +4000 mmHg
Dynamic Response
100 Hz
Model
595.00 TSD105A
Product
Variable Range Force Transducer
Physiology
Specifications
$
Transducer Dimensions 67 mm long, 25 mm wide
Weight
11.5 g
MRI compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts)
Unbalance
50 mmHg max
Connection Ports
Male Luer (2)
8-hour Drift
1mm Hg after 5 minute warm-up
Isolation
≤5 µA leakage at 120 VAC/60 Hz
Defibrillation
Withstands 5 discharges of 400 joules in 5 minutes across
a load
Operating Temperature +15 to +40 °C
Storage Temperature
-30 to +60 °C
Combined Effects of
Sensitivity, Linearity
& Hysteresis
1mm Hg (nominal)
Output
5 µV/mmHg (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Cable Length
3m
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-3704
295.00 TSD104A
Transducer and Cable
BS4 72-3705
95.00 RX104A
Replacement Element
For HDW100A Force Transducer Tension Adjuster,
see page I127.
For TSD125 Series Fixed Range Force Transducer,
see page I127.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I121
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
I122
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(High Flow)
Physiological Sounds Microphone
The TSD107B is a highly linear, wide range, air flow transducer that
can be used to perform a variety of high performance tests relating
to air flow, lung volume and expired gas analysis. The TSD107B is
ideal for applications that have large flow requirements (e.g. exercise physiology). The TSD107B consists of a high performance pneumotach coupled with an internal, precision differential pressure
transducer that converts the differential pressure generated across
the pneumotach into a proportional voltage signal. The TSD107B
interfaces with the DA100C general-purpose transducer amplifier. All
connections can be performed with AFT7 (35mm ID) smooth bore
tubing (see page I141) and AFT11 series couplers (see page I142).
The TSD108 interfaces with the DA100C general-purpose transducer
amplifier to measure a wide array of physiological sounds. Most
commonly, the TSD108 is used to measure heart sounds or Korotkoff
sounds. When the TSD108 signal is recorded along with the TSD120
blood pressure cuff signal, the Korotkoff sounds vividly mark the systolic and diastolic blood pressure. The TSD108 can also record the
sounds associated with rubbing or grinding (e.g., Bruxism). To listen to the physiological sounds with headphones as they are recorded, pipe the TSD108 signal through the STM100C stimulator module.
The acoustical transducer element is a piezo-electric ceramic disk,
which is bonded to the interior of a metallic circular housing.
• For air flow and lung volume measurements, use the
TSD107B with the AFT21 non-rebreathing T valve and the
AFT9 mouthpiece with the AFT4 bacterial filter.
• For exercise physiology measurements, use the TSD107B
with the AFT25 facemask (includes integral non-rebreathing
T valve) and the AFT15A or AFT15B mixing chambers.
Specifications
Pneumotach Type
Hans Rudolf® #4813 with integral differential pressure
transducer
Calibrated Flow Range ±800 L/min
Dead Space Volume
87.8 ml
Nominal Output
45 µV/[liters/sec] (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Dimensions, D x H x W 4 x 11 x 19 cm
Weight
690 g
Connection Ports
35 mm OD
Cable Length
3m
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7309
$
Specifications
Frequency Response
35 Hz to 3500 Hz
Housing
Stainless Steel
MRI Compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts)
Sterilizable
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
Noise
5 µV rms - (500-3500 Hz)
Output
2V (p-p) maximum
Weight
9g
Dimensions
29 mm diameter, 6 mm thick
Cable Length
3m
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
TEL100C Compatibility SS17—see page I119
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7310
Model
1,395.00 TSD107B
$
Model
245.00 TSD108
Product
Physiological Sounds Microphone
Product
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(High Flow)
For additional air flow transducers,
see TSD117 (page I125), TSD127 (page I128),
TSD137 (page I129), and for Accessories,
see AFT Accessories (pages I141 to I143).
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Tri-Axial Accelerometers
The Tri-Axial Accelerometers are high level output transducers that
connect directly to the HLT100C High Level Transducer module. The
TSD109 series accelerometers provide three outputs, simultaneously measuring acceleration along the X, Y and Z axes. The TSD109C is
optimal for measuring accelerations when performing slow movements, such as walking and hand tremor. The TSD109F is more suitable for quick movements, such as swinging a tennis racket. The
transducers are the same size and can be used on any part of the
body or attached to external equipment. The pliable and unobtrusive
design conforms readily to body contours. They come with a Velcro®
strap for easy attachment.
Specifications
Channels
3 - (X, Y, and Z axes)
Range (Output)
TSD109C: ±5 G (250 mV/G)
TSD109F: ±50 G (38 mV/G)
Heel/Toe Strike Transducer
Each TSD111 heel/toe strike transducer incorporates two force sensitive resistor (FSR) sensors designed for attachment to the sole of a
shoe. Typically, one FSR is placed (taped) under the heel and the
other is placed under the toe. The FSRs indicate the precise moment
of pressure placed on the heel and toe as the subject walks. The
heel/toe strike data is encoded onto a single analog channel; the heel
strike results in a [-1V] signal and the toe strike results in a [+1V]
signal. If heel and toe strike timing is required for both feet, two
TSD111 transducers are required. The TSD111 comes equipped with
a 7.6-meter cable and is designed for direct connection to the
HLT100C module.
Specifications
Nominal Output Range -1 to +1 V
Nominal Contact Force 200 g to indicate heel/toe strike
Attachment
TAPE1, TAPE2, vinyl electrical or duct tape
FSR Dimensions
18.3 mm (dia) x 0.36 mm (thick) and 30 cm pigtail lead
FSR Active Area
12.7 mm (dia)
Cable Length
7.6 m
Interface
HLT100C—see page I105
TEL100C compatibility
SS28—see page I119
Noise
TSD109C: 225 µG√Hz rms
TSD109F: 1.0 mG√Hz rms
Bandwidth
DC - 500 Hz (-3 dB)
Catalog No.
Nonlinearity
0.2% of Full Scale
BS4 72-7313
Transverse Axis
Sensitivity
±2%
Alignment Error
±1°
Package
Compliant silicone housing
Weight
17 g
Dimensions, L x W x H
33 x 28 x 19 mm
Power
+5V @ 9 mA (via HLT100C)
Sterilizable
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
Cable Length
3m
Interface
HLT100C—see page I105
$
Model
245.00 TSD111
Physiology
The accelerometers’ frequency response extends from DC to 500Hz.
They are extremely accurate and can easily be checked for calibration by changing their orientation in three-dimensional space, so that
gravity (G=1) acts only upon the desired axis.
NEW
Product
Heel/Toe Strike Transducer
TEL100C Compatibility SS26 (5G) and SS27 (50G)—see page I119
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7311
795.00 TSD109C
Tri-Axial Accelerometer, ±5G Range
BS4 72-7312
795.00 TSD109F
Tri-Axial Accelerometer, ±50G Range
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I123
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
NEW
Variable Assessment Transducer
The TSD115 incorporates a slide
control with graduated scale that
allows users to gauge their subjective response to a variety of
stimuli. Multiple TSD115 transducers can be used simultaneously, allowing several people to
answer the same question or
otherwise respond to stimuli. The transducer is lightweight and fits easily into the
subject’s hand or lap. The TSD115 comes equipped with a 7.6-meter cable and
is designed for direct connection to the HLT100C module.
Specifications
Scale Output Range
0-5 V
Scale Resolution
Infinitely adjustable
Slide Control Length
10 cm
Dimensions (H x D x W) 4 x 11 x 19 cm
Weight
230 g
Cable Length
7.6 m
Interface
HLT100C—see page I105
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7314
$
Model
245.00 TSD115
Product
Variable Assessment Transducer
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Noninvasive Blood Pressure
Cuff Transducer
The TSD120 can measure
systolic and diastolic blood
pressure by the oscillometric or
auscultatory (Korotkoff sounds)
technique. The TSD120 includes
an adjustable cuff (standard
adult cuff: RX120D), pump
bulb, pressure gauge and pressure transducer. The pressure
transducer is attached to the cuff
and connects to the DA100C
general-purpose transducer amplifier. To visually identify Korotkoff sounds during cuff deflation, use the TSD108 physiological sounds microphone. For indication of relative blood pressure changes without cycling the cuff pressure, inflate
the cuff to a pressure between systolic and diastolic.
Specifications
Cuff Circumference
Range
25.4 cm to 40.6 cm (RX120D cuff)
Cuff Dimensions
14.5 cm (wide) x 54 cm (long)
Pressure Range
20 mmHg to 300 mmHg
Manometer Accuracy
±3 mmHg
Output
5 µV/mmHg (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Weight
350 g
Cable Length
3m
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7315
I124
$
Model
395.00 TSD120
Product
NEW
Switches and Markers
The TSD116 series is used for externally triggering data
acquisition, remote event marking, or psychophysiological response tests. The switches connect to the
UIM100C digital I/O ports and can be monitored as
input channels. The TSD116 series incorporate momentary ON operation (switch is ON only when pressed).
The TSD116A is a single channel hand switch, the
TSD116B is a single channel foot switch and the new
TSD116C is a compact eight channel digital marker box.
The TSD116C allows the user to independently mark
events, or provide responses, on up to eight channels
simultaneously. Because digital channels can be interleaved with analog channels, when using AcqKnowledge,
it’s easy to assign separate digital channels as event
markers for individual analog input channels.
Specifications
Switch Type
Pushbutton: (ON) – OFF
Dimensions
TSD116A: 19 mm (dia), 63 mm (long)
TSD116B: 69 mm (wide), 90 mm (long),
26 mm (high)
TSD116C: 19 cm (wide), 11 cm (deep),
4 cm (high)
Cable Length
TSD116A and TSD116B: 1.8 m, TSD116C: 3 m
Connector Type
TSD116A and TSD116B: 2 mm pin plugs
TSD116C: Stripped and tinned wires
MRI Compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts) - TSD116A hand
switch only
Interface
UIM100C—see page I104
TEL100C Compatibility SS10 (Hand Switch)—see page I119
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7316
95.00 TSD116A
Single Channel
Hand Switch
BS4 72-7317
95.00 TSD116B
Single Channel
Foot Switch
BS4 72-7318
245.00 TSD116C
Compact EightChannel Digital
Marker Box
For absolute and continuous
measurement of noninvasive
blood pressure, use the NIBP100A;
see page I120.
Noninvasive Blood Pressure Cuff Transducer
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(Medium Flow)
Blood Pressure Cuffs for
the TSD120
The TSD117 can be used to perform a variety of tests relating to air
flow, lung volume and expired gas analysis. The transducer includes
a removable head (RX117) for easy cleaning and sterilization. The
TSD117 is intended for human use and is ideal for classroom situations. The TSD117 interfaces with the DA100C general-purpose
transducer amplifier. All connections can be performed with AFT12
(22mm ID) tubing and AFT11 series couplers. See pages I141 to I143
for the AFT Series.
The RX120 series are optional blood pressure cuffs, of varying sizes,
which can be quickly and easily swapped in and out of the TSD120
noninvasive blood pressure cuff transducer. Use a single TSD120 and
substitute one cuff for another to accommodate a wide range in limb
circumferences.
Specifications
Flow Rate
±300 L/min
Dead Space
93 ml
Nominal Output
60 µV/[liters/sec] (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Cuff
Circumference
Range (cm)
Width
(cm)
Length
(cm)
RX120A
9.5-13.5
5.2
18.5
RX120B
13.0-19.0
7.5
26.1
RX120C
18.4-26.7
10.5
34.2
RX120D
25.4-40.6
14.5
54
RX120E
34.3-50.8
17.6
63.3
RX120F
40.6-66
21
82.5
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-7321
45.00 RX120A
Model
Blood Pressure Cuff
Product
BS4 72-7322
45.00 RX120B
Blood Pressure Cuff
BS4 72-7323
45.00 RX120C
Blood Pressure Cuff
BS4 72-7324
45.00 RX120D
Blood Pressure Cuff
BS4 72-7325
55.00 RX120E
Blood Pressure Cuff
BS4 72-7326
55.00 RX120F
Blood Pressure Cuff
Physiology
• For air flow and lung volume measurements, use the TSD117
with the AFT2 mouthpiece and the AFT1 bacterial filter.
• For measurements of expired gases, use the TSD117 with
the AFT22 non-rebreathing T valve with AFT10 facemask and
the AFT15A or AFT15B mixing chambers.
Replacement Head
The RX117 is a sterilizable air flow head for the TSD117 pneumotach
transducer. Multiple RX117 heads help eliminate equipment downtime during cleaning procedures. To reduce the cost of disposable
items, use the RX117 with the AFT8 sterilizable mouthpiece. (22mm
ID/30mm OD)
Specifications
Flow Head Dimensions 82.5 mm (dia) x 101.5 mm (long)
Flow Head Weight
80 g
MRI Compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts)
Handle Dimensions
127 mm (long) x 23 mm (thick) x 35 mm (wide)
Handle Weight
85 g
Connection Ports
22 mm ID/30 mm OD
Cable Length
3m
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
TEL100C Compatibility SS11A—see page I119
Catalog No.
$
Model
BS4 72-7319
395.00 TSD117
BS4 72-7320
95.00 RX117
Product
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(Medium Flow)
Replacement Head
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I125
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
General-purpose Hand Dynamometer
The TSD121C is an isometric
dynamometer that measures a
variety of gripping or pulling
strengths for multiple muscle
groups. The isometric design
improves experiment repeatability
and accuracy. Hand grip strength
is easily recorded in pounds or
kilograms force. Using the
Dynagrips option, the pulling strength of single or multiple muscle groups can be
measured. To measure arm, leg, torso or neck strength, mount the TSD121C against
a wall or floor and pull the free end directly (or redirect with a pulley). For in-depth
studies of muscular activity, combine TSD121C force recordings with EMG recordings. The TSD121C has a 3-meter cable terminated in a connector that interfaces with
the DA100C general-purpose transducer amplifier. The ergonomic soft handle design
and simple calibration procedure make this device very easy to use.
Specifications
Isometric Range
0-100 kg
Nominal Output
13.2 µV/kg (normalized to 1V excitation)
Weight
315 g
Dimensions (L x W x T) 185 x 42 x 30 mm
Cable Length
3m
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
TEL100C Compatibility SS25—see page I119
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7327
$
595.00 TSD121C
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 72-7330
Product
Hand Dynamometer
95.00 DYNAGRIPS Dynagrips Option
Oxygen Saturation (SpO2) Transducers
The TSD123 series transducers connect to the OXY100C pulse oximeter module
to provide continuous readings for SpO2, pulse rate and pulse waveform. The
TSD123A transducer is a comfortable and easy to use finger clip, ideal for shortterm monitoring. The TSD123B transducer attaches to fingers, toes and ears with
adhesive patches (included) and is well suited for long-term monitoring.
The TSD122 stroboscope connects directly to the
UIM100C or STM100C module for single pass or averaging type visual evoked response applications. The stroboscope can be set up to either generate or respond to
a TTL synchronizing signal for data acquisition. The
TSD122 is battery-operated and will operate from zero
to 12,000 flashes a minute. Cables are included for interfacing with the MP System.
Specifications
Display
Digital LCD
Battery
Built-in, rechargeable
Battery Life
60 hours at 100 strobes/sec
Flash Duration
30 µsec
Flash Energy
180 mJoule
External TTL
Sync/Trigger
Weight
1.1 kg
Body Dimensions
(W x H x L)
9.3 9 x 23 cm
Reflector Housing
12.2 cm (dia)
Handle
10.8 cm (long)
I/O Ports
TTL (Sync input and output) 3.5mm phone jacks
Cables
CBL102 and CBL106
Interface
UIM100C—see page I104
STM100C—see page I116
Catalog No.
$
Model
Optical Transmission
Red (660 nm) and IR (940 nm)
MRI Compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts)
Weight
TSD123A: 23 g, TSD123B: 6 g
695.00 TSD122A
Stroboscope, 120/60Hz
BS4 72-7329
695.00 TSD122B
Stroboscope, 240/50Hz
Dimensions (L x W x H) TSD123A: 62 x 23 x 26 mm, TSD123B: 12 x 12 x 12 mm
Sterilizable
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
Cable Length
1m
Interface
OXY100C—see page I113
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-3721
245.00 TSD123A
Finger Clip
BS4 72-3722
245.00 TSD123B
Universal Adhesive
Product
BS4 72-7328
Specifications
Catalog No.
I126
Model
Stroboscope
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Precision Fixed Range Force Transducers
The TSD125 series force transducers interface with the DA100C general-purpose
transducer amplifier. The TSD125 series have been designed for in-vitro tissue
bath studies, in-vivo force measurements and other applications where low
noise, accuracy and repeatability are critical. The most sensitive units are ideal
for use with small preparations such as aortic rings. The TSD125 series utilizes
a precision strain gauge element, which has superb low noise characteristics and
excellent linearity. The transducers come with a versatile mounting rod assembly
to support a variety of orientations. When fine tension and position adjustments
are required, clamp the mounting rod to an HDW100A (see right).
Specifications
1mV/V (normalized to 1V excitation)
Range
TSD125C
TSD125D
TSD125E
TSD125F
Noise (rms)
[10 volts Excitation]
[1 Hz Bandwidth]
TSD125C
TSD125D
TSD125E
TSD125F
50 gram
100 gram
200 gram
500 gram
1mg
2mg
4mg
10mg
Force Transducer
Tension Adjuster
The HDW100A tension adjuster operates with the
TSD105A and TSD125 series force transducers. The
rugged design and stability of the mounting allow for
fine position control. The position adjuster is located
on the top for easy access and smooth operation.
Vertical scales are provided for both metric and English
units. The HDW100A slides directly onto vertical rod
laboratory stands and force transducers are clamped
into the unit horizontally.
Specifications
Travel Range:
25 mm
Resolution
0.0025 mm per degree rotation
Stand Clamp
13.25 mm ID
Transducer Clamp
11 mm ID
Weight
140 g
Nonlinearity
<±0.025% FSR
Hysteresis
<±0.05% FSR
Nonrepeatability
<±0.05% FSR
Catalog No.
30 Minute Creep
<±0.05% FSR
BS4 72-7334
Temperature Range
-10°C to 70°C
Thermal Zero Shift
<±0.03% FSR/°C
Thermal Range Shift
<0.03% Reading/°C
Maximum Excitation
10 VDC
Physiology
Full Scale Output
NEW
Dimensions (H x T x D) 93 x 19 x 74 mm
Mounting Rod
9.5 mm (dia) – variable orientation
Weight
250 g
$
Model
245.00 HDW100A
Product
Force Transducer
Tension Adjuster
Dimensions (L x W x H) 100 x 19 x 25 mm
Cable Length
3m
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7330
395.00 TSD125C
Precision Fixed Range Force Transducer, 50 gram
BS4 72-7331
395.00 TSD125D
Precision Fixed Range Force Transducer, 100 gram
BS4 72-7332
395.00 TSD125E
Precision Fixed Range Force Transducer, 200 gram
BS4 72-7333
395.00 TSD125F
Precision Fixed Range Force Transducer, 500 gram
See the Variable Range TSD105A Force
Transducer on page I121.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I127
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
NEW
I128
Pneumotach Air Flow
Transducer (Low Flow)
Goniometers
The TSD127 can perform a variety of pulmonary measurements
relating to air flow, lung volume and expired gas analysis. The transducer includes a detachable flow head (RX127) for easy cleaning
and sterilization. The TSD127 is intended for animal use and consists
of a low flow, pneumotach air flow head (RX127) coupled to a precision, highly sensitive, differential pressure transducer (TSD160A).
The TSD127 will connect directly to a breathing circuit or plethysmogram chamber.
The TSD130 series goniometers measure limb angular movement.
Goniometers attach to the body using TAPE2 medical adhesive tape.
The units have a telescopic endblock that compensates for changes
in distance between the two mounting points as the limb moves. The
gauge mechanism allows for accurate measurement of polycentric
joints. A DA100C is required for each output channel; accordingly,
the twin-axis goniometers require two DA100C amplifiers to measure
both axes simultaneously.
• For air flow and lung volume measurements, connect a
short air flow cannula to theTSD127.
• For measurements of expired gases, use the TSD127 with
the AFT22 non-rebreathingvalve.
All connections can be performed with AFT11 series couplers
(see page I142).
• The TSD130A and TSD130B are dual output devices used for
simultaneous measurements around two orthogonal rotational axes (e.g., wrist flexion/extension and radial/ulnar
deviations).
• The TSD130C and TSD130D are single output devices used
to measure axial rotation about a single plane (e.g., forearm
pronation/supination).
• The TSD130E (single-axis goniometer) is used to measure
finger joint movement.
Replacement Air Flow Head for the TSD127
The RX127 is the replacement low air flow head for the TSD127
pneumotach transducer. Multiple RX127 heads help eliminate equipment downtime during cleaning procedures. (11mm ID/15mm OD).
TSD130 Specifications
Model
Specifications
Max
Channels Length
Type
Min
Length
Range
Weight
17g
Range
± 90 L/min
TSD130A Goniometer
2
110mm
75mm
± 180°
Nominal Output
500 µV/[liters/sec] (normalized to 1V excitation)
TSD130B Goniometer
2
180mm
130mm
± 180°
19g
Dead Space
11 cc
TSD130C Torsiometer
1
110mm
75mm
± 90°
17g
MRI Compatible
Yes (no metal parts) – air flow head
TSD130D Torsiometer
1
180mm
130mm
± 90°
19g
Weight
11 g – air flow head
TSD130E Goniometer
1
35mm
30mm
± 180°
8g
Dimensions
5.7 cm (long) – air flow head
Ports
15 mm OD / 11 mm ID
Tubing Length
1.8 m (to DA100C)
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
Catalog No.
BS4 72-3709
BS4 72-3710
$
Model
245.00 TSD127
75.00 RX127
Product
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(Low Flow)
Replacement Air Flow Head
Specifications
Nominal Output
5 µV/degree (normalized to 1 V excitation)
Cable Length
3m
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
TEL100C
Compatibility
Catalog No.
SS20 thru SS24—see page I119
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7335
795.00 TSD130A
BS4 72-7336
795.00 TSD130B
Goniometer
Goniometer
BS4 72-7337
795.00 TSD130C
Torisometer
BS4 72-7338
795.00 TSD130D
Torisometer
BS4 72-7339
795.00 TSD130E
Goniometer
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
NEW
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducers (Very Low Flow)
The TSD137 series pneumotachs can perform a variety of small animal pulmonary measurements relating to air flow, lung volume and
expired gas analysis. Each TSD137 transducer type consists of a low
flow, pneumotach head coupled to a precision, highly sensitive, differential pressure transducer. The TSD137 series pneumotachs will
connect directly to a breathing circuit or plethysmogram chamber.
For air flow and lung volume measurements, connect a short air flow
cannula to the TSD137 series flow head. For switchable or replacement head options, see the RX137 Series below. All of the TSD137
series pneumotachs come equipped with an internal heating element
that can be optionally attached to the AC137A 6-volt power supply
(see page I146).
Catalog No.
Replacement Air Flow Heads for the TSD137
Series Pneumotachs
The RX137 series are low air flow heads for the TSD137 series
pneumotach transducers. The RX137 heads can be mixed and
matched with any of the TSD137 series pneumotachs. A wide range
in flows can be accommodated by switching one head for another
when using a single TSD137 pneumotach. RX137 heads connect to
the TSD160A differential pressure transducer via standard 4mm ID
tubing. Multiple RX137 heads help eliminate equipment downtime
during cleaning procedures.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7340
645.00 TSD137A
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(Very Low Flow)
BS4 72-7341
645.00 TSD137B
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(Very Low Flow)
BS4 72-7342
645.00 TSD137C
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(Very Low Flow)
BS4 72-7343
645.00 TSD137D
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(Very Low Flow)
BS4 72-7344
645.00 TSD137E
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer
(Very Low Flow)
BS4 72-7345
395.00 RX137A
Replacement Air Flow Head
BS4 72-7346
395.00 RX137B
Replacement Air Flow Head
BS4 72-7347
395.00 RX137C
Replacement Air Flow Head
BS4 72-7348
395.00 RX137D
Replacement Air Flow Head
BS4 72-7349
395.00 RX137E
Replacement Air Flow Head
Physiology
Specifications
Pneumotach Air Flow Transducer (Very Low Flow) Specifications
Dead
Range Space
Output
Flow Ports
Pneumotach (ml/sec) (cc) (µV/[ml/sec]) (OD-mm)
Nominal Output
Normalized to 1 V excitation
(size)
(weight)
Tubing Length
1.8 m (to TSD160A)
TSD137A
±12
0.1
25.700
7
Small Mouse
30.0 grams
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
TSD137B
±20
0.8
15.400
7
Mouse
50.0 grams
TSD137C
±60
0.9
5.780
7
Rat/Guinea Pig 350.0 grams
TSD137D
±150
2.0
2.100
10
Cat/Rabbit
750.0 grams
TSD137E
±350
4.0
0.924
11
Small Dog
5.5 kg
TSD137 Series
Animal
Replacement Air Flow Heads Specifications
Head
Range
Dead Space Length
(ml/sec) (cc)
(mm)
Flow Ports
ID
OD (mm)
Weight
(grams)
RX137A
±12
0.1
75
1.35
7
100
RX137B
±20
0.8
75
6.00
7
90
RX137C
±60
0.9
75
6.00
7
90
RX137D
±150
2.0
75
9.00
10
100
RX137E
±350
4.0
60
10.00
11
60
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I129
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Laser Doppler Flow Probes
The following probes interface to the LDF100C laser
Doppler flow module. Interface: LDF100C—see page I112
Needle Probes
Surface Probes
The TSD140 series surface probes are designed for skin and exposed
tissue blood flow monitoring. All surface probes are made from
black Delrin®. The signal delivery fiber intersects the probe body at
a right angle, making the probes easy to secure to the skin or tissue
surface. Surface probes are non-suturable, unless otherwise indicated. All surface probes are MRI compatible (no metal parts) and
come with a 2-meter cable for connection to the LDF100C module.
TSD144
This needle probe is used when making microvascular blood flow
measurements in relatively inaccessible areas with limited clearance.
Typically, they are positioned using a micromanipulator clamp over
soft tissues such as brain and muscle.
TSD145
TSD140
This robust and easy to handle probe is ideal for taking measurements of cutaneous blood flow anywhere on the skin surface.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
The TSD140 series needle probes are designed for invasive and
endoscopic blood flow monitoring of tissue. The signal delivery fiber
terminates straight into the top of the needle, making the probes easy
to insert into tissue. All needle probes are MRI compatible (made
from medical grade stainless steel – no ferrous parts) and come with
a 2-meter cable for connection to the LDF100C module.
TSD141
This thin and lightweight surface probe applies negligible pressure to
the underlying tissue. The probe’s low profile geometry has particular applications in chronic wound healing studies where it can be
applied under compression bandages.
TSD142
This probe was specially developed for measuring micro-vascular
skin blood flow in the digits; the curved geometry of these probes
makes them ideal for studying conditions such as Raynaud’s disease.
This micro-needle probe has been developed for direct insertion and
is frequently used for measuring either micro-vessel or micro-vascular blood flow within skin, muscle, tumor and organ tissues. The fine
diameters of these probes facilitate blood flow measurements from
only a small number of capillaries.
Specifications
Surface Probes
Probe Body Dimensions (H x D):
TSD140
8 x 17 mm
TSD141
6 x 17 mm
TSD142
10 x 17 mm
TSD143
5 x 10 mm
TSD146
5 x 5 mm
TSD143
Needle Probes
This suturable probe is particularly suitable for small animal work
including various post-operative monitoring applications such as reconstructive surgery. A non-suturable version, TSD146, is also available.
Probe Body Dimensions (H x D):
TSD144
25 x 1 mm
TSD145
25 mm x 1 µm
Catalog No.
TSD146
This miniature, lightweight surface probe is particularly useful for
small animal work and general tissue surface monitoring.
$
Model
Product
Surface Probes
BS4 72-3700
1,195.00 TSD140
Surface Probe
BS4 72-3726
1,195.00 TSD141
Surface Probe
BS4 72-3701
1,195.00 TSD142
Surface Probe
BS4 72-3699
1,195.00 TSD143
Surface Probe
BS4 72-3711
1,195.00 TSD146
Surface Probe
BS4 72-3703
1,195.00 TSD144
Needle Probe
BS4 72-3702
1,195.00 TSD145
Needle Probe
Needle Probes
I130
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
NEW
Disposable Fiber Probes
Specifications
TSD147A
Probe Body
Dimensions (L x D)
30 cm x 0.5 mm
Tissue Mounting
Inserted via 22G ID Cannula
TSD147AL
Probe Body
Dimensions (L x D)
100 cm x 0.5 mm
Tissue Mounting
Inserted via 22G ID Cannula
TSD147B
Probe Body
Dimensions (L x D)
33 cm x 0.5 mm
Skin and Tissue
Mounting
Yes (attach via PharmElast™ strip)
TSD148
The TSD140 series disposable single fiber probes are designed for
safe, continuous, invasive microvascular blood flow monitoring. The
probes are thin flexible plastic fibers composed of a polymethyl
methacrylate core and a tough fluorinated polymer cladding. All disposable probes are MRI compatible (no metal parts) and incorporate a coupling bead to interface with the TSD148 single fiber driver
for connection to the LDF100C module.
TSD147A- Insertable Single Fiber Probe
Requires the TSD148 Single Fiber Driver for operation with the
LDF100C.
TSD147B- Surface Single Fiber Probe
This 0.5mm diameter disposable, surface mounted, single fiber
probe has a standard length of 33cm and is supplied ready-to-use in
a pre-sterilized pack. The TSD147B was primarily developed for
making measurements of cortical blood flow on the surface of the
brain during surgery. The probe consists of a single fiber bonded for
right-angle delivery through a flexible PharmElast™ strip.
28 cm x 8 mm
Connection Type
In-line single fiber connector
Cable Length
2m
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-7350
75.00 TSD147A
Insertable Single Fiber Probe,
pkg. of 2
BS4 72-7351
95.00 TSD147AL
Insertable Single Fiber Probe,
pkg. of 2
95.00 TSD147B
Surface Single Fiber Probe, pkg. of 1
BS4 72-3713
BS4 72-3714
Model
1,495.00 TSD148
Product
Single Fiber Driver
PROBE CALIBRATION
If probes are shipped with the LDF100C, they are
factory-calibrated to the module (except Disposable probes).
Otherwise, probes are shipped uncalibrated and must
be calibrated with an LDF100C module using the LDFCAL
motility standard (see page I140).
Physiology
This 0.5mm diameter disposable, insertable, single fiber probe
comes in two standard lengths (TSD147A - 30cm, TSD147AL 100cm) and is supplied in a pack of two. (TSD147A is pre-sterilized.) Particularly useful for making blood flow measurements
under the skin, this single fiber probe can be directly inserted into
tissue using a standard 22G ID cannula. Longer probe lengths are
available upon request. Shorter lengths are possible by cutting the
fiber with a sharp blade at a right angle to the fiber length.
Fiber Driver
Dimensions (L x D)
Requires the TSD148 Single Fiber Driver for operation with the
LDF100C.
TSD148- Single Fiber Driver
The TSD148 is a precision-machined coupling system for interfacing
the TSD147 series single fiber probes to the LDF100C. The TSD148
consists of a compact laser driver housed in a non-metallic Delrin®
housing (MRI compatible), terminated with a 2-meter cable for connection to the LDF100C module.
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I131
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Active Electrodes
NEW
The TSD150 series active electrodes are designed for multiple-channel
surface EMG measurements. The units incorporate a built-in high-gain
amplifier with an integral 500 Hz lowpass filter. The unique design allows
you to easily convert the surface contact electrodes to wire needle electrodes for intricate sub-dermal procedures. The TSD150 series active
electrodes connect directly to the MP System via the HLT100C high-level
transducer module. The TSD150 series are very easy to use—locate the
position and hold in place with TAPE1 surgical tape. A single ground lead
(CBL201 and LEAD110A with EL503 electrode) to the UIM100C is
required when using one or more TSD150 series active electrodes.
Specifications
Gain
350 (nominal)
Weight
Fine Wire Attachments
Screw Springs
Input Impedance
100 MΩ
Dimensions (W x L x H) 17.4 x 51 x
6.4 mm
CMRR
95 dB (nominal)
Bandwidth
12 Hz – 500 Hz
Electrode Diameter
11.4 mm
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Catalog No.
$
Cable Length:
3m
Interface:
HLT100C—
see page I105
Model Product
BS4 72-7352
395.00 TSD150A Wide electrode placement (35mm apart)
BS4 72-7353
395.00 TSD150B Narrow electrode placement (20mm apart)
NEW
Multi-lead ECG Cable
The TSD155C multilead ECG cable is
used for performing
a standard 12-lead
ECG recording using
only 3 ECG100C
amplifiers.
The
TSD155C permits
simultaneous
recording of Leads
I, II, III, aVR, aVL,
aVF and one (movable) precordial lead [V1, V2, V3, V4, V5 or V6].
The TSD155C is 3-meters long and incorporates a built-in Wilson
Terminal. For full simultaneous 12-lead ECG, see the WT100C Wilson
Terminal on page I139.
The TSD160 series differential pressure transducers are designed for
low range pressure monitoring. The transducers plug directly into the
DA100C general-purpose differential amplifier. The differential pressure
ports are located on the front of the transducers and are easily connected to breathing circuits, pneumotachs or plethysmograph boxes. These
transducers are very useful for interfacing a variety of small animal pneumotachs or plethysmographs to the MP System. The transducers are
extremely sensitive and come in three ranges to suit a number of different applications. RX137 flow heads (see page I129) connect to the
TSD160A differential pressure transducer via standard 4mm ID tubing.
Specifications
TSD160A
TSD160B
TSD160C
Operational Pressure
±2.5 cm H2O
±12.5 cm H2O
±25 cm H2O
Overpressure (max)
±250 cm H2O
±375 cm H2O
±375 cm H2O
130 µV/cm H2O
65 µV/cm H2O
Voltage Output (normalized
to 1 volt excitation)
330 µV/cm H2O
Warm-up Drift
±50 µV
Stability
±100 µV
Combined Linearity
and Hysteresis Error
±0.05%
Dynamic Response
100 Hz
Connection Ports:
Accepts 3 mm to 4.5 mm ID tubing
Dimensions ( H x W x D) 8.3 x 3.8 x 3.2 cm
Weight
76 g
Operating Temperature
0 to +50 °C (compensated)
Storage Temperature
-40 to +125 °C
Interface
DA100C—see page I106
Catalog No.
$
Model
ECG100C (see page I108)
TEL100C Compatibility SS29 (see page I119)
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7354
$
Model
395.00 TSD155C
Product
BS4 72-3706
395.00 TSD160A
High Sesitivity Differential Pressure
Transducer (±2.5cm H2O)
BS4 72-3707
395.00 TSD160B
High Sesitivity Differential Pressure
Transducer (±12.5cm H2O)
BS4 72-3708
395.00 TSD160C
High Sesitivity Differential Pressure
Transducer (±25cm H2O)
Specifications
Interface
I132
9.5 g
High Sensitivity Differential
Pressure Transducers
Product
Multi-Lead ECG Cable
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Photo-Electric Pulse
Plethysmogram Transducer
This transducer operates with the PPG100C amplifier to record the
pulse pressure waveform. The TSD200 consists of a matched
infrared emitter and photo diode, which transmits changes in
infrared reflectance resulting from varying blood flow. The ergonomic housing design improves contact with the subject and helps
reduce motion artifact. The TSD200 is primarily designed for finger
attachment, but can be taped to other body locations. The TSD200
comes with a shielded 3-meter cable.
Specifications
Emitter/Detector
Wavelength
860 nm± 60 nm
800 nm
Weight
4.5 g
Dimensions (L x W x H) 16 x 17 x 8 mm
The TSD201 connects to the RSP100C Respiration Amplifier to
record respiratory effort. The transducer measures the changes in
thoracic or abdominal circumference that occur as the subject
breathes. The design presents minimal resistance to movement and
is extremely unobtrusive. Due to its novel construction, the TSD201
can measure arbitrarily slow to very fast respiration patterns with no
loss in signal amplitude, while maintaining excellent linearity and
minimal hysteresis. The transducer comes with a shielded 3-meter
cable and an adjustable Velcro® strap to fit a wide range of subjects.
Attachment
Velcro® strap
MRI Compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts)
Specifications
Sterilizable
Yes (see BIOPAC for details)
True DC Response
Yes
Nominal Output
20 mV (p-p)
Circumference Range
15 cm x 150 cm (increased with a longer strap)
Power
6 VDC Excitation @ 5 mA
Cable Length
3 m (shielded)
Sensor
Dimensions (L x W x T) 66 x 40 x 15 mm
Interface
PPG100C—see page 58
Sensor Weight
SS4—see page I119
Attachment
Velcro® strap (adjustable length)
MRI compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts)
Product
Sterilizable
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
Photo-Electric Pulse Plethysmogram
Transducer
Variable Resistance
Output
5-125 KΩ
Cable Length
3 m (shielded)
Interface
RSP100C—see page I111
TEL100C compatibility
SS5B—see page I119
TEL100C compatibility
Catalog No.
BS4 60-1045
$
Model
195.00 TSD200
Catalog No.
BS4 72-3967
Physiology
Optical Lowpass Filter
Respiratory Effort Transducer
18 g
$
Model
195.00 TSD201
Product
Respiratory Effort Transducer
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I133
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Temperature Transducers
Digit Surface Probe
The TSD202D records skin temperature of the fingers or toes. The
probe contains a surface temperature sensing element encased in a
polyurethane housing that conforms to curved skin surfaces and
includes a stretchy Velcro® strap for easy attachment.
• Response time:
1.1 sec
• Dimensions (L x H xW) 16 x 8 x 17 mm
NEW
General-purpose Probe
The TSD202E is a small, general-purpose probe, encased in a mylar
sheath for ruggedness and durability without sacrificing response time.
• Response time
0.9 sec
• Dimensions (L x D)
9.8 x 3.3 mm
NEW
Fast Response Probe
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
The TSD202A is a very small, fast response temperature probe
appropriate for use in locations where temperature changes rapidly,
as with the temperature changes of inspired/expired breath. TAPE1
is recommended to secure the TSD202A in place.
• Response time
0.6 sec
• Dimensions (D x L)
1.7 x 5 mm
I134
Waterproof Vinyl Probe
The TSD202F is a small, waterproof, vinyl encased probe for core
(oral, rectal) temperature recording.
• Response time
1.1 sec
• Dimensions (L x D)
9.8 x 3.3 mm
Specifications
Nominal Resistance
2252 Ω @ 25°C
Maximum Operating
Temperature
60°C (when used with STK100C)
Surface Banjo Probe
Accuracy and
Interchangeability
±0.2°C
The TSD202B is used to record skin temperature on a variety of body
locations. The stainless steel banjo design insures rapid and uniform
recording of skin surface temperatures. Use TAPE1 to secure the
transducer to the skin surface.
• Response time
1.1 sec
• Dimensions (D x H)
9.8 x 3.3 mm
MRI Compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts)
Cable Length
3m
Liquid Immersion Probe
The TSD202C is a stainless steel, extremely durable, tubular probe
designed for dry or wet bath temperature measurements.
• Response time
3.6 sec
• Dimensions (D x L)
4 x 115 mm
Electrodermal Response Transducer
The TSD203 connects to the
GSR100C amplifier for the purpose of skin conductance
recording. Two Ag-AgCl, unpolarizable electrodes are mounted in individual, ergonomicallydesigned, polyurethane housings for improved contact. The
electrodes are attached to the
fingers by Velcro® straps. The electrodes have a 6mm (dia) contact
area with a 1.6mm cavity to accommodate electrode gel (GEL101).
The TSD203 comes with a shielded 3-meter cable to minimize noise
interference and improve recordings.
Transducer Compatibility YSI® 400 series temperature probes
Sterilizable
YES (contact BIOPAC for details)
Interface
SKT100C—see page I111
TEL100C Compatibility SS6 (Fast Response) and SS7 (Banjo)—see page I119
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-5306
39.00 TSD202A
Model
Fast Response Probe
Product
BS4 72-5307
59.00 TSD202B
Surface Banjo Probe
BS4 72-7355
79.00 TSD202C
Liquid Immersion Probe
BS4 72-5309
99.00 TSD202D
Digit Surface Probe
BS4 72-7356
59.00 TSD202E
General-purpose Probe
BS4 72-5311
59.00 TSD202F
Waterproof Vinyl Probe
Specifications
Electrode Type
Ag-AgCl (unpolarizable)
Contact Area
6 mm (dia)
Dimensions (L x W x H) 16 x 17 x 8 mm (each electrode)
Weight
4.5 g (each electrode)
Attachment
Integral Velcro® straps
MRI Compatible
Yes (no ferrous parts)
Sterilizable
Yes (contact BIOPAC for details)
Cable Length
3 m (shielded)
Interface
GSR100C—see page I110
TEL100C Compatibility SS3A—see page I119
Catalog No.
BS4 72-5312
$
Model
125.00 TSD203
Product
Electrodermal Response Transducer
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Electrode Leads
Disposable Ag-AgCl Snap Electrodes
These electrode leads are used with the EL500 series disposable snap electrodes. The LEAD110 series electrode
leads have no ferrous parts. The leads include a pinch
connector for easy application and terminate in standard
Touchproof connectors for interfacing to 100C-series
Biopotential amplifiers or Module Extension Cables
(see page I139).
These snap electrodes provide the same signal transmission as reusable electrodes, with added convenience and hygiene. Each peel-and-stick electrode is
pre-gelled and designed for one use only. Use disposable snap electrodes with
the LEAD110 series electrode leads (shown above). For best performance, use
the LEAD110S shielded leads for your recording electrodes and the LEAD110
unshielded lead for your ground or reference electrodes.
Use shielded leads with recording electrodes for minimal noise interference. The unshielded leads work best
with ground or reference electrodes. Generally, for each
Biopotential amplifier module, one each of LEAD110SW, LEAD110S-R and LEAD110 are required.
These fixed spacing, paired electrodes are primarily used for peripheral stimulation and recording for nerve conduction measurements. These paired electrodes are also useful for cardiac output, electrical bioimpedance and generalpurpose EMG measurements. The pre-gelled electrode pairs are placed 41mm
apart (center to center) on 41mm x 82mm x 1.5mm thick foam.
Catalog No.
$
Small Stress Test Electrodes
BS4 72-3736
10.00 LEAD110
Unshielded, 1 m lead,
black
BS4 72-7357
29.00 LEAD110A
Unshielded, 3 m lead,
black
BS4 72-3737
29.00 LEAD110S-W Shielded, 1 m lead,
white
BS4 72-3738
29.00 LEAD110S-R Shielded, 1 m lead, red
Product
These flexible, foam-backed, strong-adhesive electrodes are most appropriate
for short-term recording applications where the subject may be in motion. The
38mm diameter allows closely placed electrodes which may be necessary for
multi-channel ECG, EGG, EMG or EOG recordings. Electrodes are pre-gelled and
mounted on 1.5mm thick foam.
Physiology
Model
Paired (Dual) Electrodes
Long-term Recording Electrodes
Most appropriate for long-term biopotential measurement recording sessions,
these pre-gelled electrodes incorporate a small (41mm) diameter backing that
resists moisture. The electrodes include an adhesive solid gel that adheres well
to the skin but leaves no residue when removed.
General-purpose Electrodes
These economical, pre-gelled electrodes are most suitable for short-term
recordings. The small (35mm) diameter backing allows close electrode placement where necessary, and a slightly less firm adhesive allows “ouchless”
removal. The electrodes incorporate liquid gel and are high chloride for quick,
accurate readings.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 60-3791
42.00 EL500
Paired Electrodes, pkg. of 25 pairs
BS4 60-3792
35.00 EL501
Small Stress Test Electrodes, pkg. of 50
BS4 60-3793
35.00 EL502
Long-term Recording Electrodes, pkg. of 50
35.00 EL503
General-purpose Electrodes, pkg. of 100
BS4 60-1192
BS4 72-7358
Model
250.00 EL503-10
Product
General-purpose Electrodes, pkg. of 1000
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I135
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Reusable Ag-AgCl Electrodes
Specifications
EL254 – Unshielded
Dimensions
(Outer D x Recording D x H)
7.2 x 4 x 6 mm
Lead Length
1m
EL254S – Shielded
Dimensions
(Outer D x Recording D x H)
7.2 x 4 x 6 mm
Lead Length
1m
NEW EL254RT – Unshielded, Radio-translucent
Dimensions
(Outer D x Recording D x H)
7.2 x 4 x 6 mm
Lead Length
1.5 m
EL258 – Unshielded
Dimensions
(Outer D x Recording D x H)
12.5 x 8 x 6 mm
Lead Length
1m
EL258S – Shielded
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Silver-silver chloride (Ag-AgCl) electrodes provide accurate and clear
transmission of surface biopotentials. Reusable electrodes are permanently connected to robust and pliable lead wires (1mm OD). The lead
wires terminate in standard Touchproof connectors for interfacing to
100C-series Biopotential modules or Module Extension Cables.
Unshielded electrodes terminate in a single Touchproof connector.
Shielded electrodes terminate in two Touchproof connectors, one connects to the Ag-AgCl disk and the other connects to the lead wire shield.
I136
For best signal performance use shielded electrodes (EL254S or
EL258S) as recording electrodes and unshielded electrodes (EL254 or
EL258) as ground or reference electrodes. For ease of gel injection, use
the EL258H for both recording and reference electrodes (useful for EEG
monitoring). When recording from subjects in MRI or X-ray based environments use the EL254RT or EL258RT for the recording and reference
electrodes. These electrodes are non-ferrous and employ carbon fiber
lead wire for superior radio-translucent performance.
All reusable electrodes require ADD200 series adhesive collars and
recording gel (see page I138). Generally, for each Biopotential amplifier module, two EL254S or EL258S and one EL254 or EL258 are
required. For radio-translucent requirements, use three of the EL254RT
or EL258RT with each Biopotential module.
Small Reusable Ag-AgCl Electrodes
Dimensions
(Outer D x Recording D x H)
12.5 x 8 x 6 mm
Lead Length
1m
NEW EL258H – Unshielded, Low-profile
Dimensions
(Outer D x Recording D x H)
12.5 x 8 x 6 mm
Lead Length
4m
NEW EL258RT – Unshielded, Radio-translucent
Dimensions
(Outer D x Recording D x H)
12.5 x 8 x 4 mm
Lead Length
1m
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-3749
35.00 EL254
Small Reusable Ag-AgCl Electrode
BS4 72-3750
45.00 EL254S
Small Reusable Ag-AgCl Electrode
BS4 72-7359
45.00 EL254RT
Small Reusable Ag-AgCl Electrode
BS4 72-5313
35.00 EL258
General-purpose Reusable Ag-AgCl
Electrode
BS4 72-5314
45.00 EL258S
General-purpose Reusable Ag-AgCl
Electrode
BS4 72-7360
45.00 EL258H
General-purpose Reusable Ag-AgCl
Electrode
BS4 72-7361
45.00 EL258RT
General-purpose Reusable Ag-AgCl
Electrode
Use these lead electrodes when closely spaced biopotentials are
required. The EL254 is unshielded and the EL254S is shielded. The
EL254RT is a radio-translucent version of the EL254. Fill the electrode
cavity with GEL100 and use ADD204 adhesive collars to secure these
electrodes to the skin surface.
General-purpose Reusable Ag-AgCl Electrodes
These lead electrodes are suitable for most applications (ECG, EEG, EGG,
EMG, EOG and ERS recordings). The EL258 is unshielded and the
EL258S is shielded. The EL258H is a low-profile version of the EL258
and includes a 2mm center hole for injecting gel after the electrode is
attached to the subject. The EL258RT is a radio-translucent version of
the EL258. Fill the electrode cavity with GEL100 and use ADD208 adhesive collars to secure these electrodes to the skin surface.
Extend your electrode leads by 3-meters with the
MEC100 Series, see page I139.
Use RT (radio-translucent) electrodes for
MRI applications.
Use H (hole) electrodes to syringe electrode gel
into the electrode cavity after placement.
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
EEG Electrode Cap
Bar Electrodes
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7362
35.00 EL350
Bar lead electrode (concave), use for
stimulating or recording
BS4 72-7363
45.00 EL350S
Shielded bar lead electrode (concave), use for recording
BS4 72-7364
35.00 EL351
Bar lead electrode (convex), use for
stimulating
Needle Electrodes
Physiology
For reduced set up time and increased subject comfort, use the
CAP100C when recording multiple EEG channels. The Lycra® stretch
cap holds nineteen imbedded tin electrodes closely to the subject’s
head. Electrodes are pre-positioned in the international 10/20 montage, so even novice EEG researchers can minimize electrode placement errors. A ribbon cable (100 cm) fans out in the cap to connect
to each electrode. The other end of the ribbon cable has a connector that plugs into a mating cable (25 cm) which terminates in 19
Touchproof sockets. The connector arrangement permits the electrode cap to be easily disconnected from the recording amplifiers,
allowing the cap to be fitted in one location and used in another.
When the electrode cap is in place, EEG recording gel is injected into
each electrode (via a central gel access hole) with a blunt-tipped
syringe.
All bar electrodes are non-ferrous and consist of two tin electrodes
placed 30mm apart in a watertight acrylic bar. The bar configuration
permits easy electrode placement without disturbing electrode to
electrode spacing. Bar electrodes are recommended for use when
applying a stimulus, or recording a signal, during nerve conduction,
somatosensory or muscle twitch recordings. When using bar electrodes for signal recording, a single ground lead (LEAD110 with
EL503) is required. The leads (61cm long) terminate in standard
Touchproof connectors, which connect to any 100C-series
Biopotential amplifier or stimulus isolation adapter (STMISOC/D/E).
When using the CAP100C, up to 16 channels of EEG data can be
acquired by the MP System, when outfitted with 16 EEG100C amplifiers. Various configurations of unipolar and bipolar setups can be
achieved by using JUMP100C jumper connectors with the EEG100C
amplifiers.
The CAP100C includes a medium cap, two earclip reference electrodes, mating ribbon cable with Touchproof connectors, blunttipped syringe, EEG recording gel, chest harness (to hold cap in
place), and liquid soap (to wash cap after use).
Additional Electrode Caps are available in four sizes:
Infant 45-50 cm
Small 50-54 cm
Medium 54-58 cm (general size, fits most people from age
5 to adult)
Large 58-62 cm
Catalog No.
$
Model
Use needle electrodes for stimulation or recording in animal subjects
and tissue preparations. These non-ferrous, 28-gauge stainless steel,
needle electrodes are equipped with a flexible lead terminating in standard Touchproof connectors. Use one EL451 electrode, plus one EL452
ground electrode, when recording from a single site (e.g. studies of individual muscle fibers). Use a pair of EL450 or EL452 electrodes, plus one
EL452 ground electrode, for general-purpose recording (e.g. ECG). For
stimulation, use a pair of EL450 or EL452 electrodes. Teflon® coated
needle electrodes are fully insulated, with a clear Teflon® overcoat,
except for the conductive needle tip. Needle electrodes are shipped nonsterile, so pre-sterilization is required.
Product
BS4 60-3790
595.00 CAP100C
EEG Electrode Cap Kit (Kit includes
MEDIUM cap)
BS4 72-3692
395.00 CAP-INFANT EEG Electrode Cap, infant, cap only
BS4 72-3693
395.00 CAP-SMALL EEG Electrode Cap, small, cap only
BS4 72-7333
395.00 CAP-MEDIUM EEG Electrode Cap, medium, cap only
BS4 72-3694
395.00 CAP-LARGE EEG Electrode Cap, large, cap only
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-3740
25.00 EL450
Unipolar Needle, 300µm (dia), 2.5cm
(long), Teflon® coated, 61cm lead
BS4 72-3741
35.00 EL451
Concentric Bipolar Needle, 460µm
(dia), 3.7cm (long), Teflon® coated,
61cm lead
BS4 72-3742
25.00 EL452
Unipolar Needle, 300µm (dia), 1.5cm
(long), uncoated, 61cm lead
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I137
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Electrode Accessories
Lead Connector Conversion Cables
CBL200
This extension (10cm) is required when converting an old-style 2mm
pin electrode or transducer lead to a Touchproof socket (1.5mm ID)
for connection to any of the 100C-series Biopotential or Transducer
amplifier modules. Use one CBL200 per Touchproof socket. To connect
a Touchproof electrode or transducer to an older 100B-series module
with 2mm input sockets, use the CBL201.
Electrode Site Preparation Pad
To remove non-conductive skin cells and sensitize skin for optimal
contact during recording, this 2.5cm x 5cm abrasive pad can be
rubbed lightly across the skin before applying an electrode. Each
ELPAD package contains 10 abrasive pads.
Electrode Gel
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
GEL100 non-irritating gel is used as a conductant with the EL250
series reusable electrodes. Each tube contains 8 ounces of gel.
I138
CBL201
Required when converting a Touchproof (1.5mm ID) socket electrode
or transducer lead to an old-style 2mm pin, for connection to any of the
100B-series Biopotential or Transducer amplifier modules. Also used
to connect a ground electrode lead (e.g. LEAD110A) to the UIM100C
module (required when using the TSD150 active electrodes). One
CBL201 (10cm long) is required for each Touchproof socket.
CBL202
NEW GEL101 non-irritating, isotonic, gel is primarily used as a
conductant for the TSD203 electrodermal response transducers
(page I134).
This is a multi-purpose adapter to connect a phone cable to the digital
I/O lines on the UIM100C or to the input of the DA100C. Also connects
the STM100C to nerve conduction chambers (CBL105 required). The
CBL202 is 10cm long and consists of a 6.3mm (1/4") phone socket
leading to a pair of 2mm plugs.
Adhesive Collars
CBL203
These double-sided adhesive collars are used to hold the EL250
series reusable electrodes firmly on the skin surface. Use the
ADD204 (19mm OD, 4mm ID) with the EL254, EL254S and
EL254RT electrodes; use the ADD208 (22mm OD, 8mm ID) with the
EL258, EL258S, EL258H and EL258RT electrodes.
The CBL203 is primarily designed to connect YSI® 400 series biomedical temperature probes to the SKT100C temperature amplifier, but it
can also be used to connect certain 6.3mm (1/4") mono phone plug
terminated cables or transducers to the 100C-series Transducer or
Biopotential amplifiers. The CBL203 is 10cm long and consists of a
6.3mm (1/4") phone socket leading to a pair of Touchproof sockets.
Tape Series
Adhesive tape for attaching transducers or electrodes to the skin surface. Use TAPE1 (single sided tape) for securing Active Electrodes or
other devices and use TAPE2 (double-sided tape) for attaching
Goniometers to the skin surface.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 60-1191
10.00 ELPAD
Model
Product
BS4 72-7365
25.00 GEL101
Electrode Gel, 4 ounces
BS4 60-1060
10.00 ADD204
Adhesive Collars, pkg. of 100
BS4 60-1061
15.00 ADD208
Adhesive Collars, pkg. of 100
BS4 60-1261
5.00 TAPE1
Tape Series, single-sided
BS4 72-7366
25.00 TAPE2
Tape Series, double-sided
Electrode Site Preparation Pad,
pkg. of 10
CBL204
This Touchproof “Y” electrode lead adapter (25cm long) is required
when multiple electrode sites are to be connected to a single amplifier
input or stimulator output. The CBL204 plugs into any 100C-series
Biopotential amplifier input or STMISO series output and provides two
plugs to connect to electrode leads terminating in Touchproof sockets.
Multiple CBL204s can be plugged together to reference 3 or more electrode leads to the same input or output.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-5300
15.00 CBL200
Model
Lead Connector Conversion Cable
Product
BS4 72-5301
15.00 CBL201
Lead Connector Conversion Cable
BS4 72-5302
25.00 CBL202
Lead Connector Conversion Cable
BS4 72-3744
25.00 CBL203
Lead Connector Conversion Cable
BS4 72-5304
20.00 CBL204
Lead Connector Conversion Cable
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Module Extension Cables
These module extension cables are used to increase the distance
between subject and recording system, allowing increased subject
movement and comfort. Each extension cable attaches to one amplifier; electrodes and transducers plug into the extension cable’s
molded plastic input plug. The 3-meter long extension includes a
clip for attaching to a subject’s belt loop or clothing. The MEC series
extension cables contain no ferrous parts (less the removable clothing clip). The MEC100C is designed for Transducer amplifiers. The
MEC110C and MEC111C are designed for Biopotential amplifiers.
Use the MEC100C or MEC110C when you simply need to increase the
lead length to the amplifier. The MEC111C is required for the protection of your MP System and Biopotential amplifiers when electrocautery or defibrillation equipment is used while recording data.
Catalog No.
$
Model
The WT100C is used to create a virtual reference electrode when measuring the transverse plane (i.e. precordial) ECG components [V1, V2,
V3, V4, V5, and V6]. The virtual reference is created by the summation
of the Right Arm (RA), Left Arm (LA) and Left Leg (LL) electrode leads.
To measure all six transverse plane components, six ECG100C amplifiers are required. Use five of the JUMP100C jumper connectors to tie
together the reference (Vin-) inputs of these amplifiers. This common
reference connects to the virtual reference created by the WT100C.
For full, simultaneous, 12-lead ECG recording, a total of 8 ECG100C
amplifiers are required. Two of the ECG100C are used to generate Leads
I, II, III, aVR, aVL and aVF, while the remaining six ECG100C are used
to generate the six precordial leads.
For an economical alternative, use the TSD155C moveable chest lead
(page 80). The TSD155C requires three ECG100C amplifiers and incorporates a built-in Wilson Terminal.
100C-series Transducer amplifiers to
Touchproof inputs
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-7372
95.00 WT100C
BS4 72-7368
145.00 MEC110C
100C-series Biopotential amplifiers
to Touchproof inputs
BS4 72-7369
245.00 MEC111C
100C-series Biopotential amplifiers
to Touchproof inputs— Protected
Other Extensions
BS4 60-1167
145.00 MEC100
DA100C or 100B-series Biopotential
or Transducer amplifiers to 2mm
socket inputs
BS4 72-7370
145.00 MEC110
100B-series Biopotential or
Transducer amplifiers to Touchproof
inputs
BS4 72-7371
245.00 MEC111
100B-series Biopotential amplifiers to
Touchproof inputs—Protected
Model
Product
Wilson Terminal
Jumper Connectors
Physiology
145.00 MEC100C
Wilson Terminal
Product
100C-Series Extensions
BS4 72-7367
NEW
These jumper connectors (10 cm long) are used to create a common reference between Biopotential amplifier modules. Link one
reference electrode to multiple amplifier inputs using one jumper
connector per amplifier. Jumper connectors are required when connecting the same reference electrode lead to two or more amplifiers,
as in multi-lead ECG or unipolar EEG measurements.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-3697
15.00 JUMP100
Model
For all connections between 100Bseries Biopotential amplifiers)
Product
BS4 72-5305
15.00 JUMP100C
For all connections between 100Cseries Biopotential amplifiers)
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I139
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Analog Connection Cables
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
These cables connect stand-alone laboratory equipment to an MP
System. Analog outputs from chart recorders, preamplifiers, oscilloscopes, force plates, chromatographs, etc. can be connected to the
UIM100C module. It’s also possible to use these cables to connect
amplifier outputs or D/A outputs to external equipment inputs. When
signal isolation is required, use the INISO or OUTISO adapter with
the cable. The other end of the isolation adapter connects to the
appropriate MP System channel via the HLT100C module. Select the
cable number with the plug corresponding to your equipment’s output or input jack. Use one cable per recording channel.
I140
The CBL106 is a multi-purpose adapter used in conjunction with the
CBL102 to connect a BNC cable to the digital I/O lines on the
UIM100C or to the input of the DA100C. It also connects the
STM100C to nerve conduction chambers (CBL102 required).
Catalog No.
$
Model
BS4 60-1053
9.00 CBL100
2m, 3.5mm phone plug to same
BS4 60-3801
9.00 CBL101
2m, 3.5mm phone plug to male RCA
BS4 60-3822
9.00 CBL102
2m, 3.5mm phone plug to male BNC
BS4 60-3803
9.00 CBL105
2m, 3.5mm phone plug to 6.3mm
(1/4 in) phone plug
BS4 72-3696
25.00 CBL106
10cm, female BNC connector to a
pair of 2mm plugs (requires CBL102)
BS4 60-3800
75.00 CBL107
10m, 3.5mm phone plug to same
BS4 72-7373
145.00 CBL108
60m, 3.5mm phone plug to same
NEW
Connector Kit for MCE100C
Micro-electrode Amplifier
Build your own customized adapter to a micro-electrode shielded
cable. Cable shields can be tied to a voltage follower drive or simply
grounded. Input capacity compensation and clamp current options
can be independently added to or removed from your cable configuration. The MCEKITC comes with seven attached Touchproof sockets and instructions; mount your interface connector to the housing
and solder wires to the sockets. See the MCE100C on page I139.
Catalog No.
$
Model
BS4 72-7374
99.00 MCEKITC
Product
Product
Connector Kit for MCE100C
Micro-electrode Amplifier
Calibration Standard for LDF100C
The LDFCAL is a specially prepared colloidal solution of suspended
latex spheres undergoing Brownian motion. The LDFCAL provides a
standard calibration value of 1000 BPU ±5% @ 21°C. Probes are
calibrated to a specific LDF100C module by placing the probe in the
LDFCAL solution and pressing the CAL button on the LDF100C front
panel. A small clamp is provided with the LDFCAL to hold probes
securely in the solution. The LDFCAL has a limited lifetime, so it’s
best to order it only when required. See the LDF100C on page I112.
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7375
$
Model
295.00 LDFCAL
Product
Calibration Standard for LDF100C
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Air Flow & Gas Analysis Accessories
NEW
AFT10 Disposable Adult Facemasks
This facemask connects to 22mm breathing circuits. Connects
directly to the AFT1, AFT22 non-rebreathing T valve or TSD117 air
flow transducer (via AFT11B coupler). Includes hook-ring to secure
AFT10S adjustable head strap. (22mm ID/25mm OD).
NEW
AFT10S Adjustable Head Strap
This fully adjustable latex head strap holds the AFT10 disposable
facemask securely to the subject’s head. Use one or more straps to
securely fasten the mask.
AFT12 Tubing (22mm)
For use in 22mm breathing circuits. (1.8 meter length, 22mm ID,
25mm OD)
Catalog No.
$
BS4 60-1193
30.00 AFT1
Model
AFTI Disposable Bacterial Filter (22m)
These filters remove airborne bacteria. For use with the TSD117 and
other 22mm breathing circuits. One side has a 22mm ID port, the
other side has a 22mm OD, 15mm ID port.
AFT2 Disposable Mouthpiece
These mouthpieces connect to the TSD117 and other 22mm breathing circuits. Connects directly to the AFT1 bacterial filter, AFT22 nonrebreathing T valve (via AFT11C) and the TSD117 air flow transducer. (22mm OD)
BS4 72-7376
BS4 60-1268
BS4 72-7377
BS4 60-1269
BS4 72-7378
500.00 AFT1-250
10.00 AFT2
125.00 AFT2-250
12.00 AFT3
175.00 AFT3-250
Product
Disposable Bacterial Filter (22m),
pkg. of 10
Disposable Bacterial Filter (22m),
pkg. of 250
Disposable Mouthpiece, pkg. of 10
Disposable Mouthpiece, pkg. of 250
Disposable Noseclip, pkg. of 10
Disposable Noseclip, pkg. of 250
45.00 AFT4
Disposable Bacterial Filter (35mm),
pkg. of 10
BS4 72-7380
95.00 AFT6
Calibration Syringe
AFT3 Disposable Noseclip
BS4 72-7381
25.00 AFT7
Smooth Bore Tubing (35mm)
These noseclips gently squeeze the nostrils shut to remove errors
when using mouth-breathing circuits.
BS4 72-7382
10.00 AFT8
Autoclavable Mouthpiece
BS4 72-7383
55.00 AFT8-10
Autoclavable Mouthpiece, pkg. of 10
AFT4 Disposable Bacterial Filter (35mm)
BS4 72-7384
10.00 AFT9
Reusable Mouthpiece
BS4 72-7385
55.00 AFT9-10
Reusable Mouthpiece, pkg. of 10
BS4 72-7386
10.00 AFT10
Disposable Adult Facemasks
BS4 72-7387
15.00 AFT10S
Adjustable Head Strap, pkg. of 30
BS4 72-7388
15.00 AFT12
Tubing (22mm)
These filters remove airborne bacteria. For use with the TSD107B
and other 35mm breathing circuits. One side has a 35mm ID port,
the other side has a 35mm OD port.
AFT6 Calibration Syringe
Physiology
BS4 72-7379
Medium pump syringe used for injecting a precise volume of air (600ml)
through the TSD107B, TSD117 and TSD127 air flow transducers for precise calibration. The AFT6 comes equipped with a 22mm OD, 15mm ID
coupler for direct connection to the TSD117 and TSD127. To calibrate
the TSD107B, the AFT11E coupler and AFT7 tubing are required.
AFT7 Smooth Bore Tubing (35mm)
For use in TSD107B and other 35mm breathing circuits. (1 meter
length, 35mm ID, 38mm OD)
AFT8 Autoclavable Mouthpiece
This autoclavable mouthpiece connects directly to the TSD117 air flow
transducer and reduces the cost of disposable parts. (30mm ID)
AFT9 Reusable Mouthpiece
These mouthpieces connect to the TSD107B and other 35mm
breathing circuits. Connects directly to the AFT4 bacterial filter or the
AFT21 non-rebreathing T valve. (35mm ID)
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I141
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
NEW
Mixing Chambers
AFT15A (5 Liter)
The AFT15A is designed for demanding expired gas analysis measurements (e.g. VO2 or RER measurements). The AFT15A incorporates dual baffles and flexible connection ports capable of interfacing with 35mm or 22mm breathing circuits. Two female Luer connection ports are provided between the baffles for simultaneous
monitoring of O2 and CO2 concentrations.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
I142
The AFT15B is designed for very high volume and rate expired gas
analysis measurements (e.g. VO2 or RER measurements). The
AFT15B incorporates dual baffles and flexible connection ports
capable of interfacing with 35mm or 22mm breathing circuits. Two
female Luer connection ports are provided between the baffles for
simultaneous monitoring of O2 and CO2 concentrations.
Specifications
Dimensions (D X L)
13 x 47 cm
Coupling Ports
35 mm OD, 25 mm ID
AFT15B
Dimensions (D X L)
13 x 73 cm
Coupling Ports
35 mm OD, 25 mm ID
BS4 72-7390
These couplers are very useful for connecting a variety of air flow
port IDs and ODs to transducers, tubing and calibration syringes.
AFT11 Series Coupler Guide
Pick the AFT11 Series coupler that matches the port sizes
you want to interface.
$
Model
395.00 AFT15A
OD
22 mm
ID
AFT11B
20 mm
OD
22 mm
ID
AFT11B
22 mm
ID
22 mm
495.00 AFT15B
OD
OD
15 mm
OD
AFT11B
20 mm
OD
AFT11B
22 mm
ID
AFT11B
22 mm
OD
AFT11C
25 mm
ID
AFT11C
22-25 mm
OD
AFT11E
35-38 mm
ID
AFT11E
25 mm
ID
25 mm
ID
AFT11C
25-30 mm
OD
25-30 mm
OD
AFT11A
28-35 mm
ID
AFT11A
25-30 mm
OD
AFT11A
35 mm
ID
AFT11A
28-35 mm
ID
Product
Mixing Chamber, 5 liter
BIOPAC
Coupler
Item 2
15 mm
22-25 mm
AFT15A
BS4 72-7389
AFT11 Series Couplers
Item 1
AFT15B (8 Liter)
Catalog No.
NEW
35 mm
ID
Mixing Chamber, 8 liter
28-35 mm
ID
AFT11A
38 mm
ID
AFT11E
35-38 mm
ID
22-25 mm
OD
AFT11E
35-38 mm
OD
35-38 mm
OD
AFT11D
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7391
10.00 AFT11A
Flexible Coupler
BS4 72-7392
10.00 AFT11B
Rigid Coupler
BS4 72-7393
10.00 AFT11C
Rigid Coupler
BS4 72-7394
10.00 AFT11D
Flexible Coupler
BS4 72-7395
10.00 AFT11E
Flexible Coupler
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Gas Sampling Interface Kit
For connecting the CO2100C or O2100C module with a variety of air
flow breathing circuits. Use with the AFT25 facemask, AFT15A or
AFT15B mixing chambers and AFT21 or AFT22 non-rebreathing T
valves. Use one AFT20 kit for each gas analysis module connected.
Includes:
NEW
AFT24 Head Support
The AFT24 head support is useful when breathing directly into the
AFT21 non-rebreathing T valve for exercise physiology measurements. The AFT21 is secured directly in front of the subject and minimizes the strain associated with the weight of valves and tubing.
Catalog No.
• 1.8 meters of 1.5mm diameter polyethylene tubing with
M/F Luer connector
• 30cm Nafion® water vapor permeable tubing with
M/F Luer connector
• 5 micron filter with M/F Luer connector
• M/F Luer to female Luer “Y” connector
$
BS4 72-3690
95.00 AFT20
Model
Model
195.00 AFT24
Product
Head Support
Product
Gas Sampling Interface Kit
Non-Rebreathing T Valves
NEW
AFT25 Facemask with Valve
AFT21 (35mm)
This non-rebreathing T valve is a high performance, very low dead
space, low air flow resistance valve; suitable for high air flow applications (e.g. exercise physiology). The AFT21 incorporates a gas
sampling port (female Luer) for interfacing with the AFT20 gas sampling kit. For breathing directly into the valve, use the AFT9 mouthpiece, AFT3 noseclip and (optionally) the AFT24 head support. All
ports are 35mm OD, 30mm ID.
AFT22 (22mm)
This non-rebreathing T valve is a very low dead space valve; suitable
for low to medium air flow applications. The AFT22 incorporates a
gas sampling port (male Luer) for interfacing with the AFT20 gas
sampling kit. For breathing directly into the valve, use the AFT2
mouthpiece (via AFT11C coupler) with the AFT3 noseclip or use the
AFT10 facemask. All ports are 22mm OD. The common port also
incorporates a 15mm ID port connection.
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7396
395.00 AFT21
Non-Rebreathing T Valves, 35 mm
BS4 72-7397
45.00 AFT22
Non-Rebreathing T Valves, 22 mm
Physiology
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7398
$
This adult facemask with integral non-rebreathing T valve is a high
performance, very low dead space, low air flow resistance mask and
valve; suitable for high air flow applications (e.g. exercise physiology). The AFT25 incorporates two gas sampling ports (female Luer)
for interfacing with the AFT20 gas sampling kit. All ports are 35mm
OD, 28mm ID.
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7399
$
Model
595.00 AFT25
Product
Facemask with Valve
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I143
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
Change to Macintosh
Change to PC USB—Windows
PLAT100M1
PLAT100W1
MP100 Platform change from Macintosh (Serial) or PC (Windows)
to Macintosh (USB). Includes:
MP100 Platform change from Macintosh or PC (ISA/PCMCIA—
Windows) to PC (USB—Windows). Includes:
• USB1M
• CBLSERA
• ACKv3.7 for Macintosh
• USB1W
• CBLSERA
• ACKv3.7 for PC (Windows)
PLAT150M
PLAT150W
MP150 Platform change from PC (Windows) to Macintosh. Includes:
MP150 Platform change from Macintosh to PC (Windows). Includes:
• ACKv3.7 for Macintosh
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Catalog No.
$
• ACKv3.7 for PC (Windows)
Model
Product
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7400
695.00 PLAT100M1 MP100 Platform change from
Macintosh (Serial) or PC (Windows)
to Macintosh (USB)
BS4 72-7402
695.00 PLAT100W1 MP100 Platform change from
Macintosh or PC (ISA/PCMCIA—
Windows) to PC (USB—Windows)
BS4 72-7401
595.00 PLAT150M
BS4 72-7403
595.00 PLAT150W
MP150 Platform change from PC
(Windows) to Macintosh.
MP150 Platform change from
Macintosh to PC (Windows)
Computer Interface Cables
CBLEXT
Use this 3.6 meter extension cable to increase the distance between
the MP100 System and your computer. The CBLEXT is used to extend
the length of CBLSERA (use only one CBLEXT per MP100 System).
NEW
CBLETH1
Two CBLETH1 cables come with each MP150 system. The cables
connect between the ETHSW1 switch and the MP150 and the computer. Each CBLETH1 is 2 meters long.
CBLSERA
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7404
25.00 CBLSERA
Computer Interface Cable
BS4 72-7405
45.00 CBLEXT
Computer Interface Cable
BS4 72-7406
25.00 CBLETH1
Computer Interface Cable
One CBLSERA cable comes with each MP100 System. Connects the
MP100 to your MAC or PC via the USB1M or USB1W. The CBLSERA
is 2.5 meters long.
I144
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
NEW
Interface Options
BS4 72-7407 Ethernet Switch
BS4 72-7409 USB adapter
for Windows
BS4 72-7408 USB adapter
for Macintosh
Move your MP System between PC and
Macintosh with a platform change.All BIOPAC
amplifiers will work with both PC and
Macintosh systems.Amplifier modules are
optimized for specific signals, and will work
with an MP100 or an MP150.
Ethernet Switch
Physiology
The ETHSW1 is an Ethernet switch included with the MP150 system.
The ETHSW1 is required when a computer has a network connection
operating simultaneously with operation of an MP150 system. The
ETHSW1 is an intelligent switch that eliminates external packet transfers not directed at the MP150 or the computer to provide optimal
data acquisition performance. Setup is very simple, just connect your
computer, MP150 system and network to the ETHSW1 and the
ETHSW1 automatically directs the packets. Specify USA or EURO
power cord.
USB1M
One USB1M USB adapter comes with each MP100 System for the
Macintosh. Use the USB1M to connect the MP100 unit (via CBLSERA)
to the USB port on your computer. The USB1M comes with an integral USB cable.
USB1W
One USB1W USB adapter comes with each MP100 System for the PC
running Windows. Use the USB1W to connect the MP100 unit (via
CBLSERA) to the USB port on your computer. The USB1W comes with
an integral USB cable. The USB1W is compatible with Windows 98,
98SE and 2000.
Catalog No.
$
Model
Product
BS4 72-7407
295.00 ETHSW1
BS4 72-7408
250.00 USB1M
Ethernet Switch
USB adapter for Macintosh
BS4 72-7409
250.00 USB1W
USB adapter for Windows
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I145
Data Acquisition Systems - Biopac
In-Line Power Transformers
Battery Pack/Recharger Unit
All AC series in-line power transformers are CE marked for the EC
Low Voltage Directive and EMC Directive. All transformers have UL
and TUV approval. The units have standard IEC power input plugs
and operate over mains power ratings of 100-240 VAC, 50-60Hz.
AC100A
This in-line switching transformer (+12 volt, 1 amp) connects the
MP100 System, IPS100C, CO2100C or O2100C to the AC mains wall
outlet. One transformer is included with each MP100 Starter System,
IPS100C, CO2100C or O2100C module.
Specify USA or EURO power cord.
AC101A
This in-line switching transformer (±12 volt, +5 volt, 1 amp)
connects the LDF100C to the AC mains wall outlet. One transformer
is included with each LDF100C module.
This in-line switching transformer (+6 volt, 1.5 amp) powers the
heating element for any of the TSD137 series pneumotachs.
For portability, use this rechargeable battery pack and charger with
your MP System. The maintenance-free battery pack is built into a
carrying case with a shoulder strap. The fully charged battery will
operate an MP System for a minimum of 16 hours. The BAT100
includes battery pack, universal recharger and all necessary cables.
Specify USA or EURO power cord.
Specify USA or EURO power cord.
Specify USA or EURO power cord.
AC137A
AC150A
This in-line switching transformer (+12 volt, 2.5 amp) connects the
MP150 system to the AC mains wall outlet. One transformer is
included with each MP150 Starter system.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
Specify USA or EURO power cord.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 72-7410
75.00 AC100A
BS4 72-7411
125.00 AC101A
BS4 72-7412
BS4 72-7413
Model
75.00 AC137A
95.00 AC150A
Product
Specifications
Battery Pack
Output Capacity
12 V @ 13 amp-hours
Operating Time
MP100 with 4 modules: 26 hours nominal
MP150 with 4 modules: 16 hours nominal
Charge Time
15 hrs
Recharge Cycles
500 (typical)
In-line switching transformer,
+12 volt, 1 amp
Weight
5.6 kg
In-line switching transformer,
+12 volt, +5 volt, 1 amp
Temperature Range
In-line switching transformer,
+6 volt, 1.5 amp
Output
Input
120/240 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
In-line switching transformer,
+12 volt, 2.5 amp
Weight
1.8 kg
Dimensions (H x W x D) 22 x 8 x 24 cm
Operation: -60º to 60ºC Recharge: -20º to 50ºC
Recharger
12 V @ 1.0 amps
Dimensions (H x W x L) 8 x 13 x 15 cm
Catalog No.
BS4 72-7414
$
Model
595.00 BAT100
Product
Battery Pack/Recharger Unit
See the Isolated Power Supply IPS100
on page I104.
I146
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Kymographs
Universal Kymographs
Universal Kymograph with Stimulator
The Kymograph is the same as described above. The built-in square
wave stimulator has a maximum output of 25 volts with less than
25 Ω impedance. The frequency range is continuously variable from
0 to 100 Hz. There are six preset pulse widths. The output has three
selections: continuous, single pulse by push button, and external trigger via the contact arms on the Kymograph spindle. All the controls are
located on the front panel.
Specifications
Kymograph
Same as Universal Kymograph
Stimulator Specifications:
BS4 50-7368 Harvard Apparatus
Universal Kymograph
with Integral Stimulator
Universal Kymograph Assembly
This Assembly includes the Universal Kymograph with Stimulator plus
a comprehensive set of accessories with a 165 page Applications
Manual with detailed instructions for over 30 experiments. Some of
the possible experiments include:
Frog Heart In Situ Preparation:
Muscle-Nerve Preparation:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Effect of stimulating voltage (simple muscle twitch)
Effect of stimulation frequency (tetanus)
Staircase phenomenon (Treppe)
Effect of repeated stimulation (fatigue)
Effects of drugs on muscles
Effect of pre- and after-loading on muscle efficiency
For locust work, a special cork mounting block is supplied, which
wedges vertically in the muscle chamber. The accessories for the
Kymograph are listed on the following pages.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-7384
BS4 50-7392
$
Product
2,785.00 Universal Kymograph Assembly, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
2,950.00 Universal Kymograph Assembly, 230 VAC, 50 Hz
0 to 25 V, continuously variable in 3 ranges, 0 to 250 mV,
0 to 2.5 V and 0 to 25 V
Sockets
2 x 4 mm sockets
Impedance
< 25 Ω at max. output current of 250 mA
Pulse Width
6 preset widths of 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1 2 and 5 ms
Frequency
0.1 to 100 Hz continuously variable in 3 ranges, 0.1 to 1.0 Hz,
1 to 10 Hz and 10 to 100 Hz
Mode Selection
Continuous, single and trigger via contact arms on spindle
Cylinders
Not included, see next page
Base Dimensions
460 x 230 x 220 mm (18.1 x 9 x 8.7 in), H x W x D
Weight
7.5 kg (16.5 lb)
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-7368
2,473.00 Universal Kymograph with Stimulator, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
BS4 50-7376
2,473.00 Universal Kymograph with Stimulator, 230 VAC, 50 Hz
Universal Kymograph
The Universal Kymograph has a
spindle 320 x 19 mm OD (12-1/2
x 3/4 in OD) for mounting a cylinder (not included). The speed
range, dependent on circumfer• Adjustable, double
ence of cylinder chosen, is infinitecontact arms are fitted
to the spindle base for
ly variable by use of two controls. A
external trigger applicamanually operated stop is provided
tions (e.g. stimulators)
to allow the spindle to revolve
either continuously or for a single
revolution. The Kymograph is supplied without cylinder or stimulator.
•
Two fully adjustable
support arms each with a
9.5 mm OD upright rod
for mounting accessories
Physiology
• Recording of cardiac activity
• Effect of stimulation of the heart
(refractory period compensatory pause)
• Demonstration of conduction path (stimulus ligatures)
• Effects of stimulating the vagus nerve (cardiac inhibition)
• Effect of drugs
Output Voltage
Specifications
Speed Range
Infinitely variable from 0.006 to 625 mm/sec with 500 mm
circumference cylinder; 0.012 to 1250 mm/sec with 1000 mm
circumference cylinder, cylinder not supplied
Spindle Rotation
Either continuous or single revolution using manual
start/stop control
Contact Arms
Two fully variable ‘opto-triggering’ producing a short circuit
across ‘contract’ sockets
Writing Medium
Smoke or ink, dependent on recording cylinder chosen
Cylinders
Not included, see next page
Base Dimensions,
460 x 230 x 220 mm
H xW x D
(18.1 x 9 x 8.7 in)
Weight
7 kg (15.4 lb)
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-7343
2,075.00 Universal Kymograph, 115 VAC, 60 Hz
BS4 50-7350
2,075.00
Kymograph, 230 VAC, 50 Hz
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I147
Kymographs & Accessories
Kymograph Accessories
Kymograph Cylinders
These Kymograph Cylinders are for use with the 19 mm (3/4 in) diameter spindles of the Harvard Apparatus Universal Kymographs. Each
Cylinder has 2 mounting plates for fitting it concentrically onto the
Kymograph spindle. A lockable split ring fixes the Cylinder to the spindle at the desired height. Four different Cylinders are available. Plastic
Cylinders are for ink writing only. Metal Cylinders are for ink or smoke
writing.
Catalog No.
$
Material Circumference
Height
BS4 50-5560
198.00 Plastic
500 mm (19.7 in)
200 mm
(7.9 in)
BS4 50-5511
269.00 Metal
500 mm (19.7 in)
150 mm
(5.9 in)
Printed Kymograph Paper Sheets
Kerosene Smoking Burner
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
This Smoking Burner provides a dense black smoke for even distribution on the Kymograph Cylinder. This Smoking Burner has a reservoir
that holds 100 ml of kerosene or other hydrocarbon. The heavy wick is
3 mm (1/8 in) thick, 125 mm (5 in) long and 75 mm (3 in) wide. The
burner has a heavy, positive acting wick adjustment knob. Replacement
wicks can be cut from standard heater wicks. This must be used in a
fume cupboard. Not for use with plastic cylinders.
I148
Catalog No.
BS4 50-5768
$
This high quality Kymograph Paper has a special glaze for ink recording. Each Sheet has an additional 15 mm wide strip that is gummed for
mounting the Sheet onto a 500 mm (19.7 in) circumference Kymograph
Cylinder. Each vertical ruling represents 1/100 second when the
Kymograph speed is set at 5, i.e. 625 mm per second, which is the
appropriate speed to record a simple muscle twitch. Available in two
heights for 500 mm (19.7 in) circumference Kymograph Cylinders only.
Supplied in a package of 100 sheets. There are no Printed Sheets for the
1000 mm (39.4 in) circumference Cylinders. For paper, see Unprinted
Kymograph Paper Sheets to the right.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-5396
79.00 500 mm (19.7 in)
Circumference
Paper Height
150 mm (5.9 in)
BS4 50-5362
56.00 500 mm (19.7 in)
200 mm (7.9 in)
Product
680.00 Kerosene Smoking Burner
•
Unprinted
Kymograph Paper
Sheets
Available for ink or
smoke record
This high quality plain Paper is
specially glazed for either ink recording or smoke recording. Each Sheet
has an additional 15 mm wide strip that is gummed for mounting the
Sheet on the Kymograph Cylinder. Supplied in a package of 100 sheets.
Unprinted Kymograph Paper Sheets
Kymograph Cylinder,
Circumference x H
For Ink
Recording
500 x 150 mm
BS4 50-5578
1000 x 150 mm
BS4 50-5594
1000 x 300 mm
BS4 50-5602
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
$
For Smoke
Recording
45.00 BS4 50-5685
BS4 50-5701
78.00
$
101.00
Kymographs & Accessories
Kymograph Accessories
BS4 50-3573
Myograph Board with
Lever Assembly
BS4 50-5669
Complete Muscle
and Heart Assembly
Muscle and Heart Bath
Myograph Board
The Complete Assembly mounts
• Available as bath only or
on the upright of the Harvard
as complete assembly
Apparatus Universal Kymograph,
with electrode and lever
and permits a wide range of experiments with muscle-nerves and
frog hearts. The apparatus is made up of three parts: the bath, the electrode and the lever and pen assembly.
The Myograph Board has a 6 mm
thick cork plate cemented to an
acrylic bloc measuring 87 x 139
mm (3.4 x 5.5 in). At one end and
one side there are 9.5 mm mounting clamps with locking screws for securing the board to a kymograph
upright or suitable stand. At the other end there is a fork fitting for the crank
lever. The crank lever has a threaded shank flattened on two sides that slide
into the fork fitting and is secured by to knurled thumb nuts. The nut can
move along the entire length of the shaft giving 38.1 mm (1.5 in) vertical
adjustment. The L-shaped lever extends 72 mm (2.83 in) horizontally from
the fulcrum and 20 mm (0.78 in) vertically. The horizontal arm has 8 holes
and the vertical arm 3 holes for tying thread. A thumb screw can be adjusted to limit the downward movement of the lever. The board without the lever
only has one mounting clip.
Bath
Available with or without
crank lever assembly
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-3573
210.00 Myograph Board with Lever
BS4 50-3565
106.00 Board Only
Electrode
The Electrode has its own upright and clamp for mounting to one ledge of
the bath giving total freedom of placement. It has two fixed J-shaped stainless steel wires for stimulation and two leads for connection to a stimulator.
Physiology
This clear plastic Bath has internal dimensions of 55 x 150 x 90 mm
(2-1/ x 6 x 3/4 in). At one end of the bath is a solid mounting block
with a hole and locking screw for securing the bath to a Kymograph
upright. A metal spring extends from the bath to the upright for
grounding. Muscle preparations can be secured to the base of the bath
by passing a pin through the muscle and into the hole situated at one
end of the bath. The larger of two flat cork plates supplied can lay in
the bottom of the bath and has a hole to allow a pin to be located easily. The smaller piece of flat cork fits vertically into one end of the bath
and is used for the locust tibia extensor (levator) muscle preparation.
The bottom of the bath has a mounting ledge along the length of each
side, providing mounting locations for the electrode and recording
lever. The bath has a drain hold, tubing and plug.
•
Lever and Pen Assembly
The Lever and Pen Assembly has its own upright and clamp allowing vertical adjustment and lateral positioning at any point along the ledge of the
bath. The assembly has an L-shaped lever to one side and a pen arm with
counter-balance weight to the other. The lever and pen arm is pivoted
with needle bearings in a mounting bracket so that the lever is positioned
in the center of the bath. Each leg of the L-lever has four holes at 5 mm
centers for attaching preparations by thread. One leg is horizontal and
the other vertical. A thumb screw can be adjusted to limit the downward
movement of the lever. Ink or smoke writing can be achieved with the
pen arm. The complete assembly is supplied with: Bath, Lever Assembly
and Pen, two cork plates, heart clip, fixing pin and drain plug. The Bath
Only is supplied with: Bath, two cork plates, fixing pin and drain plug.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-5669
425.00 Complete Muscle and Heart Bath
BS4 50-5677
176.00 Muscle and Heart Bath Only
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I149
Kymographs & Accessories
Kymograph Accessories
BS4 50-6766
Pendulum Auxotonic Lever
Brodie Universal Heart Lever
Pendulum Auxotonic Lever
The head of this Lever is drilled and tapped so that it can be mounted
on the stem in any of four ways. The horizontal bar is pierced with 6
holes on 5 mm (1/5 in) pitch from the fulcrum point. The spring tension can be adjusted by moving the anchor arm backward and forward
on the Lever stem. The 6.5 mm (1/4 in) diameter stem is 12.5 cm
(5 in) long. Supplied with a BS4 50-0686 Ink Pen, see page I152.
The Pendulum Auxotonic Lever is mainly for study of the extensibility of
tissue under the action of drugs. This Lever is supplied with one pair each
of 5, 10, and 20 gram weights. As the preparation moves, these weights
move in relation to the fulcrum and exert varying pressure on the preparation. Two lever arms are supplied, both pierced and notched. Frontal
Writing Point, BS4 50-6451 (supplied) is attached to one lever arm to
hold a BS4 50-7681 Ink Pen (not supplied). The lever frame is drilled
with four holes that accept the stem permitting four different mounting
positions. The mounting stem is 6.5 mm (1/4 in) OD x 12.5 cm (5 in).
Catalog No.
BS4 50-0678
$
Product
148.00 Brodie Universal Heart Lever
Catalog No.
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 50-6766
Product
BS4 50-6550
Gimble Lever with
Ink Pen and Reservoir
Gimbal Lever
Starling Heart Lever
This Gimbal Lever has a fulcrum
frame that can be mounted on the
stem in either of two directions.
The stem is 6.5 mm OD x 125 mm
(1/4 x 5 in). The fulcrum frame carries a 73 mm (2-7/8 in) lever pierced
with 4 holes in front of the fulcrum and 6 holes behind the fulcrum.
This Starling Heart Lever has an arm that is pierced with six holes of 5
mm (1/5 in) pitch from the fulcrum point. The spring tension is also
adjustable. The Lever can be mounted on any standard 9.5 mm (3/8
in) diameter rod. The Lever is supplied with a BS4 50-0686 Ink Pen.
This Lever is available separately for smoke writing or with a BS4 503524 Ink Pen with Reservoir. The 2 ml ink reservoir is attached to the
mounting rod. Miniature tubing leads ink from the reservoir to the 15.2
cm (6 in) stainless steel lever. Fixed to the end of the small bore tubing
lever is a tiny ink writing nib. The ink is not supplied, see below.
BS4 50-0660
•
Available with or without
ink pen with reservoir
Catalog No.
$
Catalog No.
$
Product
106.00 Starling Heart Lever
Product
BS4 50-6550
346.00 Lever with Ink Pen with Reservoir
BS4 50-6543
140.00 Lever Only for Smoke Writing
BS4 50-0728
I150
$
214.00 Pendulum Auxotonic Lever
16.88 Writing Ink, 30 ml
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Kymographs & Sub-Section
Accessories
Kymograph Accessories
Complete Simple Lever and
Frontal Writing Point
This Complete Simple Lever Assembly consists of a BS4 50-6519
Simple Lever, BS4 50-6477 Frontal Writing Point with Aluminum Stem
and BS4 50-7681 Ink Pen. The Lever has a 6.5 mm (1/4 in) OD, 10
cm (4 in) long mounting rod. The fulcrum of the lever is held in an
adjustable needle bearing with stout jaws. The 22.5 cm (9 in) aluminum stem of the Writing Point is held by the Lever. The Frontal
Writing Point consists of a plastic yoke that fits on the end of the
mounting stem. The yoke carries an aluminum wire (pen holder)
that wraps around and holds the BS4 50-7681 Ink Pen. The individual components are also available separately.
Oxford Isometric Lever
This Lever consists of a heavy C-shaped universal frame and three easily interchangeable isometric levers of different strengths. The isometric lever is held between the two arms of the frame and can be interchanged by loosening a locking screw. Each isometric lever has four
holes behind the fulcrum and one in front of it, all on 4 mm (0.15 in)
pitch. The three isometric levers are supplied with wires measuring
1.02, 0.71 and 0.56 mm OD (0.04, 0.028 and 0.022 in). The Levers
have a split fork for attaching the BS4 50-0686 Ink Pen (supplied).
The holding frame can be mounted on any standard 9.5 mm (3/8 in)
diameter rod such as those supplied with the Universal Kymograph.
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-0652
$
Product
BS4 50-6733
$
Product
179.00 Oxford Isometric Lever
115.00 Simple Lever and Frontal Writing Point
77.00 Replacement Simple Lever
BS4 50-6477
30.00 Replacement Frontal Writing Point with Aluminum
Stem
BS4 50-7681
10.00 Replacement Ink Pen
BS4 50-6485
45.00 Replacement Frontal Writing Point, Aluminum Stem
and Ink Pen
Physiology
BS4 50-6519
Student Isometric Lever
Strawholder Lever
The frame of this Lever is drilled with four holes so that the mounting stem can be positioned vertically or in three directions on the
horizontal plane. The 6.5 mm (1/4 in) OD stem is 12.5 cm (5 in)
long. A spring-loaded metal ring slides on the fulcrum, exposing a 4
mm (0.16 in) hole when the spring is compressed. The end of a
straw or other light lever is placed in the hole and is secured when
the spring expands, pushing the ring against the lever.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-6535
48.00 Strawholder Lever
The Student Isometric Lever consists of a wire spring with lever held
in a C-shaped frame with mounting rod. The wire is locked securely
at one end by a large wing nut with the opposite end pivoting freely.
The length of rod that parallels the wire spring is adjustable, providing the desired tension on the spring. The rod is then locked in place.
Lever is securely fixed to the wire spring, and then pierced with six
holes in front of the fulcrum and two holes behind it. Holes are 5 mm
(0.2 in) pitch from fulcrum point. Front of arm has a split fork
arrangement for fixing BS4 50-0686 Ink Pen (supplied).
Catalog No.
BS4 50-6741
$
Product
135.00 Student Isometric Lever
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I151
Kymographs & Accessories
Kymograph Accessories
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 50-0686 Ink Pen
I152
Piston Recorders
Ink Pen
These high quality Piston Recorders are precisely manufactured. The
glass cylinders are made of specially drawn and annealed glass tubing,
which has been ground true. The aluminum alloy pistons are individually matched to the cylinders. The Recorders are extremely flexible and
adjustable. The glass cylinder is mounted in a metal base and has a riffled tubing connector at the bottom. The cylinder is held in a split bushing operated by a large knurled knob and can be vertically adjusted. The
aluminum alloy piston has a rocker arm that can be connected to any of
9 holes in the writing lever arm. The holes are spaced on 4 mm pitch
from the fulcrum. The writing lever arm has an adjustable counterpoise
weight. The entire cylinder and piston assembly can be moved in and
out of the hollow stem for horizontal adjustment, and locked securely in
place when adjusted. In this manner, the amplitude of the writing lever
can be adjusted. The writing lever terminates in a connector for a writing point. A pressure transducer can be used in place of the pen. The
stem is 9.5 mm (3/8 in) in diameter.
This Ink Pen has a very small ink writing nib set in the sealed end. The
reservoir holds several drops of ink for tracings. The pen and reservoir are mounted on the end of a 100 mm (4 in) aluminum stem with
a split fork mount for mating with levers. Supplied with a stilette wire
to draw the ink through the nib. The BS4 50-0736 Pen Filler, available
separately, is used to fill the pen, see below. Some ink should flow
through the pen while it is filled to keep an air lock from forming that
would impede ink flow.
Catalog No.
$
Product
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-0686
27.00 Ink Pen
Product
Writing Ink
This specially prepared ink is for use with fine capillary tubing and fine
writing styli. Available in two sizes.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-6063
335.00 Piston Recorder, 5 ml
Product
BS4 50-0728
16.88 Writing Ink, 30 ml, plastic bottle
BS4 50-6071
351.00 Piston Recorder, 15 ml
BS4 50-5933
26.00 Writing Ink, 250 ml, glass bottle
BS4 50-6089
358.00 Piston Recorder, 45 ml
Pen Filler
This Pen Filler is a small plastic syringe with a capacity of 1 ml, graduated by 0.1 ml increments. It is used to fill the pen supplied with the
writing points.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-0736
7.00 Pen Filler
Product
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Kymographs & Accessories
Kymograph Accessories
Tambours
Condon’s Sensitive Manometer
These tambours are for gas displacement indication measurements. A rubber diaphragm is
stretched over a cylinder and held in
place by a rubber O-ring (supplied)
which slips on and beds itself in a
groove along the edge of the cylinder. At the base of cylinder is an inlet/outlet port for 6.5 mm ID (0.26 in) tubing (not included). As volume change occurs, the rubber diaphragm moves
causing a rise or fall of the metal plate which moves the lever. Available in two
sizes, the medium tambour has a 40 mm long (1.6 in) diaphragm and 6 mm
OD x 120 mm long (0.25 x 4.7 in) mounting stem. Large tambour has a 75
mm (3 in) diaphragm and 9.5 mm OD x 120 mm long (3/8 x 4.7 in) mounting stem and is used with instruments such as the BS4 50-6154
Pneumograph. Amplitude is adjusted by moving fulcrum along mounting
stem.
This Manometer is twice as sensitive
as the normal U-shaped tube
Standard Mercury Manometer. It
will accurately sense pressures
from 0 to 200 mmHg. It has a 280
mm (11 in) glass tube with a 2.5 mm (0.1 in) bore. The glass tube is connected by tubing to a 25 mm (1 in) diameter mercury reservoir. Very small
changes in the mercury level in the reservoir cause large changes in the glass
tube. The scale is calibrated to compensate for the multiplying effect, so that
very accurate pressure readings can be taken. A small cylindrical float is
fixed to fine stainless steel tubing and is kept vertical in the tube by a guide
rod. An ink writing point is attached to the steel tube and is held against the
Kymograph Cylinder by a suspension wire and a guide weight. Mounts on a
standard 9.5 mm (3/8 in) diameter rod. Supplied without mercury.
•
Two sizes available:
— 40 mm (1.6 in)
diameter diaphragm
— 75 mm (3 in) diameter
diaphragm
•
For recording the blood
pressure of rats and
other small animals
BS4 50-5974
Catalog No.
$
Product
490.00 Condon’s Sensitive Manometer
Product
BS4 50-6022
417.00 Medium Tambour
BS4 50-6030
311.00 Large Tambour
BS4 50-6048
$
9.00 Replacement Tambour Rubber, 1,000 cm2 Sheet of
Best Quality, Pure Dam Rubber for Replacing
Damaged Tambour Diaphragms
Weight Sets
These Weight Sets consist of a hook/weight pan and nine pierced disk
weights. The assembly hangs from the hook when the weights are in
place. Three sets are available with total weights of 10, 50 and 100
grams. The 10 Gram Set has a 1 gram hook/weight pan with nine 1
gram disk weights. The 50 Gram Set has a 5 gram hook/weight pan
with nine 5 gram disk weights. The 100 Gram Set has a 10 gram
hook/weight pan with nine 10 gram disk weights.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-2468
53.00 Weight Set, 10 g
Product
BS4 50-2476
61.00 Weight Set, 50 g
BS4 50-2484
67.00 Weight Set, 100 g
Standard Mercury Manometer
Physiology
Catalog No.
The glass U-shaped tube of this Manometer is 300 mm (12 in) long
and has a bore of 5 mm (0.2 in). The scale is movable for zero adjustment, and is calibrated from 0 to 250 mm in 10 mm increments. The
Manometer mounts on a standard 9.5 mm (3/8 in) diameter rod.
Supplied without mercury.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-5982
$
Product
404.00 Standard Mercury Manometer
Sensitive Water Manometer
For recording very sensitive movements such as venous pressure. The
U-shaped glass tube is 350 mm (14 in) long and has a large 9 mm
(0.35 in) bore. The scale is movable for zero adjustment and is calibrated from 0 to 250 mm in 10 mm increments. The Manometer
mounts on a standard 9.5 mm (3/8 in) diameter rod.
Catalog No.
BS4 50-5990
$
Product
489.00 Sensitive Water Manometer
U.S. Toll Free: (800) 272-2775 • Fax: (508) 429-5732 • Online: www.harvardapparatus.com
I153
Kymographs & Accessories
Kymograph Accessories
Double Pulley Holder
Stem Mount Pulley
Mounts on the standard 9.5 mm (3/8 in) diameter rod.
Grooved 25 mm (1 in) diameter wheel mounted in needle bearings.
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-2666
91.00 Stem Mount Pulley
BS4 50-0702
$
Product
118.00 Double Pulley Holder
Product
Specialized Tools for Bioresearch
BS4 50-6006
Round Edge Cup Receiver
I154
Aluminum Lever with Point
Fixed Mount Pulley
This Light Aluminum Lever is 22.5 cm (9 in) long and has a plastic point.
Light weight plastic wheel with deep groove. Negligible friction since pulley
runs on hard steel spindles. Mounts on standard 9.5 mm (3/8 in) rod.
Catalog No.
$
BS4 50-6436
6.00 Aluminum Lever with Point
Product
Catalog No.
BS4 50-0710
$
Product
157.00 Fixed Mount Pulley, 25 mm
BS4 50-6006
Round Edge Cup Receiver
Cup Receivers
Swivel Mount Pulleys
These moulded plastic cup receivers are for recording the pulse from an
artery. The cup receiver is pressed over the limb at artery site and small
changes in volume in the cup are transmitted through flexible tubing to a
read-out device, such as a Tambour, see page I153. The riffled tube connector on back has an inside diameter of 3 mm (1/8 in). The cup is 45 mm
(1-3/4 in) diameter and 6.5 mm (1/4 in) deep. It is available in two shapes:
round and with a flattened edge for getting into hard-to-reach spots.
Light weight plastic wheel with deep groove. Swivels Negligible friction
since the Pulley runs on hard steel spindles. Mounts on standard 9.5
mm (3/8 in) diameter rod. Available in three sizes.
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-6006
33.00 Cup Receiver, Round
BS4 50-6014
42.00 Cup Receiver, Flat Edge
Catalog No.
$
Product
BS4 50-2708
132.00 Swivel Mount Pulley, 15 mm (5/8 in)
BS4 50-2716
171.00 Swivel Mount Pulley, 25 mm (1 in)
BS4 50-2724
119.00 Swivel Mount Pulley, 35 mm (1-1/2 in)
11,000 Specialty Products to Enhance Your Bioresearch
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising